2011 Saab 9-4X Owner Manual M · 2019-06-02 · Saab 9-4X Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (3,1) In...

Black plate (1,1)Saab 9-4X Owner Manual - 2011

2011 Saab 9-4X Owner Manual M

In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15Performance andMaintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20

Keys, Doors and Windows . . . 2-1Keys and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12Vehicle Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16Exterior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18Interior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25

Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . 3-1Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45

Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . 4-1Additional Storage Features . . . 4-3Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12

Instruments and Controls . . . . 5-1Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

Information Displays . . . . . . . . . . 5-29Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . . 5-42Universal Remote System . . . . 5-48

Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Lighting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 7-1Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7

Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . 9-1Driving Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Starting and Operating . . . . . . . 9-17Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24Automatic Transmission . . . . . . 9-26Drive Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . 9-34Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39Object Detection Systems . . . . 9-41Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52Conversions and Add-Ons . . . 9-61

Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-3Vehicle Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-38Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44Wheels and Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-92Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-97Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . 10-101


2011 Saab 9-4X Owner Manual M

Service and Maintenance . . . 11-1General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . 11-3Recommended Fluids,Lubricants, and Parts . . . . . . . 11-4

Maintenance Records . . . . . . . . 11-7

Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . 12-1Vehicle Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Customer Information . . . . . . . 13-1Customer Information . . . . . . . . 13-1Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . 13-9Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-1


Introduction iii

Saab Automobile, Saab Cars NorthAmerica, SAAB, Saab 9-4X, and theSaab Emblem are registeredtrademarks of Saab Automobile, AB.

This manual describes features thatmay or may not be on your specificvehicle either because they areoptions that you did not purchase ordue to changes subsequent to theprinting of this owner manual.Please refer to the purchasedocumentation relating to yourspecific vehicle to confirm each ofthe features found on your vehicle.

Keep this manual in the vehicle forquick reference.

Canadian Vehicle Owners

Propriétaires Canadiens

A French language copy of thismanual can be obtained from yourdealer or Saab.

On peut obtenir un exemplaire dece guide en français auprès duconcessionnaire.

Using this ManualTo quickly locate information aboutthe vehicle, use the Index in theback of the manual. It is analphabetical list of what is in themanual and the page number whereit can be found.

Danger, Warnings, andCautionsWarning messages found on vehiclelabels and in this manual describehazards and what to do to avoid orreduce them.

Danger indicates a hazard with ahigh level of risk which will result inserious injury or death.

Warning or Caution indicates ahazard that could result in injury ordeath.

{ WARNING

These mean there is somethingthat could hurt you or otherpeople.

Notice: This means there issomething that could result inproperty or vehicle damage. Thiswould not be covered by thevehicle's warranty.

A circle with a slash through it is asafety symbol which means “DoNot,” “Do not do this,” or “Do not letthis happen.”


iv Introduction

SymbolsThe vehicle has components andlabels that use symbols instead oftext. Symbols are shown along withthe text describing the operation orinformation relating to a specificcomponent, control, message,gauge, or indicator.

M : This symbol is shown whenyou need to see your owner manualfor additional instructions orinformation.

* : This symbol is shown whenyou need to see a service manualfor additional instructions orinformation.

Vehicle Symbol Chart

Here are some additional symbolsthat may be found on the vehicleand what they mean. For moreinformation on the symbol, refer tothe Index.

9 : Airbag Readiness Light

# : Air Conditioning

! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)

% : Audio Steering Wheel Controlsor OnStar®

$ : Brake System Warning Light

" : Charging System

I : Cruise Control

B : Engine Coolant Temperature

O : Exterior Lamps

# : Fog Lamps

. : Fuel Gauge

+ : Fuses

3 : Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger

j : LATCH System ChildRestraints

* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp

: : Oil Pressure

g : Outside Power FoldawayMirrors

} : Power

/ : Remote Vehicle Start

> : Safety Belt Reminders

7 : Tire Pressure Monitor

d : Traction Control/ElectronicStability Program (ESP)®

M : Windshield Washer Fluid


In Brief 1-1

In Brief

Instrument PanelInstrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

Initial Drive InformationInitial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 1-5Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8Heated and VentilatedSeats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10

Head RestraintAdjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10

Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11Sensing System forPassenger Airbag . . . . . . . . . . 1-11

Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11

Steering WheelAdjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12

Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . 1-13Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15

Vehicle FeaturesRadio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16Portable Audio Devices . . . . . . 1-17Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . 1-17Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18Navigation System . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18Driver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19

Rear VisionCamera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19

Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 1-19Storage Compartments . . . . . . 1-19Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20Universal Remote System . . . 1-20

Performance and MaintenanceTraction ControlSystem (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20

Electronic StabilityProgram (ESP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20

Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . 1-21Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21

Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 1-21Driving for Better FuelEconomy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22

OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23


1-2 In Brief

Instrument Panel


In Brief 1-3

A. Air Vents on page 8‑6.

B. Turn and Lane‐Change Lever(Out of View). See Turn andLane-Change Signals onpage 6‑5.

Driver Information Center (DIC)Controls (Out of View). SeeDriver Information Center (DIC)on page 5‑29.

C. Tap Shift Controls (If Equipped).See Manual Mode onpage 9‑28.

D. Instrument Cluster onpage 5‑10.

E. Windshield Wiper/Washer onpage 5‑3 (Out of View).

Rear Window Wiper/Washer onpage 5‑5 (Out of View).

F. Night Panel Button. SeeInstrument Panel IlluminationControl on page 6‑6.

G. Hazard Warning Flashers onpage 6‑5.

Safety Locks on page 2‑12.

Power Door Locks onpage 2‑11.

H. Infotainment Display.

I. Exterior Lamp Controls onpage 6‑1.

Front Fog Lamps on page 6‑5(If Equipped).

Instrument Panel IlluminationControl on page 6‑6.

J. Data Link Connector (DLC)(Out of View). See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp on page 5‑18.

K. Cruise Control on page 9‑39.

L. Steering Wheel Adjustment onpage 5‑2.

M. Horn on page 5‑3.

N. Adjustable Pedal Control(If Equipped) (Out of View).See Adjustable Throttle andBrake Pedal on page 9‑18.

O. Steering Wheel Controls onpage 5‑2.

P. Infotainment on page 7‑1.

Q. Traction Control System(TCS)/Electronic StabilityProgram (ESP) Button(If Equipped). See TractionControl System (TCS) onpage 9‑34 or Electronic StabilityProgram (ESP) on page 9‑36.

Selective Ride Control onpage 9‑37.


1-4 In Brief

R. ECO Button (If Equipped).See Fuel Economy Mode onpage 9‑29.

S. Park Assist Button(If Equipped). See UltrasonicParking Assist on page 9‑41.

T. Parking Brake on page 9‑31.

U. START/STOP Button. SeeIgnition Positions on page 9‑18.

V. Shift Lever. See Shifting IntoPark on page 9‑23.

W. Power Outlets on page 5‑8.

X. Dual Automatic Climate ControlSystem on page 8‑1.

Heated and Ventilated FrontSeats on page 3‑10 (IfEquipped).

Initial DriveInformationThis section provides a briefoverview about some of theimportant features that may or maynot be on your specific vehicle.

For more detailed information, referto each of the features which can befound later in this owner manual.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemThe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter is used to lock andunlock the doors from up to 60 m(195 ft) away from the vehicle.

Press the key release button nearthe bottom of the transmitter toremove the key. The key can beused for the driver door and theglove box.

K : Press to unlock the driver dooror all doors depending on thevehicle personalization settings.

Q : Press to lock all doors.

Lock and unlock feedback can bepersonalized. See VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑42.


In Brief 1-5

& : Press until the liftgate beginsto move to open or close the powerliftgate.

L : Press and release one time tolocate the vehicle.

Press and holdL forthree seconds to sound the panicalarm.

PressL again or start the vehicleto cancel the panic alarm.

See Keys on page 2‑2 and RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 2‑3.

Remote Vehicle StartWith this feature the engine can bestarted from outside of the vehicle.

Starting the Vehicle

1. Press Q on the RKE transmitter.

2. Within two seconds, press andhold/ until the turn signallamps flash, or for at leasttwo seconds if the vehicle is notin view.

When the vehicle starts, the parkinglamps will turn on and remain on aslong as the engine is running. Thedoors will be locked and the climatecontrol system may come on.

The engine will continue to run for10 minutes. Repeat the steps for a10-minute time extension. Remotestart can be extended only once.

Canceling a Remote Start

To cancel a remote start, do any ofthe following:

. Press and hold/ until theparking lamps turn off.

. Turn on the hazard warningflashers.

. Turn the vehicle on and then off.

See Remote Vehicle Start onpage 2‑9.

Door LocksTo lock or unlock a door, use theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter from the outside.

From inside the vehicle with thedoors locked, pull once on the doorhandle to unlock it, and a secondtime to open it or use the powerdoor lock switch.


1-6 In Brief

The power door lock switch is onthe instrument panel.

K : Press to unlock the doors.

Q : Press to lock the doors.

See Power Door Locks onpage 2‑11.

Liftgate

Manual Liftgate Operation

For vehicles without keyless access,unlock the vehicle before openingthe liftgate.

Press the touch pad located in thehandle of the liftgate, above thelicense plate, and lift up to open.

Do not press the touch pad whileclosing the liftgate. This will causethe liftgate to be unlatched.

Power Liftgate Operation

On vehicles with a power liftgate theswitch is located on the driver door.The vehicle must be in P (Park) touse the power feature. The taillampsflash when the power liftgatemoves.

Choose the power liftgate mode byturning the dial on the switch untilthe indicator lines up with thedesired position. Press the centerof the switch.

See Liftgate on page 2‑12 for moreinformation.


In Brief 1-7

Windows

Driver Side Shown

The power window controls are oneach of the side doors.

The driver door also has switchesthat control the passenger and rearwindows.

Operate the switch for the windowby pressing to open and pulling toclose.

Pushing or pulling the switch part ofthe way will open or close thewindow as long as the switch isoperated. See Power Windows onpage 2‑22 for more information.

Seat Adjustment

Manual Seats

To adjust a manual seat:

1. Pull the handle at the front of theseat cushion.

2. Move the seat forward orrearward to adjust the seatposition.

3. Release the handle to stop theseat from moving.

4. Try to move the seat back andforth to be sure it is locked inplace.

To raise or recline the seatback, usethe lever on the outboard side ofthe seat.

See Seat Adjustment on page 3‑4and Reclining Seatbacks onpage 3‑8 for more information.


1-8 In Brief

Power Seats

A. Seat Position Control

B. Seatback Adjustment Control

C. Lumbar Adjustment Control

To adjust a power seat, if equipped:. Slide control (A) forward or

rearward, and up or down toadjust the power seat.

See Power Seat Adjustment onpage 3‑4.

. Raise or recline the seatback bytilting the top of the control (B)forward or rearward.

See Reclining Seatbacks onpage 3‑8.

. Increase or decrease the lumbarsupport by pressing and holdingthe front or rear of control (C).See Lumbar Adjustment onpage 3‑7.

Memory Features

On vehicles with the memoryfeature, the “1” and “2” buttons onthe outboard side of the driver seatare used to manually save andrecall features. These featuresinclude the driver seat andadjustable throttle and brake pedalpositions, if equipped. It also mayinclude the outside mirror positions,if programmed. These manuallystored positions are referred to asButton Memory positions.


In Brief 1-9

Not all vehicles with the memoryfeature will have programmableoutside mirrors.

The vehicle will also automaticallysave driver seat, adjustable throttleand brake pedal positions, and theoutside mirror positions to thecurrent driver Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter when theignition is turned off. Theseautomatically stored positionsare referred to as RKE Memorypositions.

Storing Button Memory Positions

To save positions into ButtonMemory:

1. Adjust the driver seat, seatbackrecliner, adjustable pedals, andboth outside mirrors to thedesired driving positions.

2. Press and release theMEM (Memory) button.

3. Press “1” until a beep sounds.

4. Repeat Steps 1 through 3 for asecond driver using “2.”

To recall the manually saved ButtonMemory positions, press and hold“1” or “2.” The driver seat, adjustablepedals, and outside mirrors move tothe positions stored to those buttonswhen pressed. Releasing “1” or “2”before the stored positions arereached stops the recall.

To automatically recall RKE Memorypositions, unlock the driver doorwith the RKE transmitter, and openthe driver door. On vehicles withkeyless access, opening the driverdoor when an RKE transmitter ispresent will activate the RKEMemory recall. If the driver door isalready open, pressing the RKEtransmitter K button will alsoactivate the RKE Memory recall.The driver seat, outside mirrors, andpedals will move to the previouslysaved RKE Memory positions.

See “Memory Seats” under PowerSeat Adjustment on page 3‑4 formore information.

Easy Exit Driver Seat

This feature moves the seatrearward allowing the drivermore room to exit the vehicle.

To activate, place the ignition inOFF or ACCESSORY and open thedriver door. If the driver door isalready open, placing the ignition inOFF or ACCESSORY will activatethe easy exit driver seat.

This feature is turned on or off usingthe vehicle personalization menu.See “Easy Exit Driver Seat” underVehicle Personalization onpage 5‑42 for more information.


1-10 In Brief

Heated and Ventilated Seats

If available, the buttons are on theclimate control panel. To operate,the ignition must be on.

Press L or M to heat the seat.

Press { or C to ventilate the seat.

Press the button once for thehighest setting. With each press ofthe button, the seat will change tothe next lower setting, and then tothe off setting. The lights indicatethree for the highest setting and onefor the lowest.

See Heated and Ventilated FrontSeats on page 3‑10 for moreinformation.

Head RestraintAdjustmentDo not drive until the head restraintsfor all occupants are installed andadjusted properly.

To achieve a comfortable seatingposition, change the seatbackrecline angle as little as necessarywhile keeping the seat and the headrestraint height in the properposition.

For more information see HeadRestraints on page 3‑2 and SeatAdjustment on page 3‑4.


In Brief 1-11

Safety Belts

Refer to the following sections forimportant information on how to usesafety belts properly.. Safety Belts on page 3‑14.. How to Wear Safety Belts

Properly on page 3‑18.. Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 3‑23.. Lower Anchors and Tethers for

Children (LATCH System) onpage 3‑53.

Sensing System forPassenger Airbag

United States

Canada

The passenger sensing system willturn off the right front passengerfrontal airbag and seat‐mountedside impact airbag under certainconditions. The driver airbags androof‐rail airbags are not affected bythe passenger sensing system.

The passenger airbag statusindicator will be visible on theoverhead console when the vehicle

is started. See Passenger SensingSystem on page 3‑38 for moreinformation.

Mirror Adjustment

Exterior

Controls for the outside powermirrors are located on thedriver door.

To adjust the mirror:

1. Move the selector switch toL (left) or R (right) to choose thedriver or passenger mirror.


1-12 In Brief

2. Press the arrows on the controlpad to move each mirror in thedesired direction.

3. Adjust each outside mirror sothat a little of the vehicle and thearea behind it can be seen.

4. Return the selector switch to thecenter position.

See Power Mirrors on page 2‑19.

If the vehicle has the automaticdimming mirror, the driver outsidemirror automatically adjusts for theglare of headlamps behind you.

See Automatic Dimming RearviewMirror on page 2‑21.

Interior

Adjust the inside rearview mirrormanually, by moving it up and downor side to side for a clearer viewbehind the vehicle.

The vehicle may have an automaticdimming inside rearview mirror.Automatic dimming reduces theglare from the headlamps of thevehicle behind you.

Steering WheelAdjustment

The adjustment lever is located onthe left side of the steering column.

To adjust the steering wheel:

1. Pull the lever down.

2. Move the steering wheel up ordown and in or out to acomfortable position.

3. Pull the lever up to lock thesteering wheel in place.

Do not adjust the steering wheelwhile driving.

Interior LightingDome Lamp

The dome lamp is on the overheadconsole.

To change the dome lamp settings,press the following:

* : Turns the lamp off, even whena door is open.

1 : The lamp comes onautomatically when a door isopened.

+ : Turns the dome lamp on.

Reading Lamps

There are reading lamps on theoverhead console and over the rearpassenger doors. These lampscome on automatically when anydoor is opened.


In Brief 1-13

To manually turn the reading lampson or off:

. Press# or$ next to eachoverhead console reading lamp.

. Press the lamp lens on the rearpassenger reading lamps.

For more information on interiorlighting, see:. Instrument Panel Illumination

Control on page 6‑6.. Courtesy Lamps on page 6‑7.

Exterior Lighting

The exterior lamp control is locatedon the instrument panel to the left ofthe steering column.

O : Briefly turn to this position toturn the automatic light control off oron again.

AUTO : Automatically turns on theheadlamps, parking lamps,taillamps, instrument panel lights,and license plate lamps.

; : Turns on the parking lamps,taillamps, instrument panel lights,and taillamps.

2 : Turns on the headlamps,parking lamps, taillamps, instrumentpanel lights and license plate lamps.A warning chime sounds if thedriver's door is opened when theignition is off and the headlampsare on.

For more information, see:. Exterior Lamp Controls on

page 6‑1.. Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)

on page 6‑3.. Automatic Headlamp System on

page 6‑3.

Windshield Wiper/Washer

The windshield wiper/washer leveris located on the right side of thesteering column. With the ignition inACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN/START, move the windshield wiperlever to select the wiper speed.

2: Use for fast wipes.

1: Use for slow wipes.

G : Move the lever up toG foradjustable interval wipes, then turnthe3 band up for more frequentwipes or down for less frequentwipes. If the vehicle hasRainsense™, see the followingRainsense information.


1-14 In Brief

( : Use to turn the wipers off.

8 : For a single wipe, briefly movethe wiper lever down. For severalwipes, hold the wiper lever down.

Windshield Washer

Pull the lever toward you to spraywasher fluid on the windshield.

See Windshield Wiper/Washer onpage 5‑3 and Rear Window Wiper/Washer on page 5‑5, if equipped.

Rainsense™

For vehicles with Rainsense:

G : Move the windshield wiperlever toG. Turn the3 bandon the wiper lever to adjust thesensitivity.. Turn the band up for more

sensitivity to moisture.

. Turn the band down for lesssensitivity to moisture.

. Move the windshield wiper leverout of theG position todeactivate Rainsense.

Rear Window Wiper/Washer

The rear wiper controls are on theend of the windshield wiper lever.

Press the upper or lower portion ofthe button to control the rear wiperand rear wiper delay.

The system turns off when thebutton is returned to the middleposition.

Z : Use for continuous rearwindow wipes.

5 : Use to set a delay betweenwipes.

= : Push the windshield wiperlever forward to spray washer fluidon the rear window.

See Windshield Wiper/Washer onpage 5‑3 and Rear Window Wiper/Washer on page 5‑5.


In Brief 1-15

Climate ControlsThe heating, cooling, and ventilation for the vehicle can be controlled withthis system.

A. Driver and PassengerTemperature Control

B. Driver and Passenger Heatedand Ventilated Seats

C. AUTO (Automatic Operation)

D. Air Delivery Mode Controls

E. Defrost

F. Air Conditioning

G. ZONE

H. Fan Control

I. Rear Window Defogger

J. Recirculation

See Dual Automatic Climate ControlSystem on page 8‑1 and RearClimate Control System on page 8‑5(If Equipped).

Vehicle Features

Radio(s)

VOL/ O : Press to turn the systemon and off. Turn to increase ordecrease the volume.

RADIO/BAND: Press to choosebetween FM, AM, or XM™,if equipped.

TUNEk : Turn to select radiostations.

Press to show play or pause track.

SEEKr t : Press to seek theprevious station or track.

SEEK[u : Press to seek thenext station or track.

} BACK: Press to exit or movebackward in a menu.

Buttons 1 ‐ 6: Press to save andselect favorite stations


1-16 In Brief

For more information about theseand other radio features, see theseparate infotainment systemmanual.

Storing a Favorite Station

Stations from all bands can bestored in the favorite lists in anyorder. Up to six stations can bestored in each favorite page and thenumber of available favorite pagescan be set.

To store the station to a position inthe list, press the correspondingnumeric button 1-6 until the stationcan be heard again.

Setting the Clock

For detailed instructions on settingthe clock, see Clock (Digital Clock)on page 5‑7.

Setting the Time and Date

1. Press the CONFIG button.

2. Select Time and Date Settings.

3. Select Set Time or Set Date.

4. Turn the MENU/SELECT knobto adjust the highlighted value.

5. Press the MENU/SELECT knobto select the next value.

6. To save the time or dateand return to the Time andDate Settings menu, pressthe } BACK button at any timeor press the MENU/SELECTknob after adjusting the minutesor year.

Setting the 12/24 Hour Format



3. Highlight 12/24 Hour Format.

4. Press the MENU/SELECT knobto select the 12 hour or 24 hourdisplay format.

Setting the Month & Day Format



3. Highlight Month & Day Format.

4. Press the MENU/SELECT knobto select MM/DD (month/day) orDD/MM (day/month).

Setting the Auto Time Adjust



3. Highlight Auto Time Adjust.

4. Press the MENU/SELECT knobto turn Auto Time Adjust onor off.

Satellite RadioVehicles with an XM™ SatelliteRadio tuner and a valid XM SatelliteRadio subscription can receive XMprogramming.

XM Satellite Radio Service

XM is a satellite radio service basedin the 48 contiguous United Statesand 10 Canadian provinces. XMSatellite Radio has a wide variety ofprogramming and commercial-freemusic, coast to coast, and indigital-quality sound. A fee isrequired to receive the XM service.


In Brief 1-17

For more information refer to:. www.xmradio.com or call

1-800-929-2100 (U.S.).. www.xmradio.ca or call

1-877-438-9677 (Canada).

For more information, see theseparate infotainment systemmanual.

Portable Audio DevicesSome vehicles have a 3.5 mm(1/8 in) auxiliary input and a USBport located in the center console.External devices such as iPods®,laptop computers, MP3 players, CDchangers, and USB storage devicesmay be connected, depending onthe audio system.

For more information, see theseparate infotainment systemmanual.

Bluetooth®

The Bluetooth® system allows userswith a Bluetooth-enabled cell phoneto make and receive hands-freecalls using the vehicle audiosystem, microphone, and controls.

The Bluetooth-enabled cell phonemust be paired with the in-vehicleBluetooth system before it can beused in the vehicle. Not all phoneswill support all functions.

See the separate infotainmentsystem manual for moreinformation.

Steering Wheel Controls

For vehicles with audio steeringwheel controls, some audio controlscan be adjusted at the steeringwheel.

b / g : Press to interact with theavailable Bluetooth, OnStar,or navigation system.

$ /i : Press to silence thevehicle speakers only. Press againto turn the sound on. For vehicleswith OnStar or Bluetooth systems,press to reject an incoming call,or to end a current call.


1-18 In Brief

_ SRC ^ : Turn _ or ^ to select aradio band or audio source.

Turn _ or ^ to select the next orprevious favorite radio station, CD,DVD track/chapter (with navigation),or MP3 track.

Press SRC to change betweenradio and CD or DVD.

+ x −: Press + to increase or − todecrease the volume.

For more information, see SteeringWheel Controls on page 5‑2.

Cruise Control

The cruise control buttons are onthe steering wheel.

1 : Press to turn the cruise controlsystem on and off.

* : Press to disengage cruisecontrol without erasing the setspeed from memory.

RES/+ : Move the thumbwheel upto make the vehicle resume to apreviously set speed or toaccelerate.

SET/− : Move the thumbwheeldown to set a speed and activatecruise control, or to make thevehicle decelerate.

See Cruise Control on page 9‑39.

Navigation SystemIf the vehicle has a navigationsystem, there is a separateInfotainment System Manual thatincludes information on the radio,audio players, and navigationsystem.

The navigation system providesdetailed maps of most majorfreeways and roads. After adestination has been set, thesystem provides turn-by-turninstructions for reaching thedestination. In addition, the systemcan help locate a variety of points ofinterest (POIs), such as banks,airports, restaurants, and more.

See the infotainment system manualfor more information.


In Brief 1-19

Driver InformationCenter (DIC)The DIC display is located in thecenter of the instrument panelcluster. It shows the status of manyvehicle systems. The controls forthe DIC are located on the turnsignal lever.

A. SET/CLR: Press to set or clearthe menu item when it isdisplayed.

B. wx: Use the thumbwheel toscroll through the items ineach menu.

C. MENU: Press to get to theTrip/Fuel Menu and theVehicle Information Menu.This button is also used toreturn to or exit the last screendisplayed on the DIC.

For more information, see DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5‑29.

Rear VisionCamera (RVC)If available, the rear vision cameradisplays a view of the area behindthe vehicle when the vehicle isshifted into R (Reverse). Thedisplay will appear on either theinside rearview mirror or navigationscreen, if equipped.

To clean the camera lens, locatedabove the license plate, rinse it withwater and wipe it with a soft cloth.

See Rear Vision Camera (RVC) onpage 9‑43.

Ultrasonic Parking AssistIf available, Ultrasonic Front andRear Parking Assist (UFRPA) usessensors on the front and rearbumpers to detect objects whileparking the vehicle. It operates atspeeds less than 8 km/h (5 mph).UFRPA uses audio beeps to providedistance and system information.

Keep the sensors on the vehicle'sfront and rear bumpers clean toensure proper operation.

See Ultrasonic Parking Assist onpage 9‑41 for more information.

Storage CompartmentsThe glove box is air conditioned andcan be used to store items at alower temperature. Move the slidecontrol to open or close the openingto adjust the air flow. See Glove Boxon page 4‑1 for more information.


1-20 In Brief

Power OutletsThe accessory power outlets can beused to plug in electrical equipment,such as a cell phone or MP3 player.

The vehicle has four accessorypower outlets. The power outletslocated below the climate controlsystem, inside the center floorconsole, and on the rear of thecenter floor console are poweredwhile the vehicle is in ON/RUN/START or ACC/ACCESSORYmode, or until the driver door isopened within 10 minutes of turningoff the vehicle.

The power outlet located in the rearcargo area is powered at all times.

Open the protective cover to use theaccessory power outlet.

See Power Outlets on page 5‑8.

Universal Remote System

This system provides a way toreplace up to three remote controltransmitters used to activatedevices such as garage dooropeners, security systems, andhome automation devices.

Read the instructions completelybefore attempting to program theUniversal Remote System. Becauseof the steps involved, it may behelpful to have another personavailable to assist you withprogramming the Universal RemoteSystem.

See Universal Remote System onpage 5‑48.

Performance andMaintenance

Traction ControlSystem (TCS)The traction control system limitswheel spin. The system turns onautomatically every time the vehicleis started.

To turn off traction control, pressand release the TCS/ESP buttonlocated near the shift lever.

For more information, see TractionControl System (TCS) onpage 9‑34.

Electronic StabilityProgram (ESP)The Electronic Stability Program(ESP) system assists withdirectional control of the vehiclein difficult driving conditions.The system turns on automaticallyevery time the vehicle is started.


In Brief 1-21

To turn off both traction control andESP, press and hold the TCS/ESPbutton located near the shift lever.

For more information, see ElectronicStability Program (ESP) onpage 9‑36.

Tire Pressure MonitorThis vehicle may have a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS).

The TPMS warning light alerts youto a significant loss in pressure ofone of the vehicle's tires. If thewarning light comes on, stop assoon as possible and inflate thetires to the recommended pressure

shown on the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑12. The warninglight will remain on until the tirepressure is corrected.

During cooler conditions, the low tirepressure warning light may appearwhen the vehicle is first started andthen turn off. This may be an earlyindicator that the tire pressures aregetting low and the tires need to beinflated to the proper pressure.

The TPMS does not replace normalmonthly tire maintenance. It is thedriver’s responsibility to maintaincorrect tire pressures.

See Tire Pressure Monitor Systemon page 10‑61.

Tire Sealant andCompressor KitThis vehicle may come with a jackand spare tire or a tire sealant andcompressor kit. The kit can be usedto temporarily seal small puncturesin the tread area of the tire.

See Tire Sealant and CompressorKit on page 10‑77 for completeoperating information.

If the vehicle came with a jack andspare tire, see If a Tire Goes Flat onpage 10‑75.

Engine Oil Life SystemThe engine oil life system calculatesengine oil life based on vehicle useand displays the CHANGE ENGINEOIL SOON message when it is timeto change the engine oil and filter.The oil life system should be resetto 100% only following an oilchange.


1-22 In Brief

Resetting the Oil Life System

1. Using the DIC MENU button andthumbwheel on the turn signallever, display OIL LIFEREMAINING on the DIC. SeeDriver Information Center (DIC)on page 5‑29 and Engine OilMessages on page 5‑37.

2. Press the SET/CLR button toreset the oil life at 100%.

Be careful not to reset the oil lifedisplay accidentally at any timeother than after the oil ischanged. It cannot be resetaccurately until the next oilchange.

The oil life system can also be resetas follows:

1. Turn the ignition on with theengine off.

2. Fully press and release theaccelerator pedal three timeswithin five seconds.

If the CHANGE ENGINE OILSOON message is not on, thesystem is reset.

See Engine Oil Life System onpage 10‑14.

Driving for Better FuelEconomyDriving habits can affect fuelmileage. Here are some driving tipsto get the best fuel economypossible.. Avoid fast starts and accelerate

smoothly.. Brake gradually and avoid

abrupt stops.. Avoid idling the engine for long

periods of time.. When road and weather

conditions are appropriate, usecruise control.

. Always follow posted speedlimits or drive more slowly whenconditions require.

. Keep vehicle tires properlyinflated.

. Combine several trips into asingle trip.

. Replace the vehicle's tires withthe same TPC Spec numbermolded into the tire's sidewallnear the size.

. Follow recommended scheduledmaintenance.

Roadside AssistanceProgramU.S.: 1-800-852-9001.

TTY Users (U.S.): 1-866-612-0380.

Canada: 1-800-567-4555.

As the owner of a new Saab, youare automatically enrolled in theRoadside Assistance program.

See Roadside Assistance Programon page 13‑4 for more information.


In Brief 1-23

Roadside Service and OnStar

If you have an active OnStarsubscription, press theQ buttonand the current GPS location will besent to an OnStar Advisor who willassess your problem, contactRoadside Assistance, and relayyour exact location to get the helpyou need.

OnStar®

For vehicles with an active OnStarsubscription, OnStar uses severalinnovative technologies and liveAdvisors to provide a wide rangeof safety, security, navigation,diagnostics, and calling services.

Automatic Crash Response

In a crash, built‐in sensors canautomatically alert an OnStarAdvisor who is immediatelyconnected to the vehicle to seeif you need help.

How OnStar Service Works

Q : Push this blue button toconnect to a specially trainedOnStar Advisor to verify youraccount information and to answerquestions.

] : Push this red emergencybutton to get priority help fromspecially trained OnStar EmergencyAdvisors.

X : Push this button for hands‐free,voice‐activated calling and to givevoice commands for Hands‐FreeCalling and Turn‐by‐TurnNavigation.

Automatic Crash Response,Emergency Services, Crisis Assist,Stolen Vehicle Assistance, VehicleDiagnostics, Remote Door Unlock,Roadside Assistance, Turn‐by‐Turn

Navigation, and Hands‐Free Callingare available on most vehicles. Notall OnStar services are available onall vehicles. For more information,see the OnStar Owner's Guide;visit www.onstar.com (U.S.) orwww.onstar.ca (Canada); contactOnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR(1‐888‐466‐7827) or TTY1‐877‐248‐2080; or push theQbutton to speak with an OnStarAdvisor 24 hours a day, 7 daysa week.

For a full description of OnStarservices and system limitations, seethe OnStar Owner's Guide in theglove box.

OnStar service is subject to theOnStar Terms and Conditionsincluded in the OnStar GloveBox Kit.

OnStar service requires wirelesscommunication networks and theGlobal Positioning System (GPS)satellite network. Not all OnStarservices are available everywhereor on all vehicles at all times.


1-24 In Brief

OnStar service can’t work unlessthe vehicle is in a place whereOnStar has an agreement with awireless service provider for servicein that area, and the wirelessservice provider has coverage,network capacity, reception, andtechnology compatible with OnStarservice. Service involving locationinformation about the vehicle can’twork unless GPS signals areavailable, unobstructed, andcompatible with the OnStarhardware. The vehicle has to havea working electrical system andadequate battery power for theOnStar equipment to operate.OnStar service may not work if theOnStar equipment isn’t properlyinstalled or you haven’t maintainedit and the vehicle is in good workingorder and in compliance with allgovernment regulations. If you tryto add, connect, or modify anyequipment or software in thevehicle, OnStar service may notwork. Other problems OnStar can’tcontrol may prevent service to you,

such as hills, tall buildings, tunnels,weather, electrical system designand architecture of the vehicle,damage to important parts of thevehicle in a crash, or wireless phonenetwork congestion or jamming.

See Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑12 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-210/220/310.

OnStar Steering WheelControls

This vehicle may have a Talk/Mutebutton that can be used to interactwith OnStar Hands-Free calling.See Steering Wheel Controls onpage 5‑2 for more information.

On some vehicles, the Talk buttoncan be used to dial numbers intovoice mail systems, or to dial phoneextensions. See the OnStar Owner'sGuide for more information.

Your Responsibility

Increase the volume of the radio ifthe OnStar Advisor cannot beheard.

If the light next to the OnStarbuttons is red, the system maynot be functioning properly. PushtheQ button and request a vehiclediagnostic check. If the lightappears clear (no light appears),your OnStar subscription hasexpired and all services have beendeactivated. Push theQ button toconfirm that the OnStar equipmentis active.


Keys, Doors and Windows 2-1

Keys, Doors andWindows

Keys and LocksKeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 2-9Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12

DoorsLiftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12

Vehicle SecurityVehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16Anti-theft Alarm System . . . . . . 2-16Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17Immobilizer Operation . . . . . . . 2-17

Exterior MirrorsConvex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . 2-20Park Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20

Interior MirrorsManual Rearview Mirror . . . . . . 2-21Automatic Dimming RearviewMirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21

WindowsWindows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24

RoofSunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25


2-2 Keys, Doors and Windows

Keys and Locks

Keys

{ WARNING

Leaving children in a vehicle withthe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter is dangerous for manyreasons; children or others couldbe badly injured or even killed.They could operate the powerwindows or other controls or evenmake the vehicle move. Thewindows will function with theRKE transmitter in the vehicleand they could be seriouslyinjured or killed if caught in thepath of a closing window. Do notleave the RKE transmitter in avehicle with children.

This key, located inside the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, isused for the driver door andglove box.

To remove the key, press the buttonnear the bottom of the transmitter,and pull the key out. Never pull thekey out without pressing the button.



See your dealer if a new key isneeded.

Notice: If the keys get locked inthe vehicle, it may have to bedamaged to get them out. Alwayscarry a spare key.

Contact Roadside Assistance if youare locked out of the vehicle. SeeRoadside Assistance Program onpage 13‑4.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemSee Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑12 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-210/220/310.

If there is a decrease in the RKEoperating range:. Check the distance. The

transmitter may be too far fromthe vehicle.

. Check the location. Othervehicles or objects may beblocking the signal.

. Check the transmitter's battery.See “Battery Replacement” laterin this section.

. If the transmitter is still notworking correctly, see yourdealer or a qualified technicianfor service.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System OperationThe RKE transmitter functions willwork up to 60 m (195 ft) away fromthe vehicle.

Keep in mind that other conditions,such as those previously stated,can impact the performance of thetransmitter.

With Remote Start and PowerLiftgate Shown, Without Similar

Q (Lock): Press to lock all doors.The turn signal indicators mayflash and/or the horn may soundto indicate locking. See “LockingFeedback” under VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑42.

If the driver door is open when Q ispressed, all doors lock except thedriver door, if enabled through thevehicle personalization. If thepassenger door is open when Q ispressed, all doors lock.



Pressing Q may also arm thetheft-deterrent system. SeeAnti-theft Alarm System onpage 2‑16.

K (Unlock): Press to unlock thedriver door or all doors. See “DoorUnlock Options” under VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑42. Whenremotely unlocking the vehicle atnight the fog lamps and back-uplamps will come on for about20 seconds to light your approachto the vehicle. The turn signalindicators may flash and/or the hornmay sound to indicate unlocking.See “Unlock Feedback” underVehicle Personalization onpage 5‑42.

Memory seat positions may berecalled when unlocking the vehicle.See “Memory Remote Recall” underVehicle Personalization onpage 5‑42 for more information.

Pressing K will disarm thetheft-deterrent system. SeeAnti-theft Alarm System onpage 2‑16.

/ (Remote Start): For vehicleswith this feature, press Q and

then press and hold/ withintwo seconds to start the engine fromoutside the vehicle using the RKEtransmitter. See Remote VehicleStart on page 2‑9 for additionalinformation.

L (Vehicle Locator/PanicAlarm): Press and release onetime to locate the vehicle. Theexterior lamps flash and the hornchirps. Press and holdL forthree seconds to sound the panicalarm. The horn sounds andthe turn signal lamps flash for30 seconds, or untilL is pressedagain or the vehicle is started.

& (Remote Liftgate Release):Press until the liftgate begins tomove to open or close the powerliftgate.

Keyless Access Operation

Some vehicles have the keylessaccess system that lets you lockand unlock the doors and accessthe liftgate without removing theRKE transmitter from your pocket,purse, briefcase, etc. The RKEtransmitter must be within 1 m (3 ft)of the door being opened. If thevehicle has this feature, there willbe a body colored touch pad on theoutside front door handles.

Keyless Unlocking

With the transmitter within 1 m (3 ft),approach the front door and pullthe handle. If the transmitter isrecognized, the door will unlockand open.

Entering any door other than thedriver door will always cause all ofthe doors to unlock. This is notcustomizable.

To customize which doors unlockwhen the driver door is opened, see“Passive Unlock” under VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑42.



Keyless Locking

If the vehicle has the keylessaccess system, this feature allowsyou to select whether the doorsautomatically lock during normalvehicle exit. When the vehicle isturned off and all doors becomeclosed, the vehicle will determinehow many RKE transmitters remainin the vehicle interior. If at least onetransmitter has been removed fromthe interior of the vehicle, the doorswill lock after eight seconds.

If there are two transmitters in thevehicle and one is removed, theother will be locked in. A personapproaching the outside of thelocked vehicle without an authorizedRKE transmitter will not be able toopen the door, even with thetransmitter in the vehicle.

You may temporarily disable thekeyless locking feature by pressingand holding the power door unlockbutton on the instrument panel forseveral seconds with a door open.

Keyless locking will then remaindisabled until the door lock switchis pressed, or until the vehicle isturned on.

To customize whether the doorsautomatically lock when you exitthe vehicle, see “Passive Locking”under Vehicle Personalization onpage 5‑42.

Lock Sensor

When all doors are closed and theignition is off, the vehicle can belocked by pressing this area on the

door handle. This feature will beavailable for several minutes afterthe vehicle has been turned off.

Keyless Liftgate Opening

Press the touch pad on the liftgatehandle to open the liftgate if theRKE transmitter is within range.

Programming Transmitters tothe Vehicle

Only RKE transmitters programmedto the vehicle will work. If atransmitter is lost or stolen, areplacement can be purchased andprogrammed through your dealer.The vehicle can be reprogrammedso that lost or stolen transmitters nolonger work. Each vehicle can haveup to eight transmitters matchedto it.

Programming with a RecognizedTransmitter (Keyless AccessVehicles Only)

A new transmitter can beprogrammed to the vehicle whenthere is one recognized transmitter.



To program, the vehicle must be offand all transmitters, both currentlyrecognized and new, must bewith you.

1. Place the recognizedtransmitter(s) in the cupholder.

2. Insert the vehicle key of the newtransmitter into the key lockcylinder located on the outsideof the driver door and turn thekey to the unlock position fivetimes within 10 seconds.

The Driver Information Center(DIC) displays READY TOLEARN ELECTRONIC KEY #2,3, 4, ETC.

3. Place the new transmitter intothe transmitter pocket. Thetransmitter pocket is inside thecenter console storage arealocated between the driver andfront passenger seats. Thestorage area will need to beopened and the storage traylifted up to access thetransmitter pocket.

4. Press the START button. Whenthe transmitter is learned theDIC display will show that it isready to program the nexttransmitter.

5. Remove the transmitter fromthe transmitter pocket andpress K on the transmitter.

To program additionaltransmitters, repeat Steps 3through 5.

When all additional transmittersare programmed, press andhold the START button for10 seconds to exitprogramming mode.



Programming without aRecognized Transmitter(Keyless Access Vehicles Only)

If there are no currently recognizedtransmitters available, follow thisprocedure to program up to eighttransmitters. This feature is notavailable in Canada. This procedurewill take approximately 30 minutesto complete. The vehicle must be offand all transmitters must bewith you.

1. Insert the vehicle key of thetransmitter into the key lockcylinder located on the outsideof the driver door and turn thekey to the unlock position fivetimes within 10 seconds.

The Driver Information Center(DIC) displays REMOTE LEARNPENDING, PLEASE WAIT.

2. Wait for 10 minutes until the DICdisplays PRESS ENGINESTART BUTTON TO LEARNand then press the STARTbutton.

The DIC display will again showREMOTE LEARN PENDING,PLEASE WAIT.

3. Repeat Step 2 two additionaltimes. After the third time allpreviously known transmitterswill no longer work with thevehicle. Remaining transmitterscan be relearned during the nextsteps.

The DIC display should nowshow READY FORREMOTE #1.

4. Place the new transmitter intothe transmitter pocket. Thetransmitter pocket is inside thecenter console storage arealocated between the driver andfront passenger seats. Thestorage area will need to beopened and the storage traylifted up to access thetransmitter pocket.

5. Press the START button. Whenthe transmitter is learned theDIC display will show that it isready to program the nexttransmitter.



6. Remove the transmitter fromthe transmitter pocket andpress K on the transmitter.

To program additionaltransmitters, repeat Steps 4through 6.

When all additional transmittersare programmed, press andhold the START button for10 seconds to exitprogramming mode.

Starting the Vehicle with a LowTransmitter Battery

If the transmitter battery is weak, theDIC may display NO REMOTEDETECTED when you try to startthe vehicle. The REPLACEBATTERY IN REMOTE KEYmessage may also display.

To start the vehicle:

1. Open the center console storagearea and the storage tray.

2. Place the transmitter in thetransmitter pocket.

3. With the vehicle in P (Park) orN (Neutral), press the brakepedal and the START button.

Replace the transmitter batteryas soon as possible.

Battery Replacement

Notice: When replacing thebattery, do not touch any of thecircuitry on the transmitter. Staticfrom your body could damage thetransmitter.

Replace the battery if the REPLACEBATTERY IN REMOTE KEYmessage displays in the DIC.

1. Press the button near the bottomof the transmitter and pull thekey out.

2. Use the key blade to separatethe two halves of the transmitter.



3. Remove the old battery. Do notuse a metal object.

4. Insert the new battery, positiveside facing down. Replace with aCR2032 or equivalent battery.

5. Snap the transmitter backtogether.

Remote Vehicle StartIf available, this feature allows youto start the engine from outside thevehicle.

/ (Remote Vehicle Start): Thisbutton will be on the RKEtransmitter if the vehicle hasremote start.

Vehicles with an automatic climatecontrol system will automaticallychange to a heating or coolingmode depending on the outsidetemperature during a remote start.When the ON/RUN/START ignitionmode is selected, the climatecontrol system will return to itssetting from when the vehicle waslast turned off.

Laws in some local communitiesmay restrict the use of remotestarters. For example, some lawsmay require a person using remotestart to have the vehicle in view.Check local regulations for anyrequirements.

There are other conditions whichcan affect the performance of thetransmitter. See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System on page 2‑3 foradditional information.

Starting the Engine Using RemoteStart

1. Press Q on the RKE transmitter.

2. Within two seconds, press andhold/ until the turn signallamps flash. This confirms therequest to remote start thevehicle has been received. If thevehicle' s lamps are not visible,press and hold/ for at leasttwo seconds.

During the remote start thedoors will be locked and theparking lamps will remain on aslong as the engine is running.

The engine will shut off after10 minutes unless a timeextension is done or the ignitionis put in ON/RUN/START.

3. Press the brake pedal and selectthe ON/RUN/START ignitionmode to drive the vehicle.

Extending Engine Run Time

For a 10-minute extension, repeatSteps 1 and 2 while the engine isstill running. The remote start canonly be extended once.

When the remote start is extended,the second 10-minute period willstart immediately.

For example, if the vehicle hasbeen running for five minutes, and10 minutes are added, the enginewill run for a total of 15 minutes.



A maximum of two remote starts,or a remote start with an extension,are allowed between ignition cycles.

The vehicle's ignition must bechanged to ON/RUN/START andthen back to OFF before the remotestart procedure can be used again.

Shutting the Engine Off After aRemote Start

To cancel a remote start, do any ofthe following.

. Press/ until the parking lampsturn off.

. Turn on the hazard warningflashers.

. Turn the vehicle on and thenback off.

Conditions in Which Remote StartWill Not Work

The remote start will not operate ifany of the following occur.. The ignition is in any mode other

than OFF.. The transmitter is in the vehicle.

. The hood is not closed.

. The hazard warning flashersare on.

. There is an emission controlsystem malfunction.

. The engine coolant temperatureis too high.

. The oil pressure is low.

. Two remote vehicle starts havealready been used.

. The vehicle is not in P (Park).

Door Locks

{ WARNING

Unlocked doors can bedangerous.

. Passengers, especiallychildren, can easily open thedoors and fall out of a movingvehicle. The chance of beingthrown out of the vehicle in acrash is increased if the

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

doors are not locked. So, allpassengers should wearsafety belts properly and thedoors should be lockedwhenever the vehicle isdriven.

. Young children who get intounlocked vehicles may beunable to get out. A child canbe overcome by extreme heatand can suffer permanentinjuries or even death fromheat stroke. Always lock thevehicle whenever leaving it.

. Outsiders can easily enterthrough an unlocked doorwhen slowing or stopping thevehicle. Lock the doors tohelp prevent this fromhappening.

To lock or unlock a door, use theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter from the outside.



From inside the vehicle with thedoors locked, pull once on the doorhandle to unlock it, and a secondtime to open it.

Power Door Locks

The power door lock switch is onthe instrument panel.

K (Unlock): Press to unlock thedoors.

Q (Lock): Press to lock the doors.

Lockout Deterrent

Lockout deterrent decreases thechances that the keys may beaccidentally locked in the vehicle.

When door locking is requested bypressing Q on the instrument panel

or Q on the RKE transmitter andthe driver door is open, all doorswill lock and the driver door willimmediately unlock. The driver doormust be closed when Q is pressedfor all doors to remain locked.

This feature can be programmed toprovide the lockout deterrent featureonly when the ignition mode is ACC/ACCESSORY, or ON/RUN/START.See “Power Door Locks” in VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑42.

Delayed Locking

When this feature is enabled andthe doors are locked with the powerlock switch on the instrument panel,three chimes sound to signal thatthe delayed locking feature is inuse. All doors lock five secondsafter the last door is closed.

When the delayed locking featureis in use, pressing Q on the

instrument panel or Q on the RKEtransmitter will override the featureand lock all doors immediately.

This feature can be programmed byusing the Driver Information Center(DIC). See “Delayed Door Lock” inVehicle Personalization onpage 5‑42. The delayed lockingfeature is only available if “UnlockedDoor Anti-Lockout” is disabled.



Safety Locks

The safety lock switch is on theinstrument panel.

Rear door safety locks preventpassengers from opening the reardoors from the inside.

Press { to activate the safety locks.The LED (A) comes on whenactivated.

Pressing the button againdeactivates the lockout switch.

Doors

Liftgate

{ WARNING

Exhaust gases can enter thevehicle if it is driven with theliftgate, trunk/hatch open, or withany objects that pass through theseal between the body and thetrunk/hatch or liftgate. Engineexhaust contains carbonmonoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. It can causeunconsciousness and even death.

If the vehicle must be driven withthe liftgate, or trunk/hatch open:

. Close all of the windows.

. Fully open the air outlets onor under the instrumentpanel.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Adjust the Climate Controlsystem to a setting thatbrings in only outside airand set the fan speed to thehighest setting. See “ClimateControl Systems” in theIndex.

. If the vehicle is equipped witha power liftgate, disable thepower liftgate function.

For more information aboutcarbon monoxide, see EngineExhaust on page 9‑24.

Notice: If you open the liftgatewithout checking for overheadobstructions such as a garagedoor, you could damage theliftgate or the liftgate glass.Always check to make sure thearea above and behind the liftgateis clear before opening it.



Manual Liftgate

For vehicles without keyless access,unlock the vehicle before openingthe liftgate.

Press the touch pad located in thehandle of the liftgate, above thelicense plate, and lift up to open.

Do not press the touch pad whileclosing the liftgate. This will causethe liftgate to be unlatched.

Always close the liftgate beforedriving.

Power Liftgate

On vehicles with a power liftgate,the switch is on the driver door. Thevehicle must be in P (Park) to usethe power feature. The taillampsflash when the power liftgatemoves.

{ WARNING

You or others could be injured ifcaught in the path of the powerliftgate. Make sure there is no onein the way of the liftgate as it isopening and closing.

Choose the power liftgate mode byturning the dial on the switch untilthe indicator lines up with thedesired position.

The three modes are:

MAX: The liftgate opens to the fullopen height.

3/4: The liftgate opens to a reducedheight that can be set by the vehicleoperator in a range of approximatelythree‐quarters open to full open.Use this setting to prevent theliftgate from opening into overheadobstructions such as a garage dooror roof mounted cargo during poweroperation. The liftgate can still bemanually opened all the way.



OFF: The liftgate only operatesmanually in this position.

Manual operation of a liftgate thatalso has power operation requiresmore effort than with a standardmanual liftgate.

In either the MAX or the 3/4 mode,the liftgate can be power openedand closed by:

. Pressing& on the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitteruntil the liftgate starts moving.See Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System Operation onpage 2‑3.

. Pressing& on the center ofthe mode switch on the driverdoor, with the driver doorunlocked.

. Pressing the touch pad switchon the liftgate outside handle,with all doors unlocked, to openthe liftgate.

Press and release& on theliftgate next to the latch to close theliftgate.

Pressing any liftgate button, or thetouch pad switch while the liftgate ismoving, stops it. Pressing the buttonor RKE switch again reverses thedirection. There is a minimumdistance that the power liftgate mustalready be open for the system tohold it open. If movement is stoppedbelow that minimum, the liftgatecloses.

Do not force the liftgate open orclosed during a power cycle.

The power liftgate may betemporarily disabled under extremetemperatures or low batteryconditions. If this occurs, the liftgatecan still be operated manually.

If you shift the transmission out ofP (Park) while the power function isin progress, the liftgate powerfunction will continue to completion.If you shift the transmission out ofP (Park) and accelerate before thepower liftgate latch is closed, theliftgate may reverse to the openposition. Cargo could fall out of thevehicle. Always make sure thepower liftgate is closed and latchedbefore you drive away.

If you power open the liftgate andthe liftgate support struts have lostpressure, the turn signals flash anda chime sounds. The liftgate staysopen temporarily, then slowlycloses. See your dealer for servicebefore using the liftgate.



Obstacle Detection Features

If the liftgate encounters an obstacleduring a power open or close cycle,a warning chime will sound and theliftgate will automatically reversedirection to the full closed or openposition. After removing theobstruction, the power liftgateoperation can be used again.If the liftgate encounters multipleobstacles on the same power cycle,the power function will deactivate.The POWER LIFTGATEUNAVAILABLE warning message inthe Driver Information Center (DIC)will display. After removing theobstructions, the liftgate will resumenormal power operation.

The vehicle has pinch sensorslocated on the side edges of theliftgate. If an object is caughtbetween the liftgate and the bodyand presses against this sensor, theliftgate will reverse direction andopen fully. The liftgate will remainopen until it is activated again orclosed manually.

Setting the Power Liftgate3/4 Mode

To change the liftgate stop position.

1. Turn the liftgate switch to eitherthe MAX, or the 3/4 modeposition and power open theliftgate.

2. Stop the liftgate movement atthe desired height by pressingany liftgate switch. Manuallyadjust the liftgate position ifrequired.

3. Press and hold the button on theliftgate next to the latch until theturn signals flash and a beepsounds to indicate that the newsetting is recorded.

When power opened with the3/4 mode selected, the liftgatestops at the new set position.

If you do not receive the audible andvisual feedback when setting theintermediate stop position, you areattempting to set the height belowthe 3/4 open height minimum(approximately 1.52 m or 5 ft).The liftgate cannot be set below thatminimum and the new setting willnot be recorded.

Manual Operation of PowerLiftgate

To change the liftgate to manualoperation, turn the mode switch tothe OFF position.

With the power liftgate disabledand all of the doors unlocked, theliftgate can be manually openedand closed. The effort required tooperate a power liftgate is greaterthan the effort required to operate anon-power liftgate.



To open the liftgate, press the touchpad on the handle on the outside ofthe liftgate, and lift the gate open. Toclose the liftgate, use the pull cup tolower the liftgate and close. With thepower liftgate disabled, the liftgateelectric latch will still power latchonce contact is made with thestriker. Always close the liftgatebefore driving.

If the RKE button is pressed whilepower operation is disabled, the turnsignals flash and the liftgate willnot move.

The liftgate has an electric latch.If the battery is disconnected orhas low voltage, the liftgate will notopen. The liftgate will resumeoperation when the battery isreconnected and charged.

Vehicle SecurityThis vehicle has theft-deterrentfeatures; however, they do notmake it impossible to steal.

Anti-theft Alarm SystemThis vehicle has an anti-theft alarmsystem.

The LED light, located on theinstrument panel near thewindshield, indicates the status ofthe system.

Arming the System

1. Close all doors, liftgate,and hood.

2. Lock the vehicle using thetransmitter or the power doorlock button. The LED on theinstrument panel should comeon and stay on for about30 seconds.

3. After 30 seconds, the alarmsystem will arm, and the LEDwill begin to slowly flashindicating the alarm is operating.

If a door, the hood, or liftgate isopened without first unlocking withthe transmitter, the turn signals willflash and the horn will sound forabout 30 seconds. The alarmsystem will then re-arm to monitorfor the next unauthorized event.

The theft-deterrent alarm system willnot activate if the doors are lockedwith the key. You can start thevehicle with a recognized transmitterin the vehicle if the alarm has beenset off.

Disarming the System

To disarm the system, either unlockthe doors using the transmitter,or start the vehicle with arecognized transmitter in thevehicle.

To avoid setting off the alarm byaccident:. Lock the vehicle with the

transmitter after all occupantshave left the vehicle and alldoors are closed.



. Always unlock a door with thetransmitter. Unlocking a door anyother way will not disarm thealarm.

If you set off the alarm by accident,turn off the alarm by pressing K onthe transmitter. The alarm will notstop if you try to unlock a door anyother way.

How to Detect a TamperCondition

If K is pressed and the horn chirpsthree times, an attempted break-inhas occurred while the system wasarmed.

If the alarm has been activated, theTHEFT ATTEMPTED message willappear on the DIC. See Key andLock Messages on page 5‑38 foradditional information.

ImmobilizerSee Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑12 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-210/220/310.

Immobilizer OperationThis vehicle has a passivetheft-deterrent system.

The system does not have to bemanually armed or disarmed.

The vehicle is automaticallyimmobilized when the vehicle isturned off.

The immobilization system isdisarmed when the pushbutton startis activated to enter the ACC/ACCESSORY mode or the ON/RUN/START mode and a validtransmitter is present in the vehicle.

The security light, located in theinstrument panel cluster, comes onif there is a problem with arming ordisarming the theft-deterrentsystem.

The system has one or more RKEtransmitters matched to animmobilizer control unit in yourvehicle. Only a correctly matchedRKE transmitter will start thevehicle. If the transmitter is everdamaged, you may not be able tostart your vehicle.

When trying to start the vehicle, thesecurity light comes on briefly whenthe ignition is turned on.



If the engine does not start and thesecurity light stays on, there is aproblem with the system. Turn theignition off and try again.

If the vehicle will not change ignitionmodes (ACC/ACCESSORY,ON/RUN/START, OFF), and theRKE transmitter appears to beundamaged, try another transmitter.Or, you may try placing thetransmitter in the transmitter pocketlocated in the center console. See“NO REMOTE DETECTED” underKey and Lock Messages onpage 5‑38.

If the ignition modes will not changewith the other transmitter, yourvehicle needs service. If the ignitiondoes change modes, the firsttransmitter may be faulty.

See your dealer who can servicethe theft-deterrent system and havea new RKE transmitter programmedto the vehicle.

It is possible for the immobilizersystem to learn new or replacementRKE transmitters. Up to eighttransmitters can be programmed forthe vehicle. To program additionaltransmitters, see “ProgrammingTransmitters to the Vehicle” underRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 2‑3.

Do not leave the key or device thatdisarms or deactivates thetheft-deterrent system in the vehicle.

Exterior Mirrors

Convex Mirrors

{ WARNING

A convex mirror can make things,like other vehicles, look fartheraway than they really are. If youcut too sharply into the right lane,you could hit a vehicle on theright. Check the inside mirror orglance over your shoulder beforechanging lanes.

The passenger side mirror is convexshaped. A convex mirror's surface iscurved so more can be seen fromthe driver seat.



Power Mirrors

Controls for the outside powermirrors are located on thedriver door.

To adjust the mirror:

1. Move the selector switch toL (left) or R (right) to choose thedriver or passenger mirror.

2. Press the arrows on the controlpad to move each mirror in thedesired direction.

3. Adjust each outside mirror sothat a little of the vehicle and thearea behind it can be seen.

4. Return the selector switch to thecenter position.

Folding Mirrors

Manual Foldaway Mirrors

Vehicles with manual fold mirrorsare folded inward toward the vehicleto prevent damage when goingthrough an automatic car wash.Push the mirror outward to return itto the original position.

Power Foldaway Mirrors

Vehicles with power folding mirrorshave controls on the driver door.

To fold the mirrors:

1. With the selector switch inthe ) position, press the downarrow on the control pad. Bothmirrors will automatically fold.

2. Press the down arrow again toreturn the mirrors to their originalposition.



Resetting the Power FoldawayMirrors

Reset the power foldaway mirrors if:. The mirrors are accidentally

obstructed while folding.. They are accidentally manually

folded/unfolded.. The mirrors do not stay in the

unfolded position.. The mirrors vibrate at normal

driving speeds.

Fold and unfold the mirrors one timeusing the mirror controls to resetthem to their normal position.A noise may be heard during theresetting of the power foldawaymirrors. This sound is normal aftera manual folding operation.

Heated Mirrors< (Rear Window Defogger):Press to heat the mirrors.

See “Rear Window Defogger” underDual Automatic Climate ControlSystem on page 8‑1 for moreinformation.

Automatic DimmingMirrorIf the vehicle has the automaticdimming mirror, the driver outsidemirror automatically adjusts for theglare of headlamps behind you.

Park Tilt MirrorsIf the vehicle has the memorypackage, the outside mirrors havea park tilt feature. This featureautomatically tilts the outside mirrorsto a preselected position when thevehicle is in R (Reverse). Thisallows the driver to view the curbfor parallel parking.

The passenger and driver mirrorsreturn to their original positionwhen the vehicle is shifted out ofR (Reverse), or the ignition is turnedoff or to OFF/LOCK.

This feature can be turned on oroff through the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). See VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑42 formore information.



Interior Mirrors

Manual Rearview MirrorHold the inside rearview mirror inthe center and move it for a clearerview behind the vehicle. Adjust themirror to avoid glare from theheadlamps behind you. Push thetab forward for daytime use andpull it for nighttime use.

Vehicles with OnStar have threecontrol buttons at the bottom of themirror. See your dealer for moreinformation on the system and howto subscribe to OnStar. See theOnStar Owner's Guide for moreinformation about the servicesOnStar provides.

Automatic DimmingRearview MirrorThe vehicle may have an automaticdimming inside rearview mirror.Automatic dimming reduces theglare from the headlamps of thevehicle behind you.

Vehicles with OnStar have threecontrol buttons at the bottom of themirror. See your dealer for moreinformation on the system and howto subscribe to OnStar. See theOnStar Owner's Guide for moreinformation about the servicesOnStar provides.

Cleaning the Mirror

Do not spray glass cleaner directlyon the mirror. Use a soft toweldampened with water.

Windows

{ WARNING

Leaving children, helpless adults,or pets in a vehicle with thewindows closed is dangerous.They can be overcome by theextreme heat and sufferpermanent injuries or even deathfrom heat stroke. Never leave achild, a helpless adult, or a petalone in a vehicle, especially withthe windows closed in warm orhot weather.



The vehicle aerodynamics aredesigned to improve fuel economyperformance. This may result in apulsing sound when either rearwindow is down and the frontwindows are up. To reduce thesound, open either a front windowor the sunroof (if equipped).

Power Windows

{ WARNING

Leaving children in a vehicle withthe RKE transmitter is dangerousfor many reasons; children orothers could be badly injured oreven killed. They could operatethe power windows or othercontrols or even make the vehiclemove. The windows will functionwith the RKE transmitter inthe vehicle and they could beseriously injured or killed if caughtin the path of a closing window.Do not leave the RKE transmitterin a vehicle with children.

When there are children in therear seat, use the window lockoutbutton to prevent unintentionaloperation of the windows.

Driver Side Shown

The power window controls are oneach of the side doors.

The driver door also has switchesthat control the passenger and rearwindows.

The power windows:. Can be operated with the

ignition in ACC/ACCESSORY orON/RUN/START.



. Can be operated within10 minutes of switching theignition off. See RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) onpage 9‑22.

. Will stop operation when anydoor is opened.

Operate the switch for the desiredwindow by pressing to open andpulling to close.

Pushing or pulling the switch part ofthe way will open or close thewindow as long as the switch isoperated.

Express‐Down/Up Windows

Windows that have the express‐down/up feature allow the windowsto be lowered and raised fullywithout holding the window switch.Press the window switch fullyand release it to activate theexpress‐down feature. Pull thewindow switch fully up and releaseit to activate the express‐up feature.

The express mode can be canceledat any time by briefly pressing orpulling the switch.

Programming the PowerWindows

Programming the power windowsmay be necessary if the vehicle'sbattery has been disconnected ordischarged.

If the window will not express upafter power has been restored and amessage is displayed in the DriverInformation Center:

1. Close all doors.

2. Place the ignition in ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN/START.

3. From any partial open position,close the window and continueto pull the switch briefly after thewindow has fully closed.

Obstacle Detection Feature

The Obstacle Detection Feature ispart of the express-up feature and isactive:. In the middle and upper portions

of the window opening.. During window up movements.. In ignition OFF during all window

up movements and duringexpress-up window movementsin ignition ON/RUN/START.

If there is something blocking thewindow during automatic closing,the window will reverse direction fora short distance. Weather conditionssuch as extreme cold and/or icemay cause the window toauto-reverse. The window will returnto normal operation once the objector condition is removed.



If conditions prevent the windowfrom closing and the windowcontinues to auto-reverse, it ispossible to close the window withthe ignition in ON/RUN/START byholding the window switch in thepartially or fully pulled up position.Release of the switch from thepartially pulled up position will causethe window to stop. Release of theswitch from the fully pulled upposition will activate the express-upand related obstacle detectionfeatures.

Overload

If the windows are repeatedlyoperated within a short time, thewindow operation is disabled for ashort time.

Window Lockout

o (Window Lockout): The rearwindow lockout switch is on thedriver door. This feature preventsthe rear passenger windows fromoperating, except from the driverposition.

Presso to activate the rearwindow lockout switch. The LEDlight (A) comes on when activated.

Press again to deactivate thelockout switch.

Sun Visors

Pull the sun visor down to blockglare. Detach the sun visor from thecenter mount to pivot to the sidewindow, or to extend along the rod,if available.



Roof

SunroofDirt and debris may collect on thesunroof seal or in the tracks thatcould cause an issue with sunroofoperation or noise. It could also plugthe water drainage system.Periodically open the sunroof andremove any obstacles or loosedebris. Wipe the sunroof seal androof sealing area using a cleancloth, mild soap, and water. Do notremove grease from the sunroof.

On vehicles with a sunroof, theswitches are located on theheadliner above the rearview mirror.The ignition must be in ON/RUN/START, ACC/ACCESSORY, or inRetained Accessory Power (RAP) tooperate the sunroof. See IgnitionPositions on page 9‑18 andRetained Accessory Power (RAP)on page 9‑22.

A. Sunroof Switch

B. Sunshade Switch

Press the back of the sunroofswitch (A) to open the sunroof.When the switch is pressed to thefirst stop, the sunroof will open tothe vent position. Press the switchto the second stop to express openthe sunroof to an automaticallyadjusted comfort position. Press theswitch to the second stop again toopen the glass further, up to the fullopen position. If more venting isneeded when the sunroof is open,

adjust the sunroof to the comfortposition or open one of the windowsslightly.

Press the front of the switch to closethe sunroof. The first stop will closethe sunroof at a desired position atnormal speed, and the second stopwill express close the roof.

Do not keep the sunroof open forlong periods of time while thevehicle is not in use. Excessivedebris may collect in the tracks andplug the water draining system.

Press the back of the sunshadeswitch (B) to open the sunshade.Press the front of the switch to thefirst stop to close the sunshade to adesired position at a normal speed.Press the switch forward to thesecond stop to express close thesunshade.

Fully close the glass before fullyclosing the sunshade.



Express-open/Express-close

Press and release the front or rearof the sunroof switch (A) toexpress-open or express-close thesunroof.

Anti-Pinch Feature

If an object is in the path of thesunroof when it is closing, theanti-pinch feature detects the objectand stops the sunroof from closingat the point of the obstruction. Thesunroof then returns to the full-openposition.


Seats and Restraints 3-1

Seats andRestraints

Head RestraintsHead Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Active Head Restraints . . . . . . . . 3-3

Front SeatsSeat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Power Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . 3-4Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7Thigh Support Adjustment . . . . 3-7Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . 3-8Heated and Ventilated FrontSeats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10

Rear SeatsRear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11Heated Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . 3-13Rear SeatPass-Through Door . . . . . . . . 3-13

Safety BeltsSafety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27

Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . 3-28Safety System Check . . . . . . . . 3-28Safety Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28Replacing Safety Belt SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-29

Airbag SystemAirbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . 3-32When Should an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33

What Makes an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35

How Does an AirbagRestrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35

What Will You See after anAirbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36

Passenger SensingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38

Servicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42

Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . 3-43

Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . 3-44Replacing Airbag SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-44

Child RestraintsOlder Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45Infants and YoungChildren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47

Child Restraint Systems . . . . . 3-50Where to Put the Restraint . . . 3-52Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCHSystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53

Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-61

Securing Child Restraints(Rear Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-62

Securing Child Restraints(Front Passenger Seat) . . . . 3-64


3-2 Seats and Restraints

Head RestraintsFront Seats

The vehicle's front seats haveadjustable head restraints in alloutboard seating positions.

{ WARNING

With head restraints that are notinstalled and adjusted properly,there is a greater chance thatoccupants will suffer a neck/spinal injury in a crash. Do notdrive until the head restraints forall occupants are installed andadjusted properly.

Adjust the head restraint so that thetop of the restraint is at the sameheight as the top of the occupant'shead. This position reduces thechance of a neck injury in a crash.

The height of the head restraint canbe adjusted. To raise or lower thehead restraint, press the buttonlocated on the side of the headrestraint, and pull up or push thehead restraint down, and releasethe button. Pull and push on thehead restraint after the button isreleased to make sure that it islocked in place.

The front seat outboard headrestraints are not designed to beremoved.



Rear Seats

The rear seats have adjustablehead restraints in the outboardseating positions.

The height of the head restraint canbe adjusted. Pull the head restraintup to raise it. Try to move the headrestraint to make sure that it islocked in place.

To lower the head restraint, pressthe button located on the top of theseatback and push the headrestraint down. Try to move the

head restraint after the button isreleased to make sure that it islocked in place.

The center seating position has anintegrated headrest that can beadjusted the same way as theoutboard head restraints.

If you are installing a child restraintin the rear seat, see “Securing aChild Restraint Designed for theLATCH System” under LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) on page 3‑53.

Active Head RestraintsThe vehicle has an active headrestraint system in the front seatingpositions. These automatically tiltforward to reduce the risk of neckinjury if the vehicle is hit frombehind.



Front Seats

Seat Adjustment

{ WARNING

You can lose control of thevehicle if you try to adjust amanual driver seat while thevehicle is moving. The suddenmovement could startle andconfuse you, or make you push apedal when you do not want to.Adjust the driver seat only whenthe vehicle is not moving.

To adjust a manual seat:

1. Pull the handle at the front of theseat cushion.

2. Move the seat forward orrearward to adjust the seatposition.

3. Release the handle to stop theseat from moving.

4. Try to move the seat back andforth to be sure it is locked inplace.

Power Seat Adjustment

To adjust a power seat:. Move the seat forward or

rearward by sliding the controlforward or rearward.

. Raise or lower the front or rearpart of the seat cushion bymoving the front or rear of thecontrol up or down.

. Raise or lower the seat bymoving the control up or down.



To adjust the seatback, seeReclining Seatbacks on page 3‑8.

To adjust the lumbar support, seeLumbar Adjustment on page 3‑7.

Memory Seats

On vehicles with the memoryfeature, the “1” and “2” buttons onthe outboard side of the driver seatare used to manually save andrecall features. These featuresinclude the driver seat and

adjustable throttle and brake pedalpositions, if equipped. It also mayinclude the outside mirror positions,if programmed. These manuallystored positions are referred to asButton Memory positions.

Not all vehicles with the memoryfeature will have programmableoutside mirrors.

The vehicle will also automaticallysave driver seat, adjustable throttleand brake pedal positions, and theoutside mirror positions to thecurrent driver Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter when theignition is turned off. Theseautomatically stored positions arereferred to as RKE Memorypositions. See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System Operation onpage 2‑3 for more information onthe RKE transmitter.

Storing Button Memory Positions

To save positions into ButtonMemory:

1. Adjust the driver seat, seatbackrecliner, adjustable pedals, andboth outside mirrors to thedesired driving positions.

2. Press and release theMEM (Memory) button.

3. Press “1” until a beep sounds.

4. Repeat Steps 1 through 3 for asecond driver using “2.”

Recalling Button MemoryPositions

To recall the manually saved ButtonMemory positions, press and hold“1” or “2.” The driver seat, adjustablepedals, and outside mirrors move tothe positions stored to those buttonswhen pressed. Releasing “1” or “2”before the stored positions arereached stops the recall.



If something has blocked the driverseat and/or the adjustable pedalswhile recalling a memory position,the recall may stop. Remove theobstruction; then press and hold theappropriate manual control for thememory item that is not recallingfor two seconds. Try recalling thememory position again by pressingthe appropriate memory button.If the memory position is still notrecalling, see your dealer forservice.

Recalling RKE Memory Positions(Memory Remote Recall)

The Memory Remote Recall featurecan recall the driver seat, adjustablepedals, and outside mirrors topreviously stored RKE Memorypositions when entering the vehicle.

Every time the ignition is placed inOFF or ACCESSORY, the positionsof the driver seat, outside mirrors,and adjustable pedals areautomatically stored to the RKEtransmitter that was used to startthe vehicle. These positions are

called RKE Memory positions andmay be different than the previouslymentioned Button Memory positionssaved to the “1” or “2” buttons. Toautomatically recall RKE Memorypositions, unlock the driver doorwith the RKE transmitter, and openthe driver door. On vehicles withkeyless access, opening the driverdoor when an RKE transmitter ispresent will activate the RKEMemory recall. If the driver door isalready open, pressing the RKEtransmitter K button will alsoactivate the RKE Memory recall.The driver seat, outside mirrors, andpedals will move to the previouslysaved RKE Memory positions.

This feature is turned on or off usingthe vehicle personalization menu.See “Memory Remote Recall”under Vehicle Personalization onpage 5‑42 for more information.

To stop recall movement, pressone of the memory, power mirror,or power seat controls, or theadjustable pedal switch, if equipped.

If something has blocked the driverseat and/or the adjustable pedals,if equipped, while recalling amemory position, the recall maystop. Remove the obstruction; thenpress and hold the appropriatemanual control for the memory itemthat is not recalling for two seconds.Try recalling the memory positionagain by opening the driver doorand pressing the RKE transmitter Kbutton. If the memory position is stillnot recalling, see your dealer forservice.


This feature moves the seatrearward allowing the drivermore room to exit the vehicle.

To activate, place the ignition inOFF or ACCESSORY and openthe driver door. If the driver door isalready open, placing the ignition inOFF or ACCESSORY will activatethe easy exit driver seat.



This feature is turned on or off usingthe vehicle personalization menu.See “Easy Exit Driver Seat” underVehicle Personalization onpage 5‑42 for more information.

To stop recall movement, press oneof the memory, power seat controls,or the adjustable pedal switch,if equipped.

If something has blocked the driverseat while recalling the exit position,the recall may stop. Remove theobstruction; then press and hold thepower seat control rearward fortwo seconds. Try recalling the exitposition again. If the exit position isstill not recalling, see your dealer forservice.

Lumbar Adjustment

Power Lumbar

Press and hold the front or rear ofthe control to increase or decreaselumbar support. Release the controlwhen the seatback reaches thedesired level of lumbar support.

Thigh SupportAdjustment

If available, adjust the manual legextension by pulling up on the lever,and then pulling or pushing on thesupport to lengthen or shorten it.Release the lever to lock it in place.



Reclining Seatbacks

{ WARNING

Sitting in a reclined position whenthe vehicle is in motion can bedangerous. Even when buckledup, the safety belts cannot dotheir job when reclined like this.

The shoulder belt cannot do itsjob because it will not be againstyour body. Instead, it will be infront of you. In a crash, you couldgo into it, receiving neck or otherinjuries.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

The lap belt cannot do its jobeither. In a crash, the belt couldgo up over your abdomen. Thebelt forces would be there, not atyour pelvic bones. This couldcause serious internal injuries.

For proper protection when thevehicle is in motion, have theseatback upright. Then sit wellback in the seat and wear thesafety belt properly.

Do not have a seatback reclined ifthe vehicle is moving.



Manual Reclining Seatbacks

{ WARNING

You can lose control of thevehicle if you try to adjust amanual driver seat while thevehicle is moving. The suddenmovement could startle andconfuse you, or make you push apedal when you do not want to.Adjust the driver seat only whenthe vehicle is not moving.

{ WARNING

If either seatback is not locked, itcould move forward in a suddenstop or crash. That could causeinjury to the person sitting there.Always push and pull on theseatbacks to be sure they arelocked.

To recline a manual seatback:

1. Lift the lever.2. Move the seatback to the

desired position, and thenrelease the lever to lock theseatback in place.

3. Push and pull on the seatback tomake sure it is locked.

To return the seatback to the uprightposition:

1. Lift the lever fully withoutapplying pressure to theseatback, and the seatback willreturn to the upright position.

2. Push and pull on the seatback tomake sure it is locked.

Power Reclining Seatbacks

To adjust a power seatback,if available:. Tilt the top of the control

rearward to recline.. Tilt the top of the control forward

to raise.



Heated and VentilatedFront Seats

{ WARNING

If you cannot feel temperaturechange or pain to the skin, theseat heater may cause burnseven at low temperatures. Toreduce the risk of burns, peoplewith such a condition should usecare when using the seat heater,especially for long periods oftime. Do not place anything onthe seat that insulates againstheat, such as a blanket, cushion,cover, or similar item. Thismay cause the seat heater tooverheat. An overheated seatheater may cause a burn or maydamage the seat.

Heated and Ventilated Seat Buttons Shown, Heated Seat Buttons Similar

If available, the buttons are on theclimate control panel. To operate,the ignition must be on.

Press L or M to heat the seat.

Press { or C to ventilate the seat.

Press the button once for thehighest setting. With each press ofthe button, the seat will change tothe next lower setting, and then tothe off setting. The lights indicatethree for the highest setting and onefor the lowest.

The passenger seat may takelonger to heat up.

Remote Start Heated andVentilated Seats

During a remote start, the heated orventilated seats can be turned onautomatically. They are canceledwhen the ignition is turned on. Pressthe button to use the heated orventilated seats after the vehicle isstarted.



The heated or ventilated seatindicator lights on the button do notturn on during a remote start.

The temperature performance of anunoccupied seat may be reduced.This is normal.

The heated or ventilated seats willnot turn on during a remote startunless they are enabled in thevehicle personalization menu. SeeRemote Vehicle Start on page 2‑9and “Remote Start Auto HeatedSeats” or “Remote Start Auto SeatCool” under Vehicle Personalizationon page 5‑42 for more information.

Rear SeatsSplit Folding Seatbacks

With this feature, either side of therear seatback can be folded downfor more cargo space.

Folding the Seatbacks

Notice: Folding a rear seat withthe safety belts still fastened maycause damage to the seat or thesafety belts. Always unbuckle thesafety belts and return them totheir normal stowed positionbefore folding a rear seat.

To fold the seatback:

1. Unbuckle the rear safety beltsand move the front seatbacksto the upright position. SeeReclining Seatbacks onpage 3‑8 for more information.

2. Make sure that there is nothingunder, in front of, or on the seat.

A. Seatback Lock Indicator

3. Lift the lever on the top of theseatback. The rear seatbacklock indicator (A) extends whenthe seatback is unlocked.

4. Fold the seatback forward. Therear seatback lock indicator (A)retracts when the seatback islocked.

Keep the seatback in the upright,locked position when not in use.



Raising the Seatbacks

{ WARNING

If either seatback is not locked, itcould move forward in a suddenstop or crash. That could causeinjury to the person sitting there.Always push and pull on theseatbacks to be sure they arelocked.

{ WARNING

A safety belt that is improperlyrouted, not properly attached,or twisted will not provide theprotection needed in a crash. Theperson wearing the belt could beseriously injured. After raising therear seatback, always check tobe sure that the safety belts areproperly routed and attached, andare not twisted.

To raise the seatback:

1. Lift the lever on top of theseatback. Raise the seatbackand release the lever. The rearseatback lock indicator (A)extends when the seatback isunlocked.

2. Push the seatback rearward untilit locks in the upright position.The rear seatback lockindicator (A) retracts when theseatback is locked in place.

3. Make sure the rear safetybelts are not twisted or caughtbetween the seat cushion andthe seatback.

Reclining the Seatbacks

To recline the seatback:

1. Lift and hold the lever on top ofthe seatback. The rear seatbacklock indicator (A) extends whenthe seatback is unlocked.

2. Tilt the seatback rearward, andthen release the lever whenthe seatback is in the desiredposition. The rear seatback lockindicator (A) retracts when theseatback is locked in place.



Heated Rear Seats

{ WARNING

If you cannot feel temperaturechange or pain to the skin, theseat heater may cause burnseven at low temperatures. Seethe Warning under Heated andVentilated Front Seats onpage 3‑10.

If available, the buttons are on therear of the center console.

With the ignition on, press M or Lto heat the left or right outboard seatcushion and seatback.

Press the button once for thehighest setting. With each press ofthe button, the heated seat changesto the next lower setting, and thenthe off setting. Three lights indicatethe highest setting, and one lightindicates the lowest.

Rear SeatPass-Through Door

The vehicle has a rear seatpass-through door in the center ofthe rear seatback. Fold down thecenter armrest and push down onthe latch to open the door.



Safety BeltsThis section of the manualdescribes how to use safety beltsproperly. It also describes somethings not to do with safety belts.

{ WARNING

Do not let anyone ride where asafety belt cannot be wornproperly. In a crash, if you or yourpassenger(s) are not wearingsafety belts, the injuries can bemuch worse. You can hit thingsinside the vehicle harder or beejected from the vehicle. Youand your passenger(s) can beseriously injured or killed. In thesame crash, you might not be,if you are buckled up. Alwaysfasten your safety belt, and checkthat your passenger(s) arerestrained properly too.

{ WARNING

It is extremely dangerous to ridein a cargo area, inside or outsideof a vehicle. In a collision, peopleriding in these areas are morelikely to be seriously injured orkilled. Do not allow people to ridein any area of your vehicle that isnot equipped with seats andsafety belts. Be sure everyone inthe vehicle is in a seat and usinga safety belt properly.

This vehicle has indicators as areminder to buckle the safety belts.See Safety Belt Reminders onpage 5‑15 for additional information.

In most states and in all Canadianprovinces, the law requires wearingsafety belts. Here is why:

You never know if you will bein a crash. If you do have a crash,you do not know if it will be aserious one.

A few crashes are mild, and somecrashes can be so serious that evenbuckled up, a person would notsurvive. But most crashes are inbetween. In many of them, peoplewho buckle up can survive andsometimes walk away. Withoutsafety belts they could have beenbadly hurt or killed.

After more than 40 years of safetybelts in vehicles, the facts are clear.In most crashes buckling up doesmatter ... a lot!



Why Safety Belts Work

When you ride in or on anything,you go as fast as it goes.

Take the simplest vehicle. Supposeit is just a seat on wheels.

Put someone on it. Get it up to speed. Then stop thevehicle. The rider does not stop.



The person keeps going untilstopped by something. In a realvehicle, it could be the windshield...

or the instrument panel... or the safety belts!

With safety belts, you slow downas the vehicle does. You get moretime to stop. You stop over moredistance, and your strongest bonestake the forces. That is why safetybelts make such good sense.



Questions and Answers AboutSafety Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicleafter a crash if I am wearing asafety belt?

A: You could be — whether you arewearing a safety belt or not. Butyour chance of being consciousduring and after an accident, soyou can unbuckle and get out, ismuch greater if you are belted.And you can unbuckle asafety belt, even if you areupside down.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, whyshould I have to wear safetybelts?

A: Airbags are supplementalsystems only; so they work withsafety belts — not instead ofthem. Whether or not an airbagis provided, all occupants stillhave to buckle up to get themost protection. That is true notonly in frontal collisions, butespecially in side and othercollisions.

Q: If I am a good driver, and Inever drive far from home,why should I wear safetybelts?

A: You may be an excellent driver,but if you are in a crash — evenone that is not your fault — youand your passenger(s) can behurt. Being a good driver doesnot protect you from thingsbeyond your control, such asbad drivers.

Most accidents occur within40 km (25mi) of home.And the greatest number ofserious injuries and deathsoccur at speeds of less than65 km/h (40 mph).

Safety belts are for everyone.



How to Wear Safety BeltsProperlyThis section is only for people ofadult size.

Be aware that there are specialthings to know about safety beltsand children. And there are differentrules for smaller children andinfants. If a child will be riding inthe vehicle, see Older Children onpage 3‑45 or Infants and YoungChildren on page 3‑47. Follow thoserules for everyone's protection.

It is very important for all occupantsto buckle up. Statistics show thatunbelted people are hurt more oftenin crashes than those who arewearing safety belts.

Occupants who are not buckled upcan be thrown out of the vehicle in acrash. And they can strike others inthe vehicle who are wearing safetybelts.

First, before you or yourpassenger(s) wear a safety belt,there is important information youshould know.

Sit up straight and always keep yourfeet on the floor in front of you. Thelap part of the belt should be wornlow and snug on the hips, just

touching the thighs. In a crash, thisapplies force to the strong pelvicbones and you would be less likelyto slide under the lap belt. If you slidunder it, the belt would apply forceon your abdomen. This could causeserious or even fatal injuries. Theshoulder belt should go over theshoulder and across the chest.These parts of the body are bestable to take belt restraining forces.

The shoulder belt locks if there is asudden stop or crash.



Q: What is wrong with this?

A: The shoulder belt is too loose.It will not give as muchprotection this way.

{ WARNING

You can be seriously hurt if theshoulder belt is too loose. In acrash, you would move forwardtoo much, which could increaseinjury. The shoulder belt should fitsnugly against your body.


A: The lap belt is too loose. It willnot give nearly as muchprotection this way.



{ WARNING

You can be seriously hurt if thelap belt is too loose. In a crash,you could slide under the lapbelt and apply force on yourabdomen. This could causeserious or even fatal injuries. Thelap belt should be worn low andsnug on the hips, just touchingthe thighs.


A: The belt is buckled in the wrongbuckle.

{ WARNING

You can be seriously injured if thebelt is buckled in the wrong placelike this. In a crash, the belt wouldgo up over your abdomen. Thebelt forces would be there, not onthe pelvic bones. This couldcause serious internal injuries.Always buckle the belt into thebuckle nearest you.




A: The belt is over an armrest.

{ WARNING

You can be seriously injured if thebelt goes over an armrest likethis. The belt would be much toohigh. In a crash, you can slideunder the belt. The belt forcewould then be applied on theabdomen, not on the pelvicbones, and that could causeserious or fatal injuries. Be surethe belt goes under the armrests.


A: The shoulder belt is worn underthe arm. It should be worn overthe shoulder at all times.



{ WARNING

You can be seriously injured ifyou wear the shoulder belt underyour arm. In a crash, your bodywould move too far forward,which would increase the chanceof head and neck injury. Also, thebelt would apply too much forceto the ribs, which are not asstrong as shoulder bones. Youcould also severely injure internalorgans like your liver or spleen.The shoulder belt should go overthe shoulder and across thechest.


A: The belt is behind the body.

{ WARNING

You can be seriously injured bynot wearing the lap-shoulder beltproperly. In a crash, you wouldnot be restrained by the shoulderbelt. Your body could move toofar forward increasing the chanceof head and neck injury. Youmight also slide under the lapbelt. The belt force would then beapplied right on the abdomen.That could cause serious or fatalinjuries. The shoulder belt shouldgo over the shoulder and acrossthe chest.




A: The belt is twisted acrossthe body.

{ WARNING

You can be seriously injured by atwisted belt. In a crash, you wouldnot have the full width of the beltto spread impact forces. If a beltis twisted, make it straight so itcan work properly, or ask yourdealer to fix it.

Lap-Shoulder BeltAll seating positions in the vehiclehave a lap-shoulder belt.

The following instructions explainhow to wear a lap-shoulder beltproperly.

1. Adjust the seat, if the seat isadjustable, so you can sit upstraight. To see how, see “Seats”in the Index.

2. Pick up the latch plate and pullthe belt across you. Do not let itget twisted.

The lap-shoulder belt may lock ifyou pull the belt across you veryquickly. If this happens, let thebelt go back slightly to unlock it.Then pull the belt across youmore slowly.

If the shoulder portion of apassenger belt is pulled out allthe way, the child restraintlocking feature may be engaged.If this happens, let the belt goback all the way and start again.



3. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks.

Pull up on the latch plate tomake sure it is secure. If the beltis not long enough, see SafetyBelt Extender on page 3‑28.

Position the release button onthe buckle so that the safety beltcould be quickly unbuckled ifnecessary.

4. If equipped with a shoulder beltheight adjuster, move it to theheight that is right for you. See“Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster”later in this section forinstructions on use andimportant safety information.

5. To make the lap part tight, pullup on the shoulder belt.

To unlatch the belt, push the buttonon the buckle.

Before a door is closed, be sure thesafety belt is out of the way. If adoor is slammed against a safetybelt, damage can occur to both thesafety belt and the vehicle.



Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster

The vehicle has a shoulder beltheight adjuster for the driver andright front passenger seatingpositions.

Adjust the height so the shoulderportion of the belt is on the shoulderand not falling off of it. The beltshould be close to, but notcontacting, the neck. Impropershoulder belt height adjustmentcould reduce the effectiveness ofthe safety belt in a crash. See Howto Wear Safety Belts Properly onpage 3‑18.

Move the height adjuster up to thedesired position by pushing up onthe height adjuster.

After the height adjuster is set to thedesired position, try to move it up ordown without pressing the releasebutton (A) to make sure it haslocked into position. Press therelease button to lower the heightadjuster.

Safety Belt Pretensioners

This vehicle has safety beltpretensioners for the front and rearoutboard occupants. Although thesafety belt pretensioners cannot beseen, they are part of the safety beltassembly. They can help tighten thesafety belts during the early stagesof a moderate to severe frontal andnear frontal crash and will deploy inside, rear, and rollover events if thethreshold conditions for pretensioneractivation are met.

Pretensioners work only once. If thepretensioners activate in a crash,the pretensioners and probablyother parts of the vehicle's safetybelt system will need to be replaced.See Replacing Safety Belt SystemParts after a Crash on page 3‑29.



Rear Safety Belt ComfortGuides

This vehicle may have rear shoulderbelt comfort guides for the outboardpassenger positions in the rear seat.If not, they are available throughyour dealer. The guides mayprovide added safety belt comfortfor older children who haveoutgrown booster seats and forsome adults. When installed on ashoulder belt, and properly adjusted,the comfort guide positions the beltaway from the neck and head.

Here is how to install a comfortguide to the safety belt:

1. Remove the guide from itsstorage pocket on the side ofthe seat.

2. Place the guide over the belt,and insert the two edges of thebelt into the slots of the guide.

3. Be sure that the belt is nottwisted and it lies flat. Theelastic cord must be under thebelt and the guide on top.



{ WARNING

A safety belt that is not properlyworn may not provide theprotection needed in a crash. Theperson wearing the belt could beseriously injured. The shoulderbelt should go over the shoulderand across the chest. These partsof the body are best able to takebelt restraining forces.

4. Buckle, position, and releasethe safety belt as describedpreviously in this section. Makesure that the shoulder portion ofthe belt is on the shoulder andnot fallling off of it. The beltshould be close to, but notcontacting, the neck.

To remove and store the comfortguide, squeeze the belt edgestogether so that the safety belt canbe removed from the guide. Slidethe guide back into its storagepocket located on the side ofthe seat.

Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancySafety belts work for everyone,including pregnant women. Like alloccupants, they are more likely tobe seriously injured if they do notwear safety belts.

A pregnant woman should wear alap-shoulder belt, and the lapportion should be worn as low aspossible, below the rounding,throughout the pregnancy.



The best way to protect the fetus isto protect the mother. When a safetybelt is worn properly, it is more likelythat the fetus will not be hurt in acrash. For pregnant women, as foranyone, the key to making safetybelts effective is wearing themproperly.

Safety Belt ExtenderIf the vehicle's safety belt will fastenaround you, you should use it.

But if a safety belt is not longenough, your dealer will order youan extender. When you go in toorder it, take the heaviest coat youwill wear, so the extender will belong enough for you. To help avoidpersonal injury, do not let someoneelse use it, and use it only for theseat it is made to fit. The extenderhas been designed for adults. Neveruse it for securing child seats. Towear it, attach it to the regular safetybelt. For more information, see theinstruction sheet that comes withthe extender.

Safety System CheckNow and then, check that the safetybelt reminder light, safety belts,buckles, latch plates, retractors, andanchorages are working properly.Look for any other loose ordamaged safety belt system partsthat might keep a safety belt systemfrom doing its job. See your dealerto have it repaired. Torn or frayedsafety belts may not protect you in acrash. They can rip apart underimpact forces. If a belt is torn orfrayed, get a new one right away.

Make sure the safety belt reminderlight is working. See Safety BeltReminders on page 5‑15 for moreinformation.

Keep safety belts clean and dry.See Safety Belt Care on page 3‑28.

Safety Belt CareKeep belts clean and dry.

{ WARNING

Do not bleach or dye safety belts.It may severely weaken them. Ina crash, they might not be able toprovide adequate protection.Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.



Replacing Safety BeltSystem Parts after aCrash

{ WARNING

A crash can damage the safetybelt system in the vehicle.A damaged safety belt systemmay not properly protect theperson using it, resulting inserious injury or even death in acrash. To help make sure thesafety belt systems are workingproperly after a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon aspossible.

After a minor crash, replacement ofsafety belts may not be necessary.But the safety belt assemblies thatwere used during any crash mayhave been stressed or damaged.See your dealer to have the safetybelt assemblies inspected orreplaced.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the safety beltsystem was not being used at thetime of the crash.

Have the safety belt pretensionerschecked if the vehicle has been in acrash, or if the airbag readiness lightstays on after you start the vehicleor while you are driving. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 5‑16.

Airbag SystemThe vehicle has the followingairbags:. A frontal airbag for the driver.. A frontal airbag for the right front

passenger.. A seat-mounted side impact

airbag for the driver.. A seat-mounted side impact

airbag for the right frontpassenger.

. A roof-rail airbag for the driverand the passenger seateddirectly behind the driver.

. A roof-rail airbag for the rightfront passenger and thepassenger seated directlybehind the right front passenger.

All of the airbags in the vehicle willhave the word AIRBAG embossedin the trim or on an attached labelnear the deployment opening.



For frontal airbags, the wordAIRBAG will appear on the middlepart of the steering wheel for thedriver and on the instrument panelfor the right front passenger.

With seat-mounted side impactairbags, the word AIRBAG willappear on the side of the seatbackclosest to the door.

With roof-rail airbags, the wordAIRBAG will appear along the trim.

Even if you do not have a right frontpassenger seat in the vehicle thereis still an active frontal airbag in theright side of the instrument panel.Do not place cargo in front of thisairbag.

{ WARNING

Be sure that cargo is not near anairbag. In a crash, an inflatingairbag might force that objecttoward a person. This couldcause severe injury or evendeath. Secure objects away fromthe area in which an airbag wouldinflate. For more information, seeWhere Are the Airbags? onpage 3‑32 and Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑12.

Airbags are designed to supplementthe protection provided by safetybelts. Even though today's airbagsare also designed to help reducethe risk of injury from the force of aninflating bag, all airbags must inflatevery quickly to do their job.

Here are the most important thingsto know about the airbag system:

{ WARNING

You can be severely injured orkilled in a crash if you are notwearing a safety belt— even ifthe vehicle has airbags. Airbagsare designed to work with safetybelts, but do not replace them.Also, airbags are not designed todeploy in every crash. In somecrashes safety belts are the onlyrestraint. See When Should anAirbag Inflate? on page 3‑33.

Wearing a safety belt during acrash helps reduce your chanceof hitting things inside the vehicleor being ejected from it. Airbagsare “supplemental restraints” tothe safety belts. Everyone in thevehicle should wear a safety beltproperly—whether or not there isan airbag for that person.



{ WARNING

Airbags inflate with great force,faster than the blink of an eye.Anyone who is up against, or veryclose to, any airbag when itinflates can be seriously injuredor killed. Do not sit unnecessarilyclose to any airbag, as you wouldbe if you were sitting on the edgeof the seat or leaning forward.Safety belts help keep you inposition before and during acrash. Always wear a safety belt,even with airbags. The drivershould sit as far back as possiblewhile still maintaining control ofthe vehicle.

Occupants should not lean on orsleep against the door or sidewindows in seating positions withseat-mounted side impact airbagsand/or roof-rail airbags.

{ WARNING

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbagwhen it inflates can be seriouslyinjured or killed. Airbags pluslap-shoulder belts offer protectionfor adults and older children, butnot for young children and infants.Neither the vehicle's safety beltsystem nor its airbag system isdesigned for them. Youngchildren and infants need theprotection that a child restraintsystem can provide. Alwayssecure children properly in thevehicle. To read how, see OlderChildren on page 3‑45 or Infantsand Young Children onpage 3‑47.

There is an airbag readiness lighton the instrument panel cluster,which shows the airbag symbol.

The system checks the airbagelectrical system for malfunctions.The light tells you if there is anelectrical problem. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 5‑16 formore information.



Where Are the Airbags?

The driver frontal airbag is in themiddle of the steering wheel.

The right front passenger frontalairbag is in the instrument panel onthe passenger side.

Driver Side Shown, PassengerSide Similar

The seat-mounted side impactairbags for the driver and right frontpassenger are in the side of theseatbacks closest to the door.



Driver Side Shown, PassengerSide Similar

The roof-rail airbags for the driver,right front passenger, and secondrow outboard passengers are in theceiling above the side windows.

{ WARNING

If something is between anoccupant and an airbag, theairbag might not inflate properlyor it might force the object into

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

that person causing severe injuryor even death. The path of aninflating airbag must be keptclear. Do not put anythingbetween an occupant and anairbag, and do not attach or putanything on the steering wheelhub or on or near any otherairbag covering.

Do not use seat accessories thatblock the inflation path of aseat-mounted side impact airbag.

Never secure anything to the roofof a vehicle with roof-rail airbagsby routing a rope or tie‐downthrough any door or windowopening. If you do, the path of aninflating roof-rail airbag will beblocked.

When Should an AirbagInflate?Frontal airbags are designed toinflate in moderate to severe frontalor near-frontal crashes to helpreduce the potential for severeinjuries mainly to the driver's or rightfront passenger's head and chest.However, they are only designed toinflate if the impact exceeds apredetermined deploymentthreshold. Deployment thresholdsare used to predict how severe acrash is likely to be in time for theairbags to inflate and help restrainthe occupants.

Whether the frontal airbags will orshould deploy is not based on howfast your vehicle is traveling.It depends largely on what you hit,the direction of the impact, and howquickly your vehicle slows down.

Frontal airbags may inflate atdifferent crash speeds.For example:



. If the vehicle hits a stationaryobject, the airbags could inflateat a different crash speed than ifthe vehicle hits a moving object.

. If the vehicle hits an object thatdeforms, the airbags couldinflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle hits an objectthat does not deform.

. If the vehicle hits a narrow object(like a pole), the airbags couldinflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle hits a wideobject (like a wall).

. If the vehicle goes into an objectat an angle, the airbags couldinflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle goes straightinto the object.

Thresholds can also vary withspecific vehicle design.

Frontal airbags are not intended toinflate during vehicle rollovers, rearimpacts, or in many side impacts.

In addition, the vehicle hasdual-stage frontal airbags.Dual-stage airbags adjust therestraint according to crash severity.The vehicle has electronic frontalsensors, which help the sensingsystem distinguish between amoderate frontal impact and a moresevere frontal impact. For moderatefrontal impacts, dual-stage airbagsinflate at a level less than fulldeployment. For more severe frontalimpacts, full deployment occurs.

The vehicle has seat-mounted sideimpact and roof-rail airbags. SeeAirbag System on page 3‑29.Seat-mounted side impact androof-rail airbags are intended toinflate in moderate to severe side

crashes. In addition, these roof-railairbags are intended to inflateduring a rollover. Seat-mounted sideimpact and roof-rail airbags willinflate if the crash severity is abovethe system's designed thresholdlevel. The threshold level can varywith specific vehicle design.

Seat-mounted side impact airbagsare not intended to inflate in frontalimpacts, near-frontal impacts,rollovers, or rear impacts. Roof-railairbags are not intended to inflate inrear impacts. A seat-mounted sideimpact airbag is intended to deployon the side of the vehicle that isstruck. Both roof-rail airbags willdeploy when either side of thevehicle is struck, or if the sensingsystem predicts that the vehicle isabout to roll over, or in a severefrontal impact.



In any particular crash, no onecan say whether an airbag shouldhave inflated simply because of thedamage to a vehicle or becauseof what the repair costs were.For frontal airbags, inflation isdetermined by what the vehicle hits,the angle of the impact, and howquickly the vehicle slows down.For seat-mounted side impact androof-rail airbags, deployment isdetermined by the location andseverity of the side impact. In arollover event, roof-rail airbagdeployment is determined by thedirection of the roll.

What Makes an AirbagInflate?In a deployment event, the sensingsystem sends an electrical signaltriggering a release of gas from theinflator. Gas from the inflator fills theairbag causing the bag to break outof the cover and deploy. The inflator,the airbag, and related hardware areall part of the airbag module.

Frontal airbag modules are locatedinside the steering wheel andinstrument panel. For vehicles withseat-mounted side impact airbags,there are airbag modules in the sideof the front seatbacks closest to thedoor. For vehicles with roof-railairbags, there are airbag modules inthe ceiling of the vehicle, near theside windows that have occupantseating positions.

How Does an AirbagRestrain?In moderate to severe frontal ornear frontal collisions, even beltedoccupants can contact the steeringwheel or the instrument panel. Inmoderate to severe side collisions,even belted occupants can contactthe inside of the vehicle.

Airbags supplement the protectionprovided by safety belts. Frontalairbags distribute the force of theimpact more evenly over theoccupant's upper body, stoppingthe occupant more gradually.Seat‐mounted side impact androof-rail airbags distribute the forceof the impact more evenly over theoccupant's upper body.



Rollover capable roof-rail airbagsare designed to help contain thehead and chest of occupants in theoutboard seating positions in thefirst and second rows. The rollovercapable roof-rail airbags aredesigned to help reduce the risk offull or partial ejection in rolloverevents, although no system canprevent all such ejections.

But airbags would not help in manytypes of collisions, primarilybecause the occupant's motion isnot toward those airbags. See WhenShould an Airbag Inflate? onpage 3‑33 for more information.

Airbags should never be regardedas anything more than a supplementto safety belts.

What Will You See afteran Airbag Inflates?After the frontal airbags andseat-mounted side impact airbagsinflate, they quickly deflate, soquickly that some people may noteven realize an airbag inflated.Roof-rail airbags may still be at leastpartially inflated for some time afterthey deploy. Some components ofthe airbag module may be hot forseveral minutes. For location of theairbag modules, see What Makesan Airbag Inflate? on page 3‑35.

The parts of the airbag that comeinto contact with you may be warm,but not too hot to touch. There maybe some smoke and dust comingfrom the vents in the deflatedairbags. Airbag inflation does notprevent the driver from seeing out ofthe windshield or being able to steerthe vehicle, nor does it preventpeople from leaving the vehicle.

{ WARNING

When an airbag inflates, theremay be dust in the air. This dustcould cause breathing problemsfor people with a history ofasthma or other breathing trouble.To avoid this, everyone in thevehicle should get out as soon asit is safe to do so. If you havebreathing problems but cannotget out of the vehicle after anairbag inflates, then get fresh airby opening a window or a door.If you experience breathingproblems following an airbagdeployment, you should seekmedical attention.

The vehicle has a feature that mayautomatically unlock the doors, turnon the interior lamps and hazardwarning flashers, and shut off thefuel system after the airbags inflate.



You can lock the doors, turn off theinterior lamps and hazard warningflashers by using the controls forthose features.

{ WARNING

A crash severe enough to inflatethe airbags may have alsodamaged important functions inthe vehicle, such as the fuelsystem, brake and steeringsystems, etc. Even if the vehicleappears to be drivable after amoderate crash, there may beconcealed damage that couldmake it difficult to safely operatethe vehicle.

Use caution if you should attemptto restart the engine after a crashhas occurred.

In many crashes severe enough toinflate the airbag, windshields arebroken by vehicle deformation.Additional windshield breakagemay also occur from the right frontpassenger airbag.. Airbags are designed to inflate

only once. After an airbaginflates, you will need some newparts for the airbag system.If you do not get them, theairbag system will not be thereto help protect you in anothercrash. A new system will includeairbag modules and possiblyother parts. The service manualfor your vehicle covers the needto replace other parts.

. The vehicle has a crash sensingand diagnostic module whichrecords information after acrash. See Vehicle DataRecording and Privacy onpage 13‑11 and Event DataRecorders on page 13‑11.

. Let only qualified technicianswork on the airbag systems.Improper service can mean thatan airbag system will not workproperly. See your dealer forservice.



Passenger SensingSystemThe vehicle has a passengersensing system for the right frontpassenger position. The passengerairbag status indicator will be visibleon the overhead console when thevehicle is started.

United States

Canada

The words ON and OFF, or thesymbol for on and off, are visibleduring the system check. If you areusing remote start, if equipped, tostart the vehicle from a distance,you may not see the system check.When the system check iscomplete, either the word ON orOFF, or the symbol for on or off, willbe visible. See Passenger AirbagStatus Indicator on page 5‑17.

The passenger sensing systemturns off the right front passengerfrontal airbag and seat-mountedside impact airbag under certainconditions. The driver airbags andthe roof-rail airbags are not affectedby the passenger sensing system.

The passenger sensing systemworks with sensors that are part ofthe right front passenger seat.

The sensors are designed to detectthe presence of a properly seatedoccupant and determine if the rightfront passenger frontal airbag andseat‐mounted side impact airbagshould be enabled (may inflate)or not.

According to accident statistics,children are safer when properlysecured in a rear seat in the correctchild restraint for their weightand size.

We recommend that children besecured in a rear seat, including:an infant or a child riding in arear-facing child restraint; a childriding in a forward-facing child seat;an older child riding in a boosterseat; and children, who are largeenough, using safety belts.



A label on the sun visor says,“Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front.” This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag deploys.

{ WARNING

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the rightfront passenger airbag inflates.This is because the back of therear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflatingairbag. A child in a forward-facingchild restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates and thepassenger seat is in a forwardposition.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbagand seat-mounted side impactairbag (if equipped), no system isfail-safe. No one can guaranteethat an airbag will not deployunder some unusualcircumstance, even thoughthe airbag(s) are off.

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if theairbag(s) are off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe right front seat, always movethe front passenger seat as farback as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the right frontpassenger airbag and seat‐mountedside impact airbag if:. The right front passenger seat is

unoccupied.. The system determines that an

infant is present in a rear-facinginfant seat.

. The system determines that asmall child is present in a childrestraint.

. The system determines that asmall child is present in abooster seat.

. A right front passenger takeshis/her weight off of the seat fora period of time.

. The right front passenger seat isoccupied by a smaller person,such as a child who hasoutgrown child restraints.

. Or, if there is a critical problemwith the airbag system or thepassenger sensing system.



When the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag andseat‐mounted side impact airbag,the off indicator will light and stay litto remind you that the airbags areoff. See Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 5‑17.

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn on (may inflate) theright front passenger frontal airbagand seat‐mounted side impactairbag anytime the system sensesthat a person of adult size is sittingproperly in the right frontpassenger seat.

When the passenger sensingsystem has allowed the airbags tobe enabled, the on indicator will lightand stay lit to remind you that theairbags are active.

For some children who haveoutgrown child restraints and forvery small adults, the passenger

sensing system may or may not turnoff the right front passenger frontalairbag and seat-mounted sideimpact airbag, depending uponthe person’s seating postureand body build. Everyone in thevehicle who has outgrown childrestraints should wear a safety beltproperly — whether or not there isan airbag for that person.

{ WARNING

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrongwith the airbag system. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others,have the vehicle serviced rightaway. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 5‑16 for moreinformation, including importantsafety information.

If the On Indicator is Lit for aChild Restraint

If a child restraint has been installedand the on indicator is lit:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove the child restraint fromthe vehicle.

3. Remove any additional itemsfrom the seat such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers.

4. Reinstall the child restraintfollowing the directionsprovided by the child restraintmanufacturer and refer to“Securing a Child Restraint inthe Right Front Seat Position ”under Securing Child Restraints(Rear Seat) on page 3‑62 orSecuring Child Restraints (FrontPassenger Seat) on page 3‑64.



5. If, after reinstalling the childrestraint and restarting thevehicle, the on indicator is still lit,turn the vehicle off. Then slightlyrecline the vehicle seatbackand adjust the seat cushion,if adjustable, to make sure thatthe vehicle seatback is notpushing the child restraint intothe seat cushion.

Also make sure the childrestraint is not trapped under thevehicle head restraint. If thishappens, adjust the headrestraint. See Head Restraintson page 3‑2.

6. Restart the vehicle.

If the on indicator is still lit,secure the child restraint in arear seat position in the vehicle,and check with your dealer.

If the Off Indicator is Lit for anAdult-Size Occupant

If a person of adult-size is sitting inthe right front passenger seat, butthe off indicator is lit, it could bebecause that person is not sittingproperly in the seat. If this happens,

use the following steps to allow thesystem to detect that person andenable the right front passengerfrontal airbag and seat-mountedside impact airbag:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove any additional materialfrom the seat, such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers.

3. Place the seatback in the fullyupright position.

4. Have the person sit upright inthe seat, centered on the seatcushion, with legs comfortablyextended.

5. Restart the vehicle and have theperson remain in this position fortwo to three minutes after the onindicator is lit.



Additional Factors AffectingSystem Operation

Safety belts help keep thepassenger in position on the seatduring vehicle maneuvers andbraking, which helps the passengersensing system maintain thepassenger airbag status. See“Safety Belts” and “ChildRestraints” in the Index foradditional information about theimportance of proper restraint use.

A thick layer of additional material,such as a blanket or cushion,or aftermarket equipment suchas seat covers, seat heaters, andseat massagers can affect howwell the passenger sensing systemoperates. We recommend thatyou not use seat covers or other

aftermarket equipment except whenapproved by Saab for your specificvehicle. See Adding Equipment tothe Airbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 3‑43 for more informationabout modifications that can affecthow the system operates.

{ WARNING

Stowing of articles under thepassenger seat or between thepassenger seat cushion andseatback may interfere with theproper operation of the passengersensing system.

Servicing theAirbag-Equipped VehicleAirbags affect how the vehicleshould be serviced. There are partsof the airbag system in severalplaces around the vehicle. Yourdealer and the service manual haveinformation about servicing thevehicle and the airbag system.

{ WARNING

For up to 10 seconds after theignition is turned off and thebattery is disconnected, an airbagcan still inflate during improperservice. You can be injured if youare close to an airbag when itinflates. Avoid yellow connectors.They are probably part of theairbag system. Be sure to followproper service procedures, andmake sure the person performingwork for you is qualified to do so.



Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped VehicleQ: Is there anything I might add

to or change about the vehiclethat could keep the airbagsfrom working properly?

A: Yes. If you add things thatchange the vehicle's frame,bumper system, height, front endor side sheet metal, they maykeep the airbag system fromworking properly. Changing ormoving any parts of the frontseats, safety belts, the airbagsensing and diagnostic module,steering wheel, instrumentpanel, roof-rail airbag modules,ceiling headliner or pillar garnishtrim, overhead console, frontsensors, side impact sensors,rollover sensor module, airbagwiring, or cargo restraint systemand convenience net can affectthe operation of the airbagsystem.

In addition, the vehicle has apassenger sensing system forthe right front passengerposition, which includes sensorsthat are part of the passengerseat. The passenger sensingsystem may not operate properlyif the original seat trim isreplaced with non-Saab covers,upholstery or trim, or with Saabcovers, upholstery or trimdesigned for a different vehicle.Any object, such as anaftermarket seat heater or acomfort enhancing pad ordevice, installed under or on topof the seat fabric, could alsointerfere with the operation ofthe passenger sensing system.This could either prevent properdeployment of the passengerairbag(s) or prevent thepassenger sensing systemfrom properly turning off thepassenger airbag(s). SeePassenger Sensing System onpage 3‑38.

If you have questions, callCustomer Assistance. Thephone numbers and addressesfor Customer Assistance are inStep Two of the CustomerSatisfaction Procedure in thismanual. See CustomerSatisfaction Procedure onpage 13‑1.

If the vehicle has rolloverroof-rail airbags, see DifferentSize Tires and Wheels onpage 10‑71 for additionalimportant information.



Q: Because I have a disability,I have to get my vehiclemodified. How can I find outwhether this will affect myairbag system?

A: If you have questions, callCustomer Assistance. Thephone numbers and addressesfor Customer Assistance are inStep Two of the CustomerSatisfaction Procedure in thismanual. See CustomerSatisfaction Procedure onpage 13‑1.

In addition, your dealer and theservice manual have informationabout the location of the airbagsensors, sensing and diagnosticmodule and airbag wiring.

Airbag System CheckThe airbag system does not needregularly scheduled maintenance orreplacement. Make sure the airbagreadiness light is working. SeeAirbag Readiness Light onpage 5‑16 for more information.

Notice: If an airbag covering isdamaged, opened, or broken, theairbag may not work properly.Do not open or break the airbagcoverings. If there are anyopened or broken airbag covers,have the airbag covering and/orairbag module replaced. For thelocation of the airbag modules,see What Makes an AirbagInflate? on page 3‑35. See yourdealer for service.

Replacing Airbag SystemParts after a Crash

{ WARNING

A crash can damage theairbag systems in the vehicle.A damaged airbag systemmay not work properly andmay not protect you and yourpassenger(s) in a crash, resultingin serious injury or even death.To help make sure the airbagsystems are working properlyafter a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon aspossible.



If an airbag inflates, you will needto replace airbag system parts.See your dealer for service.

If the airbag readiness light stays onafter the vehicle is started or comeson when you are driving, the airbagsystem may not work properly. Havethe vehicle serviced right away.See Airbag Readiness Light onpage 5‑16 for more information.

Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrownbooster seats should wear thevehicle safety belts.

The manufacturer's instructions thatcome with the booster seat state theweight and height limitations for thatbooster. Use a booster seat with alap-shoulder belt until the childpasses the fit test below:. Sit all the way back on the seat.

Do the knees bend at the seatedge? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

. Buckle the lap-shoulder belt.Does the shoulder belt rest onthe shoulder? If yes, continue.If no, try using the rear safetybelt comfort guide. See “RearSafety Belt Comfort Guides”under Lap-Shoulder Belt onpage 3‑23 for more information.If the shoulder belt still does notrest on the shoulder, then returnto the booster seat.



. Does the lap belt fit low andsnug on the hips, touching thethighs? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

. Can proper safety belt fit bemaintained for the length of thetrip? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

Q: What is the proper way towear safety belts?

A: An older child should wear alap-shoulder belt and get theadditional restraint a shoulderbelt can provide. The shoulderbelt should not cross the face orneck. The lap belt should fitsnugly below the hips, justtouching the top of the thighs.This applies belt force to thechild's pelvic bones in a crash.It should never be worn over theabdomen, which could causesevere or even fatal internalinjuries in a crash.

Also see “Rear Safety Belt ComfortGuides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt onpage 3‑23.

According to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition.

In a crash, children who are notbuckled up can strike other peoplewho are buckled up, or can bethrown out of the vehicle. Olderchildren need to use safety beltsproperly.

{ WARNING

Never do this.

Never allow two children to wearthe same safety belt. The safetybelt cannot properly spread theimpact forces. In a crash, the two

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

children can be crushed togetherand seriously injured. A safetybelt must be used by only oneperson at a time.



{ WARNING

Never do this.

Never allow a child to wear thesafety belt with the shoulder beltbehind their back. A child can beseriously injured by not wearingthe lap-shoulder belt properly. In acrash, the child would not berestrained by the shoulder belt.The child could move too farforward increasing the chance ofhead and neck injury. The childmight also slide under the lapbelt. The belt force would then beapplied right on the abdomen.That could cause serious or fatalinjuries. The shoulder belt shouldgo over the shoulder and acrossthe chest.

Infants and YoungChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needsprotection! This includes infantsand all other children. Neither thedistance traveled nor the age andsize of the traveler changes theneed, for everyone, to use safetyrestraints. In fact, the law in everystate in the United States and inevery Canadian province sayschildren up to some age must berestrained while in a vehicle.

{ WARNING

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck andthe safety belt continues totighten. Never leave childrenunattended in a vehicle and neverallow children to play with thesafety belts.

Airbags plus lap‐shoulder belts offerprotection for adults and olderchildren, but not for young childrenand infants. Neither the vehicle'ssafety belt system nor its airbagsystem is designed for them. Everytime infants and young children ridein vehicles, they should have theprotection provided by appropriatechild restraints.

Children who are not restrainedproperly can strike other people,or can be thrown out of the vehicle.



{ WARNING

Never do this.

Never hold an infant or a childwhile riding in a vehicle. Due tocrash forces, an infant or a childwill become so heavy it is notpossible to hold it during a crash.For example, in a crash at only40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb)infant will suddenly become a110 kg (240 lb) force on a person'sarms. An infant should besecured in an appropriaterestraint.

{ WARNING

Never do this.

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbag whenit inflates can be seriously injuredor killed. Never put a rear-facingchild restraint in the right frontseat. Secure a rear-facing childrestraint in a rear seat. It is also

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

better to secure a forward-facingchild restraint in a rear seat. If youmust secure a forward-facingchild restraint in the right frontseat, always move the frontpassenger seat as far back as itwill go.



Q: What are the different types ofadd-on child restraints?

A: Add-on child restraints, whichare purchased by the vehicleowner, are available in four basictypes. Selection of a particularrestraint should take intoconsideration not only the child'sweight, height, and age but alsowhether or not the restraint willbe compatible with the motorvehicle in which it will be used.

For most basic types of childrestraints, there are manydifferent models available. Whenpurchasing a child restraint, besure it is designed to be used ina motor vehicle. If it is, therestraint will have a label sayingthat it meets federal motorvehicle safety standards.

The restraint manufacturer'sinstructions that come with therestraint state the weight and

height limitations for a particularchild restraint. In addition, thereare many kinds of restraintsavailable for children withspecial needs.

{ WARNING

To reduce the risk of neck andhead injury during a crash, infantsneed complete support. This isbecause an infant's neck is notfully developed and its headweighs so much compared withthe rest of its body. In a crash,an infant in a rear-facing childrestraint settles into the restraint,so the crash forces can bedistributed across the strongestpart of an infant's body, the backand shoulders. Infants shouldalways be secured in rear-facingchild restraints.

{ WARNING

A young child's hip bones are stillso small that the vehicle's regularsafety belt may not remain low onthe hip bones, as it should.Instead, it may settle up aroundthe child's abdomen. In a crash,the belt would apply force on abody area that is unprotected byany bony structure. This alonecould cause serious or fatalinjuries. To reduce the risk ofserious or fatal injuries during acrash, young children shouldalways be secured in appropriatechild restraints.



Child Restraint Systems

(A) Rear‐Facing Infant Seat

A rear-facing infant seat (A)provides restraint with the seatingsurface against the back of theinfant.

The harness system holds the infantin place and, in a crash, acts tokeep the infant positioned in therestraint.

(B) Forward-Facing Child Seat

A forward-facing child seat (B)provides restraint for the child'sbody with the harness.

(C) Booster Seats

A booster seat (C) is a child restraintdesigned to improve the fit of thevehicle's safety belt system.A booster seat can also help achild to see out the window.



Securing an Add-On ChildRestraint in the Vehicle

{ WARNING

A child can be seriously injuredor killed in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly secured inthe vehicle. Secure the childrestraint properly in the vehicleusing the vehicle safety belt orLATCH system, following theinstructions that came with thatchild restraint and the instructionsin this manual.

To help reduce the chance of injury,the child restraint must be securedin the vehicle. Child restraintsystems must be secured in vehicleseats by lap belts or the lap beltportion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by

the LATCH system. See LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) on page 3‑53 formore information. Children can beendangered in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly secured inthe vehicle.

When securing an add-on childrestraint, refer to the instructionsthat come with the restraint whichmay be on the restraint itself or in abooklet, or both, and to this manual.The child restraint instructions areimportant, so if they are notavailable, obtain a replacementcopy from the manufacturer.

Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint inthe vehicle — even when no childis in it.

In some areas of the United Statesand Canada, Certified ChildPassenger Safety Technicians(CPSTs) are available to inspectand demonstrate how to correctlyuse and install child restraints.In the U.S., refer to the NationalHighway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) websiteto locate the nearest child safetyseat inspection station. For CPSTavailability in Canada, check withTransport Canada or the ProvincialMinistry of Transportation office.

Securing the Child Within theChild Restraint

{ WARNING

A child can be seriously injuredor killed in a crash if the childis not properly secured in thechild restraint. Secure the childproperly following the instructionsthat came with that child restraint.



Where to Put theRestraintAccording to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition.

We recommend that children andchild restraints be secured in a rearseat, including: an infant or a childriding in a rear-facing child restraint;a child riding in a forward-facingchild seat; an older child riding in abooster seat; and children, who arelarge enough, using safety belts.

A label on your sun visor says,“Never put a rear-facing child seatin the front.” This is because the riskto the rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag deploys.

{ WARNING

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates. Thisis because the back of therear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflatingairbag. A child in a forward-facingchild restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates and thepassenger seat is in a forwardposition.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag willnot deploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it isturned off.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Secure rear-facing childrestraints in a rear seat, even ifthe airbag is off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe right front seat, always movethe front passenger seat as farback as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.

See Passenger Sensing Systemon page 3‑38 for additionalinformation.

When securing a child restraintin a rear seating position, study theinstructions that came with yourchild restraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.



If the vehicle does not have arear seat that will accommodatea rear-facing child restraint, werecommend that rear-facing childrestraints not be transported in thevehicle, even if the airbag is off.

Child restraints and booster seatsvary considerably in size, and somemay fit in certain seating positionsbetter than others. Always makesure the child restraint is properlysecured.

Depending on where you place thechild restraint and the size of thechild restraint, you may not beable to access adjacent safety beltassemblies or LATCH anchors foradditional passengers or childrestraints. Adjacent seating

positions should not be used if thechild restraint prevents access to orinterferes with the routing of thesafety belt.

Wherever you install a childrestraint, be sure to secure the childrestraint properly.

Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint inyour vehicle — even when no childis in it.

Lower Anchors andTethers for Children(LATCH System)The LATCH system holds a childrestraint during driving or in a crash.This system is designed to makeinstallation of a child restraint easier.The LATCH system uses anchors inthe vehicle and attachments on thechild restraint that are made for usewith the LATCH system.

Make sure that a LATCH-compatiblechild restraint is properly installedusing the anchors, or use thevehicle's safety belts to secure therestraint, following the instructionsthat came with that restraint, andalso the instructions in this manual.



When installing a child restraintwith a top tether, you must also useeither the lower anchors or thesafety belts to properly secure thechild restraint. A child restraint mustnever be installed using only the toptether and anchor.

In order to use the LATCH systemin your vehicle, you need achild restraint that has LATCHattachments. The child restraintmanufacturer will provide you withinstructions on how to use the childrestraint and its attachments. Thefollowing explains how to attach achild restraint with theseattachments in your vehicle.

Not all vehicle seating positions orchild restraints have lower anchorsand attachments or top tetheranchors and attachments.

Lower Anchors

Lower anchors (A) are metalbars built into the vehicle. Thereare two lower anchors for eachLATCH seating position that willaccommodate a child restraint withlower attachments (B).

Top Tether Anchor

A top tether (A, C) anchors the topof the child restraint to the vehicle.A top tether anchor is built intothe vehicle. The top tetherattachment (B) on the child restraintconnects to the top tether anchor inthe vehicle in order to reduce theforward movement and rotation ofthe child restraint during driving or ina crash.



Your child restraint may havea single tether (A) or a dualtether (C). Either will have a singleattachment (B) to secure the toptether to the anchor.

Some child restraints that have atop tether are designed for use withor without the top tether beingattached. Others require the toptether always to be attached.In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached. Be sure to read and followthe instructions for your childrestraint.

Lower Anchor and Top TetherAnchor Locations

Rear Seat

i (Top Tether Anchor): Seatingpositions with top tether anchors.

j (Lower Anchor): Seatingpositions with two lower anchors.

To assist you in locating the loweranchors, each seating position withlower anchors has two labels, nearthe crease between the seatbackand the seat cushion.

To assist you in locating the toptether anchors, the top tether anchorsymbol is located on the cover.



Top Tether Anchors

The top tether anchors for each rearseating position are located underthe covers, on the back of the rearseatback. Be sure to use an anchorlocated on the same side of thevehicle as the seating positionwhere the child restraint will beplaced.

Do not secure a child restraint in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be attached, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top tethermust be attached.

According to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition. See Where to Put theRestraint on page 3‑52 foradditional information.

Securing a Child RestraintDesigned for the LATCHSystem

{ WARNING

If a LATCH-type child restraint isnot attached to anchors, the childrestraint will not be able to protectthe child correctly. In a crash, thechild could be seriously injured orkilled. Install a LATCH-type childrestraint properly using theanchors, or use the vehicle safetybelts to secure the restraint,following the instructions thatcame with the child restraint andthe instructions in this manual.



{ WARNING

Do not attach more than one childrestraint to a single anchor.Attaching more than one childrestraint to a single anchor couldcause the anchor or attachmentto come loose or even breakduring a crash. A child or otherscould be injured. To reduce therisk of serious or fatal injuriesduring a crash, attach only onechild restraint per anchor.

{ WARNING

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck andthe safety belt continues totighten. Buckle any unused safetybelts behind the child restraint so

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

children cannot reach them. Pullthe shoulder belt all the way outof the retractor to set the lock,if the vehicle has one, after thechild restraint has been installed.

Notice: Do not let the LATCHattachments rub against thevehicle’s safety belts. This maydamage these parts. If necessary,move buckled safety belts toavoid rubbing the LATCHattachments.

Do not fold the empty rear seatwith a safety belt buckled. Thiscould damage the safety belt orthe seat. Unbuckle and return thesafety belt to its stowed position,before folding the seat.

Make sure to attach the childrestraint at the proper anchorlocation.

This system is designed to makeinstallation of child restraints easier.When using lower anchors, do notuse the vehicle's safety belts.Instead use the vehicle's anchorsand child restraint attachments tosecure the restraints. Somerestraints also use another vehicleanchor to secure a top tether.

1. Attach and tighten the lowerattachments to the loweranchors. If the child restraintdoes not have lowerattachments or the desiredseating position does not havelower anchors, secure the childrestraint with the top tether andthe safety belts. Refer to yourchild restraint manufacturerinstructions and the instructionsin this manual.

1.1. Find the lower anchorsfor the desired seatingposition.



1.2. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

For the outboard rearseating positions, if thehead restraint interfereswith the proper installationof the child restraint, thehead restraint may beremoved. See “HeadRestraint Removal andReinstallation” at the end ofthis section.

1.3. Attach and tighten the lowerattachments on the childrestraint to the loweranchors.

2. If the child restraint manufacturerrecommends that the top tetherbe attached, attach and tightenthe top tether to the top tetheranchor, if equipped. Refer to thechild restraint instructions andthe following steps:

2.1. Find the top tether anchorand open its cover toexpose the anchor.

2.2. Route, attach, and tightenthe top tether according toyour child restraintinstructions and thefollowing instructions:

. If you are using a dualtether in the rear outboardseating position with anadjustable head restraint,route the dual tether aroundthe head restraint.

. If you are using a dualtether in the rear outboardseating position and thehead restraint has beenremoved, route the dualtether over the seatback.



. If you are using a singletether in the rear outboardseating position with anadjustable head restraint,route the single tetherunder the head restraintand in between the headrestraint posts.

. If you are using a singletether in the rear outboardseating position and thehead restraint has beenremoved, route the singletether over the seatback.

. If you are using a dualtether in the rear centerseating position, lower theadjustable headrest downto its stowed position androute the dual tether overthe headrest.



. If you are using a singletether in the rear centerseating position, lower theadjustable headrest downto its stowed position androute the single tether overthe headrest.

3. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at theLATCH path and attemptto move it side‐to‐side andback‐and‐forth. There should beno more than 2.5 cm (1 in) ofmovement for proper installation.

Head Restraint Removal andReinstallation

The rear outboard head restraintscan be removed if they interfere withthe proper installation of the childrestraint. The headrest in the rearcenter seating position is notremovable and should be loweredto the stowed position for childrestraint installation.

To remove the head restraint:

1. Partially fold the seatbackforward. See Rear Seats onpage 3‑11 for additionalinformation.

2. Press both buttons on the headrestraint posts at the same time,and pull up on the headrestraint.

3. Store the head restraint in thecargo area of the vehicle.



4. When the child restraint isremoved, reinstall the headrestraint before the seatingposition is used.

{ WARNING

With head restraints that are notinstalled and adjusted properly,there is a greater chance thatoccupants will suffer a neck/spinal injury in a crash. Do notdrive until the head restraints forall occupants are installed andadjusted properly.

To reinstall the head restraint:

1. Insert the head restraint postsinto the holes in the top of theseatback. The notches (A) onthe posts must face the driverside of the vehicle.

2. Push the head restraint down.

If necessary, press the heightadjustment release button tofurther lower the head restraint.See Head Restraints onpage 3‑2.

3. Try to move the head restraint tomake sure that it is locked inplace.

Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash

{ WARNING

A crash can damage the LATCHsystem in the vehicle. A damagedLATCH system may not properlysecure the child restraint,resulting in serious injury or evendeath in a crash. To help makesure the LATCH system isworking properly after a crash,see your dealer to have thesystem inspected and anynecessary replacements madeas soon as possible.

If the vehicle has the LATCH systemand it was being used during acrash, new LATCH system partsmay be needed.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the LATCHsystem was not being used at thetime of the crash.



Securing Child Restraints(Rear Seat)When securing a child restraint in arear seating position, study theinstructions that came with thechild restraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.

If the child restraint has the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3‑53 for how andwhere to install the child restraintusing LATCH. If a child restraint issecured in the vehicle using asafety belt and it uses a top tether,see Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) onpage 3‑53 for top tether anchorlocations.

Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top strapmust be anchored.

In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached.

If the child restraint does not havethe LATCH system, you will beusing the safety belt to secure thechild restraint in this position.Be sure to follow the instructionsthat came with the child restraint.Secure the child in the child restraintwhen and as the instructions say.

If more than one child restraintneeds to be installed in the rearseat, be sure to read Where to Putthe Restraint on page 3‑52.

1. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

If the head restraint interfereswith the proper installation of thechild restraint, the head restraintmay be removed. See “HeadRestraint Removal andReinstallation” under LowerAnchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) onpage 3‑53.

2. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portions ofthe vehicle's safety belt throughor around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will showyou how.




Position the release button onthe buckle so that the safety beltcould be quickly unbuckled ifnecessary.

4. Pull the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set thelock. When the retractor lock isset, the belt can be tightened butnot pulled out of the retractor.

5. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of the belt,and feed the shoulder belt backinto the retractor. When installinga forward-facing child restraint, itmay be helpful to use your kneeto push down on the childrestraint as you tighten the belt.

Try to pull the belt out of theretractor to make sure theretractor is locked. If theretractor is not locked, repeatSteps 4 and 5.



6. If the child restraint has a toptether, follow the child restraintmanufacturer's instructionsregarding the use of the toptether. See Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3‑53 for moreinformation.

7. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at thesafety belt path and attempt tomove it side to side and backand forth. When the childrestraint is properly installed,there should be no more than2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle safety belt andlet it return to the stowed position.If the top tether is attached to a toptether anchor, disconnect it. If thehead restraint was removed,reinstall it before the seatingposition is used. See “HeadRestraint Removal andReinstallation” under LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) on page 3‑53 foradditional information on installingthe head restraint properly.

Securing Child Restraints(Front Passenger Seat)This vehicle has airbags. A rearseat is a safer place to secure aforward-facing child restraint.See Where to Put the Restraint onpage 3‑52.

In addition, the vehicle has apassenger sensing system which isdesigned to turn off the right frontpassenger frontal airbag undercertain conditions. See PassengerSensing System on page 3‑38 andPassenger Airbag Status Indicatoron page 5‑17 for more information,including important safetyinformation.



A label on the sun visor says,“Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front.” This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag deploys.

{ WARNING

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates.This is because the back of therear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflatingairbag. A child in a forward-facingchild restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates and thepassenger seat is in a forwardposition.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it isturned off.

Secure rear-facing childrestraints in a rear seat, evenif the airbag is off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe right front seat, always movethe front passenger seat as farback as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.

See Passenger Sensing Systemon page 3‑38 for additionalinformation.

If the vehicle does not have arear seat that will accommodatea rear‐facing child restraint, arear‐facing child restraint shouldnot be installed in the vehicle, evenif the airbag is off.

If the child restraint has the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3‑53 for how andwhere to install the child restraintusing LATCH. If a child restraint issecured using a safety belt and ituses a top tether, see LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) on page 3‑53 fortop tether anchor locations.

Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top strapmust be anchored.



In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached.

You will be using the lap-shoulderbelt to secure the child restraint inthis position. Follow the instructionsthat came with the child restraint.

1. Move the seat as far back as itwill go before securing theforward-facing child restraint.

When the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbagand seat‐mounted side impactairbag, the off indicator on thepassenger airbag statusindicator should light and staylit when you start the vehicle.See Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 5‑17.

2. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

3. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portions ofthe vehicle's safety belt throughor around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will showyou how.


Position the release button onthe buckle, so that the safetybelt could be quickly unbuckledif necessary.

5. Pull the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set thelock. When the retractor lock isset, the belt can be tightened butnot pulled out of the retractor.



6. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of the belt,and feed the shoulder belt backinto the retractor. When installinga forward-facing child restraint, itmay be helpful to use your kneeto push down on the childrestraint as you tighten the belt.

Try to pull the belt out of theretractor to make sure theretractor is locked. If theretractor is not locked, repeatSteps 5 and 6.

If the vehicle does not have arear seat and the child restrainthas a top tether, follow thechild restraint manufacturer'sinstructions regarding theuse of the top tether. See LowerAnchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) onpage 3‑53 for more information.

7. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at thesafety belt path and attempt tomove it side to side and backand forth. When the childrestraint is properly installed,there should be no more than2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.

If the airbags are off, the offindicator in the passenger airbagstatus indicator will come on andstay on when the vehicle is started.

If a child restraint has been installedand the on indicator is lit, see “If theOn Indicator is Lit for a ChildRestraint” under Passenger SensingSystem on page 3‑38 for moreinformation.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle safety belt andlet it return to the stowed position.



2 NOTES


Storage 4-1

Storage

Storage CompartmentsGlove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Front Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Armrest Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Center Console Storage . . . . . . 4-2

Additional Storage FeaturesCargo Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3Cargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5Cargo ManagementSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

Cargo Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11First Aid Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11

Roof Rack SystemRoof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12

StorageCompartments

Glove BoxLift the glove box handle up toopen it.

The glove box is air conditioned andcan be used to store items at alower temperature. The vehicle airconditioning must be turned on forthe maximum cool air to enter theglove box.

Move the slide control to open orclose the opening. Close the glovebox to keep cold air from enteringthe vehicle.


4-2 Storage

Cupholders

This vehicle has a cupholderequipped with a divider that can beadjusted to accommodate largecontainers or small containers.

For large containers, push thebutton to move aside the dividerand make the cupholder deeper. Forsmall containers, push down on thetop edge of the divider to lock itback in place to make the cupholdershorter.

Front Storage

Push the button on the door to openthe storage area in front of the shiftlever.

Armrest StoragePull the rear seat armrest forward toaccess the cupholders.

For vehicles with rear armreststorage, pull the lever to access thestorage area.

Center Console StorageThe center console has an armrestand storage area.

The armrest can be adjusted to aforward, middle, or rearwardposition.


Storage 4-3

Move the armrest to the fullrearward position to access thebuttons and open the storage area.

The storage area has an upperstorage tray and a lower mainstorage. Push the button (A) toaccess the upper storage tray andthe button (B) to access the lowermain storage.

There is an Accessory Power Outlet(APO) and Input Jacks for auxiliaryaudio devices. For moreinformation, see the separateinfotainment system manual.

Push the button to open the storagearea located at the rear of thecenter console.

Additional StorageFeatures

Cargo CoverFor vehicles with the dual positioncargo cover, it can be used to coveritems in the cargo area of thevehicle.

The shade can be set in twopositions. It can be set in a halfwayopen (A) position for loading objects


4-4 Storage

into the rear compartment, or thelower (B) position to conceal objectsin the rear compartment.

Install the Cargo Cover

1. Hold the cartridge so that thepull‐out shade faces the rear ofthe vehicle.

2. Align the cartridge over the pinson the trim panels of the vehicle.

3. Push down on the cartridge tosnap it into place.

4. Unroll the shade toward the rearof the vehicle.

5. Insert the shade pins in thechannels (C) on both sides.

6. Slide the shade to the lower (B)position, or the halfway open (A)position.

Remove the Cargo Cover

1. Remove the cover from thechannels and carefully roll itback up.

2. Slide the button on the top torelease the cartridge.

3. Pull up to remove the cartridgefrom the pins.


Storage 4-5

{ WARNING

An improperly stored cargo covercould be thrown about the vehicleduring a collision or suddenmaneuver. Someone could beinjured. If the cover is removed,always store it in the properstorage location. When it isreplaced, always be sure that it issecurely reattached.

Cargo Tie-DownsFor vehicles equipped with cargotie‐downs, the four tie-downs arelocated in the rear compartment ofthe vehicle. Use the tie-downs tosecure small loads.

Cargo ManagementSystem

To open the cargo managementsystem, pull the handle and lift up.

A prop rod (B) locks to hold thecover up when opened.

Four hooks (A) are located on theinside cover and can be used forstoring items.

There may be additional storagecompartments on each side of thecargo management system. Lift thepanel up to open.


4-6 Storage

Press the red pushbutton on theprop rod to close the cover.

Rear Storage Area

{ WARNING

An improperly latched and closedcargo cover, or cargo cover left inthe open position, could bethrown about the vehicle during acrash or sudden maneuver.Someone could be injured. Besure to return the cover to theclosed position and latch beforedriving. If the cover is removed,always store it outside of thevehicle. When it is replaced,always be sure that it is securelyreattached.

To access the rear storage area ofthe cargo management system, andthe tire sealant and compressor kit:

1. Remove the cargo cover,if equipped.

2. Open the cargo managementsystem cover.

3. Release the prop rod from theinside cover by sliding the redclip down.

Unhook the prop rod from thepin on the inside cover. Store theunhooked prop rod by folding itinto the cargo managementcompartment.


Storage 4-7

4. Store the cargo managementsystem cover by hooking it ontothe weatherstrip.

U-Rail

For vehicles with a u-rail system,the fence can be moved to differentpositions on the u-rail track tosecure cargo.

Push both adapter buttons to movethe adapters (B) on the straight partof the u-rail.

To move the fence around the u-rail,disconnect one side:

1. Unlock by turning the latch (A) toalign K with the arrow on theadapter (B).

2. Push the adaptor button to movethe adapters (B) to the desiredposition.


4-8 Storage

3. Reinstall the fence and lock bothlatches (A) by turning to align Qwith the arrow on theadapter (B).

Use the fence to secure items inplace.

Removing the Fence

Unlock by turning both latches (A) toalign K with the arrow on theadapter (B). Lift and remove thefence.

Installing the Fence

Insert the fence into the adaptersand lock both latches (A) by turningto align Q with the arrow on theadapter (B).


Storage 4-9

Storing the Fence

1. Lift the cargo managementsystem cover.

2. Release the cover from the proprod as described in previoussteps.

3. Insert the top of the gate into thelower two clips (A).

4. Flip the bottom of the gate upand insert it into the upper twoclips (B).

Cargo Net

{ WARNING

Do not stack items higher thanthe upper end of the cargo net orhang anything from the net. Avoiditems that have sharp edges orthat apply excessive force to thenet. If items are not properlystored, damage to the net couldoccur and items can be thrownabout the vehicle. You or otherscould be injured. Always storeitems behind the net.

For vehicles equipped with a cargonet, it can be used to store lightloads, keeping them from fallingover or being thrown into the cabinduring heavy braking.

The net should not be overloaded orused to store heavy loads.

There are four openings in theheadliner: two located behind thefront seats and two behind the rearseats.

1. Insert the top corners of thecargo net into the large openingin the headliner and secure bysliding them into the smallopening.

2. The rear seatbacks should befolded down when the net isinstalled in the headlineropening located behind the frontseats.


4-10 Storage

3. Mount the cargo net to the rearseat tethers located on the backof the folded down rear seatsand pull on the straps to tightenthe net.

4. When the net is installed in theheadliner opening locatedbehind the rear seats, the rearseatbacks should be upright.

5. Mount the cargo net to the cargotie-downs located on the lowerside panels.

6. Pull on the straps to tightenthe net.


Storage 4-11

Cargo Net Storage

The cargo net can be removed fromthe vehicle and stored in the cargomanagement system.

1. Disconnect the net from the roofopenings and the tethers.

2. Press the red button on thecenter of the net to fold it in half.

3. Roll up the cargo net, storing itinto the attached vinyl bag.

4. Open the cargo managementsystem cover.

5. For vehicles with an inflator kit,store the cargo net in theavailable space next to the kit.

Convenience NetThis vehicle may have aconvenience net located in the rearof the vehicle. Attach it to the cargotie‐downs for storing small loads.

Do not use the net to store heavyloads.

First Aid KitIf the vehicle has a first aid and toolkit, it is located in the storage binbehind the spare tire.

The kit includes:

A. First Aid Kit

B. Tire Pressure Gauge

C. Flashlight

D. Multi-Purpose Tool Set

The tire pressure gauge has a resetbutton in the gauge stem. Aftertaking a pressure reading, press thebutton to reset the gauge to zero.


4-12 Storage

Roof Rack System

{ WARNING

If something is carried on top ofthe vehicle that is longer or widerthan the roof rack— like paneling,plywood, or a mattress— thewind can catch it while the vehicleis being driven. The item beingcarried could be violently torn off,and this could cause a collisionand damage the vehicle. Nevercarry something longer or widerthan the roof rack on top of thevehicle unless using a Saabcertified accessory carrier.

For vehicles with a roof rack, therack can be used to load items.For roof racks that do not havecrossrails included, Saab certifiedcrossrails can be purchased as anaccessory. See your dealer foradditional information.

Notice: Loading cargo on theroof rack that weighs more than100 kg (220 lbs) or hangs over therear or sides of the vehicle maydamage the vehicle. Load cargoso that it rests evenly betweenthe crossrails, making sure tofasten cargo securely.

To prevent damage or loss of cargowhen driving, check to make surecrossrails and cargo are securely

fastened. Loading cargo on the roofrack will make the vehicle’s centerof gravity higher. Avoid high speeds,sudden starts, sharp turns, suddenbraking, or abrupt maneuvers;otherwise it may result in loss ofcontrol. If driving for a long distance,on rough roads, or at high speeds,occasionally stop the vehicle tomake sure the cargo remains in itsplace. Do not exceed the maximumvehicle capacity when loading thevehicle. For more information onvehicle capacity and loading, seeVehicle Load Limits on page 9‑12.


Instruments and Controls 5-1

Instruments andControls

ControlsSteering Wheel Adjustment . . . 5-2Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . 5-2Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . 5-3Rear Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

Headlamp Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6Clock (Digital Clock) . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicatorsWarning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12Fuel Economy Gauge . . . . . . . . 5-13

Turbo Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14Engine Coolant TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14

Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . 5-15Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . 5-16Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17

Charging System Light . . . . . . 5-18MalfunctionIndicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18

Brake System WarningLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

Electric Parking BrakeLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

Antilock Brake System (ABS)Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23

Traction Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24Electronic Stability Program(ESP) Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24

Electronic Stability Program(ESP)/Traction ControlSystem Indicator Light . . . . . . 5-25

Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-25Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . 5-26Fuel Economy Light . . . . . . . . . 5-27Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . 5-27Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27

High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . 5-28Adaptive Forward Lighting(AFL) Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28

Front Fog Lamp Light . . . . . . . . 5-28Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . . 5-29Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . 5-29

Information DisplaysDriver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29

Vehicle MessagesVehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34Battery Voltage and ChargingMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34

Brake System Messages . . . . 5-34Compass Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-35Cruise Control Messages . . . . 5-35Door Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-35Engine Cooling SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36

Engine Oil Messages . . . . . . . . 5-37Engine Power Messages . . . . 5-37Fuel System Messages . . . . . . 5-38Key and Lock Messages . . . . . 5-38Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38Object Detection SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39


5-2 Instruments and Controls

Ride Control SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39

Airbag System Messages . . . . 5-40Safety Belt Messages . . . . . . . 5-40Anti-theft Alarm SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40

Service Vehicle Messages . . . 5-40Starting the VehicleMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40

Tire Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41Transmission Messages . . . . . 5-41Vehicle ReminderMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42

Washer Fluid Messages . . . . . 5-42

Vehicle PersonalizationVehicle Personalization . . . . . . 5-42

Universal Remote SystemUniversal Remote System . . . 5-48Universal Remote SystemProgramming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-48

Universal Remote SystemOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51

Controls

Steering WheelAdjustment

The adjustment lever is located onthe left side of the steering column.

To adjust the steering wheel:

1. Pull the lever down.

2. Move the steering wheel upor down and in or out to acomfortable position.

3. Pull the lever up to lock thesteering wheel in place.

Do not adjust the steering wheelwhile driving.

Steering Wheel Controls

For vehicles with audio steeringwheel controls, some audio controlscan be adjusted at the steeringwheel.



b / g (Push to Talk): For vehicleswith a Bluetooth®, OnStar®,or navigation system, press tointeract with those systems. Seethe OnStar Owner's Guide or theseparate infotainment systemmanual for more information.

$ /i (Mute/End Call): Press tosilence the vehicle speakers only.Press again to turn the sound on.For vehicles with Bluetooth, OnStar,or navigation systems, press toreject an incoming call, or end acurrent call.

_ SRC ^ (Rotary Control): Turnto select an audio source.

Turn _ or ^ to select the next orprevious favorite radio station, CD,DVD track/chapter (with navigation),or MP3 track.

Press SRC to change betweenradio and CD or DVD.

+ x − (Volume): Press + toincrease the volume. Press − todecrease the volume.

HornPress near the horn symbols orpress on the steering wheel pad tosound the horn.

Windshield Wiper/Washer

The windshield wiper/washer leveris located on the right side of thesteering column. With the ignition inACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN/START, move the windshield wiperlever to select the wiper speed.

2: Use for fast wipes.

1: Use for slow wipes.

G (Adjustable Interval Wipes):Move the lever up toG foradjustable interval wipes, thenturn the3 band up for morefrequent wipes or down for lessfrequent wipes. If the vehicle hasRainsense™, see the followingRainsense information.

( (Off): Use to turn the wipers off.

8 (Mist): For a single wipe, brieflymove the wiper lever down. Forseveral wipes, hold the wiperlever down.



Clear snow and ice from the wiperblades before using them. If frozento the windshield, carefully loosen orthaw them. Damaged blades shouldbe replaced. See Wiper BladeReplacement on page 10‑32.

Heavy snow or ice can overload thewiper motor.

Wipe Parking

If the ignition is turned to LOCK/OFF while the wipers are on 1, 2,orG, they will immediately stop.

If the windshield wiper lever is thenmoved to off before the driver dooris opened or within 10 minutes, thewipers will restart and move to thebase of the windshield.

If the ignition is turned to LOCK/OFF while the wipers are performingwipes due to windshield washing,the wipers continue to run until theyreach the base of the windshield.

Rainsense™

For vehicles with Rainsense, asensor located near the top centerof the windshield detects theamount of water on the windshieldand automatically controls thefrequency of the windshield wiper.

Keep this area of the windshieldclear of debris to allow for bestsystem performance.

G (Rainsense Wipe SensitivityControl): Move the windshieldwiper lever toG. Turn the3band on the wiper lever to adjustthe sensitivity.. Turn the band up for more

sensitivity to moisture.

. Turn the band down for lesssensitivity to moisture.

. Move the windshield wiperlever out of theG position todeactivate Rainsense.

Wiper Arm Assembly Protection

When using an automatic car wash,move the windshield wiper lever tothe off position. This disables theautomatic Rainsense windshieldwipers and/or rear wiper.

With Rainsense, if the transmissionis in N (Neutral) and the vehiclespeed is very slow, the wipers willautomatically stop at the base of thewindshield.

The wiper operations return tonormal when the transmission is nolonger in N (Neutral) or the vehiclespeed has increased.



Windshield Washer

Pull the lever toward you to spraywasher fluid on the windshield. Thespray continues until the lever isreleased. The wipers will run a fewtimes. See Washer Fluid onpage 10‑26 for information onfilling the windshield washer fluidreservoir.

{ WARNING

In freezing weather, do not usethe washer until the windshield iswarmed. Otherwise the washerfluid can form ice on thewindshield, blocking your vision.

Rear WindowWiper/WasherThe rear wiper controls are on theend of the windshield wiper lever.

Press the upper or lower portion ofthe button to control the rear wiperand rear wiper delay.

The system turns off when thebutton is returned to the middleposition.

Z (Rear Wiper): Use forcontinuous rear window wipes.

5 (Rear Wiper Delay): Use to seta delay between wipes.

= (Rear Washer): Push thewindshield wiper lever forward tospray washer fluid on the rearwindow. The lever automaticallyreturns to its original position whenreleased.



Reverse Gear Wipes

If the rear wiper control is off, therear wiper will automatically operatecontinuously when the shift leveris in R (Reverse), and the frontwindshield wiper is performing lowor high speed wipes. If the rearwiper control is off, the shift leveris in R (Reverse), and the frontwindshield wiper is performinginterval wipes, then the rear wiperautomatically performs intervalwipes.

This feature can be changed.See Vehicle Personalization onpage 5‑42.

The windshield washer reservoir isused for the windshield and the rearwindow. Check the fluid level in thereservoir if either washer is notworking. See Washer Fluid onpage 10‑26.

Headlamp WasherFor vehicles with headlampwashers, they are located to theside of the headlamps.

The headlamps must be on in orderto use the headlamp washers. If theheadlamps are not on, only thewindshield will be washed.

Pull the wiper lever toward youand hold briefly to activate. Theheadlamp washers will spray once,pause, and spray again. Theheadlamp washer will spray againafter five windshield wash cycles.

See Washer Fluid on page 10‑26 forinformation on filling the windshieldwasher fluid.

CompassThe vehicle may have a compassdisplay on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). The compass receivesits heading and other informationfrom the Global PositioningSystem (GPS) antenna, ElectronicStability Program (ESP), and vehiclespeed information.

Avoid covering the GPS antennafor long periods of time with objectsthat may interfere with the antenna'sability to receive a satellite signal.



See the infotainment system manualfor the location of the vehicle'santenna. The compass system isdesigned to operate for a certainnumber of miles or degrees of turnbefore needing a signal from theGPS satellites. When the compassdisplay shows CAL, drive thevehicle for a short distance in anopen area where it can receive aGPS signal. The compass systemwill automatically determine when aGPS signal is restored and providea heading again. See CompassMessages on page 5‑35 for moreinformation on the messages thatmay be displayed for the compass.

Clock (Digital Clock)The infotainment system controlsare used to access the time anddate settings through the menusystem. See the separateinfotainment system manual forinformation about how to use themenu system or how to operatethe digital clock for the navigationsystem.

To turn the digital clock on or off:



3. Select Clock Displayed.

4. Press MENU/SELECT to turnthe clock on or off.

Setting the Time and Date



3. Select Set Time or Set Date.

4. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob toadjust the highlighted value.

5. Press the MENU/SELECT knobto select the next value.

6. To save the time or dateand return to the Time andDate Settings menu, pressthe } BACK button at any timeor press the MENU/SELECTknob after adjusting the minutesor year.



Setting the 12/24 Hour Format



3. Highlight 12/24 Hour Format.

4. Press the MENU/SELECT knobto select the 12 hour or 24 hourdisplay format.

Setting the Month & DayFormat



3. Highlight Month & Day Format.

4. Press the MENU/SELECT knobto select MM/DD (month/day) orDD/MM (day/month).

Setting the Auto Time Adjust



3. Highlight Auto Time Adjust.

4. Press the MENU/SELECT knobto turn Auto Time Adjust onor off.

Power OutletsThe accessory power outlets can beused to plug in electrical equipment,such as a cell phone or MP3 player.

The vehicle has four accessorypower outlets. The power outletslocated below the climate controlsystem, inside the center floorconsole, and on the rear of thecenter floor console are poweredwhile the vehicle is in ON/RUN/START or ACC/ACCESSORYmode, or until the driver door isopened within 10 minutes of turningoff the vehicle.

The power outlet located in the rearcargo area is powered at all times.

There is a small cap that must beremoved to access the accessorypower outlet. When not using theoutlet be sure to cover it with theprotective cap.

Notice: Leaving electricalequipment plugged in for anextended period of time whilethe vehicle is off will drain the

battery. Power is always suppliedto the rear cargo outlet. Alwaysunplug electrical equipment whennot in use and do not plug inequipment that exceeds themaximum 20 ampere rating.

Certain accessory power plugsmay not be compatible with theaccessory power outlet and couldoverload vehicle or adapter fuses.If a problem is experienced, seeyour dealer.

When adding electrical equipment,be sure to follow the properinstallation instructions includedwith the equipment. See Add-OnElectrical Equipment on page 9‑61.

Notice: Hanging heavyequipment from the poweroutlet can cause damage notcovered by the vehicle warranty.The power outlets are designedfor accessory power plugs only,such as cell phone charge cords.



Warning Lights,Gauges, andIndicatorsWarning lights and gauges cansignal that something is wrongbefore it becomes serious enoughto cause an expensive repair orreplacement. Paying attention to thewarning lights and gauges couldprevent injury.

Warning lights come on when therecould be a problem with a vehiclefunction. Some warning lights comeon briefly when the engine is startedto indicate they are working.

Gauges can indicate when therecould be a problem with a vehiclefunction. Often gauges and warninglights work together to indicate aproblem with the vehicle.

When one of the warning lightscomes on and stays on whiledriving, or when one of the gaugesshows there may be a problem,check the section that explains whatto do. Follow this manual's advice.Waiting to do repairs can be costlyand even dangerous.



Instrument Cluster

English Shown, Metric Similar



English Turbo Shown, Metric Turbo Similar



SpeedometerThe speedometer shows thevehicle's speed in either kilometersper hour (km/h) or miles perhour (mph).

OdometerThe odometer shows how far thevehicle has been driven, in eitherkilometers or miles.

This vehicle has a tamper-resistantodometer. If the vehicle needs anew odometer installed, the newone is set to the mileage of the oldodometer. If this is not possible, it isset at zero and a label is put on thedriver door to show the old mileagereading.

TachometerThe tachometer displays theengine speed in revolutions perminute (rpm).

Notice: If the engine is operatedwith the tachometer in the shadedwarning area, the vehicle couldbe damaged, and the damageswould not be covered by thevehicle warranty. Do not operatethe engine with the tachometer inthe shaded warning area.

Fuel Gauge

When the ignition is on, the fuelgauge tells you about how muchfuel you have left in your tank.

An arrow on the fuel gaugeindicates the side of the vehiclethe fuel door is on.

When the indicator nears empty, thelow fuel light will come on. You stillhave a little fuel left, but you shouldget more soon.



Here are four things that someowners ask about. None of theseshow a problem with your fuelgauge:. At the service station, the fuel

pump shuts off before the gaugereads full.

. It takes a little more or lessfuel to fill up than the gaugeindicated. For example, thegauge may have indicated thetank was half full, but it actuallytook a little more or less thanhalf the tank's capacity to fillthe tank.

. The gauge moves a little whenyou turn a corner or speed up.

. The gauge takes a few secondsto stabilize after the ignition isturned on, and will go back toempty when you turn theignition off.

Fuel Economy Gauge

Metric

English

The gauge shows the fuel usagethat the vehicle is currentlyachieving in MPG and in litersper 100 kilometers (l/100 km).

MIN/20: Is when the least efficientfuel economy usually occurs duringacceleration or when idling.

MAX/l/100: Is when the best fueleconomy is being achieved.

This gauge moves often as it is aninstantaneous calculation based oncurrent driving conditions.



Turbo Gauge

For vehicles with a turbo gauge, itindicates when the vehicle is usingturbo power.

When the needle is at rest at theleft of the gauge, turbo is notbeing used.

As the accelerator pedal is pressed,the needle may move to the right.This is normal and means that thevehicle is using turbo power. Undernormal conditions the needle will notdisplay a reading in the red.

Once the driver eases off theaccelerator pedal or thetransmission shifts, the needlemoves back into the left area ofthe gauge.

Engine CoolantTemperature Gauge

This gauge measuresthe temperature of the vehicle'sengine.



If the indicator needle moves intothe shaded area, the engine is toohot. A temperature indicator light willturn on.

If you have been operating yourvehicle under normal drivingconditions, and the temperatureindicator light comes on, you shouldpull off the road, stop your vehicleand turn off the engine as soon aspossible.

Safety Belt Reminders

Driver Safety Belt ReminderLight

There is a driver safety beltreminder light on the instrumentpanel cluster.

When the vehicle is started this lightflashes and a chime comes on toremind drivers to fasten their safetybelt. Then the light stays on soliduntil the belt is buckled.

This cycle may continue severaltimes if the driver remains orbecomes unbuckled during drivingwhile the vehicle is moving.

If the driver safety belt is alreadybuckled, neither the light nor chimecomes on.

Passenger Safety BeltReminder Light

When the vehicle is started this lightflashes and a chime may come onto remind the front passenger tofasten their safety belt. Then thelight stays on solid until the belt isbuckled.

This cycle may continue severaltimes if the passenger remains orbecomes unbuckled while thevehicle is moving.

If the passenger safety belt isbuckled, neither the chime nor thelight comes on.



The front passenger safety beltreminder light and chime may turnon if an object is put on the seatsuch as a briefcase, handbag,grocery bag, laptop, or otherelectronic device. To turn off thereminder light and/or chime, removethe object from the seat or bucklethe safety belt.

Second Row Passenger BeltReminder Light

When the engine is started and theTrip/Fuel display is chosen, threegray safety belt symbols come onand stay on for several seconds onthe top of the Driver informationCenter (DIC) to remind passengersto fasten their safety belts.

If the Vehicle Information isselected, a full page screen displaysat start-up the three safety beltsymbols.

Once the passenger safety belt isbuckled, the corresponding safetybelt symbol in the DIC turns green.There are no seat position sensorsin the seat, nor a safety beltreminder sensor pad. If a safetybelt is not initially buckled, thecluster continues to show thegray safety belt icon.

While the vehicle is moving, if asecond row passenger who waspreviously buckled becomesunbuckled, a full screen warningdisplays with the correspondingsafety belt indicator flashing red.A chime may sound.

Acknowledge warning messages bypressing any of the DIC buttons.

Airbag Readiness LightThis light shows if there is anelectrical problem. The systemcheck includes the airbag sensor,the pretensioners, the airbagmodules, the wiring, and the crashsensing and diagnostic module.For more information on the airbagsystem, see Airbag System onpage 3‑29.

The airbag readiness light comes onand stays on for several secondswhen the vehicle is started. Thenthe light goes out.



{ WARNING

If the airbag readiness light stayson after the vehicle is started orcomes on while driving, it meansthe airbag system might not beworking properly. The airbags inthe vehicle might not inflate in acrash, or they could even inflatewithout a crash. To help avoidinjury, have the vehicle servicedright away.

Passenger Airbag StatusIndicatorThe vehicle has a passengersensing system. See PassengerSensing System on page 3‑38 forimportant safety information. Theoverhead console has a passengerairbag status indicator.

United States

Canada

When the vehicle is started, thepassenger airbag status indicatorwill light ON and OFF, or the symbolfor on and off, for several secondsas a system check. If you are usingremote start, if equipped, to startthe vehicle from a distance youmay not see the system check.

Then, after several more seconds,the status indicator will light eitherON or OFF, or either the on or offsymbol to let you know the status ofthe right front passenger frontal andseat‐mounted side impact airbag.

If the word ON or the on symbol islit on the passenger airbag statusindicator, it means that the rightfront passenger frontal airbag andseat‐mounted side impact airbagare enabled (may inflate).

If the word OFF or the off symbolis lit on the passenger airbagstatus indicator, it means that thepassenger sensing system hasturned off the right front passengerfrontal and seat‐mounted sideimpact airbag.



If, after several seconds, both statusindicator lights remain on, or if thereare no lights at all, there may be aproblem with the lights or thepassenger sensing system. Seeyour dealer for service.

{ WARNING

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrongwith the airbag system. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others,have the vehicle serviced rightaway. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 5‑16 for moreinformation, including importantsafety information.

Charging System Light

The charging system light comes onbriefly when the ignition is turnedon, but the engine is not running, asa check to show the light is working.The light turns off when the engineis started. If it does not, have thevehicle serviced by your dealer.

If the light stays on, or comes onwhile driving, there may be aproblem with the electrical chargingsystem. Have it checked by yourdealer. Driving while this light is oncould drain the battery.

When this light comes on, theDriver Information Center (DIC)also displays a message.

See Battery Voltage and ChargingMessages on page 5‑34.

If a short distance must be drivenwith the light on, be sure to turn offall accessories, such as the radioand air conditioner.

MalfunctionIndicator LampA computer system called OBD II(On-Board Diagnostics-SecondGeneration) monitors operation ofthe fuel, ignition, and emissioncontrol systems. It ensures thatemissions are at acceptable levelsfor the life of the vehicle, helping toproduce a cleaner environment.



This light should come on when theignition is on, but the engine is notrunning, as a check to show it isworking. If it does not, have thevehicle serviced by your dealer.

If the malfunction indicator lampcomes on and stays on while theengine is running, this indicates thatthere is an OBD II problem andservice is required.

Malfunctions often are indicated bythe system before any problem isapparent. Being aware of the lightcan prevent more serious damageto the vehicle. This system assiststhe service technician in correctlydiagnosing any malfunction.

Notice: If the vehicle iscontinually driven with this lighton, the emission controls mightnot work as well, the vehicle fueleconomy might not be as good,and the engine might not run assmoothly. This could lead tocostly repairs that might not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Notice: Modifications made to theengine, transmission, exhaust,intake, or fuel system of thevehicle or the replacement of theoriginal tires with other thanthose of the same TirePerformance Criteria (TPC) canaffect the vehicle's emissioncontrols and can cause this lightto come on. Modifications tothese systems could lead tocostly repairs not covered by thevehicle warranty. This could alsoresult in a failure to pass arequired Emission Inspection/Maintenance test. SeeAccessories and Modifications onpage 10‑3.



This light comes on during amalfunction in one of two ways:

Light Flashing: A misfire conditionhas been detected. A misfireincreases vehicle emissions andcould damage the emission controlsystem on the vehicle. Diagnosisand service might be required.

To prevent more serious damage tothe vehicle:. Reduce vehicle speed.. Avoid hard accelerations.. Avoid steep uphill grades.. If towing a trailer, reduce the

amount of cargo being hauledas soon as it is possible.

If the light continues to flash, whenit is safe to do so, stop the vehicle.Find a safe place to park thevehicle. Turn the vehicle off, wait atleast 10 seconds, and restart theengine. If the light is still flashing,follow the previous steps and seeyour dealer for service as soon aspossible.

Light On Steady: An emissioncontrol system malfunction hasbeen detected on the vehicle.Diagnosis and service might berequired.

The following may correct anemissions system malfunction:. Make sure the fuel cap is fully

installed. See Filling the Tank onpage 9‑50. The diagnosticsystem can determine if thefuel cap has been left off orimproperly installed. A loose ormissing fuel cap allows fuel toevaporate into the atmosphere.A few driving trips with the capproperly installed should turn thelight off.

. Make sure the electrical systemis not wet. The system could bewet if the vehicle was driventhrough a deep puddle of water.The condition is usuallycorrected when the electricalsystem dries out. A few drivingtrips should turn the light off.

. Make sure to fuel the vehiclewith quality fuel. Poor fuel qualitycauses the engine not to run asefficiently as designed and cancause: stalling after start-up,stalling when the vehicle ischanged into gear, misfiring,hesitation on acceleration,or stumbling on acceleration.These conditions might go awayonce the engine is warmed up.

If one or more of these conditionsoccurs, change the fuel brand used.It will require at least one full tank ofthe proper fuel to turn the light off.

See Recommended Fuel onpage 9‑48.



If none of the above have madethe light turn off, your dealer cancheck the vehicle. The dealerhas the proper test equipmentand diagnostic tools to fix anymechanical or electrical problemsthat might have developed.

Emissions Inspection andMaintenance Programs

Some state/provincial andlocal governments may haveprograms to inspect the on-vehicleemission control equipment.For the inspection, the emissionsystem test equipment is connectedto the vehicle’s Data LinkConnector (DLC).

The DLC is under the instrumentpanel to the left of the steeringwheel. See your dealer if assistanceis needed.

The vehicle may not passinspection if:. The malfunction indicator lamp is

on with the engine running, or ifthe light does not come on whenthe ignition is turned to ON/RUNwhile the engine is off.

. The critical emission controlsystems have not beencompletely diagnosed by thesystem. This can happen ifthe battery has recently beenreplaced or if the battery has rundown. The diagnostic systemevaluates critical emissioncontrol systems duringnormal driving. This can takeseveral days of routine driving.If this has been done and thevehicle still does not pass theinspection, your dealer canprepare the vehicle forinspection.



Brake System WarningLightThe vehicle brake system consistsof two hydraulic circuits. If onecircuit is not working, the remainingcircuit can still work to stop thevehicle. For normal brakingperformance, both circuitsneed to be working.

If the warning light comes on, thereis a brake problem. Have the brakesystem inspected right away.

Metric English

The brake indicator light shouldcome on briefly as the engine isstarted. If it does not come on havethe vehicle serviced by your dealer.

{ WARNING

The brake system might not beworking properly if the brakesystem warning light is on.Driving with the brake systemwarning light on can lead to acrash. If the light is still on afterthe vehicle has been pulled offthe road and carefully stopped,have the vehicle towed forservice.

If the light comes on while driving, achime sounds. Pull off the road andstop. The pedal might be harder topush or go closer to the floor.It might also take longer to stop.If the light is still on, have thevehicle towed for service. SeeTowing the Vehicle on page 10‑97.

Electric Parking BrakeLight

Metric English

For vehicles with the ElectricParking Brake (EPB), this lightshould come on briefly as theengine is started. If it does notcome on, have the vehicle servicedby your dealer.

The parking brake status lightcomes on when the brake isapplied. If the light continuesflashing after the parking brakeis released, or while driving,there is a problem with theElectric Parking Brake system.A SERVICE PARKING BRAKEmessage may also display in theDriver Information Center (DIC).See Brake System Messages onpage 5‑34 for more information.



If the light does not come on,or remains flashing, see your dealer.

For vehicles with the EPB, thebrake warning light should come onbriefly when the engine is started.If it does not come on, have thevehicle serviced by your dealer.

If this light comes on, there is aproblem with a system on thevehicle that is causing the parkingbrake system to work at a reducedlevel. The vehicle can still be driven,but should be taken to a dealer assoon as possible. See ParkingBrake on page 9‑31 for moreinformation.

Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning Light

For vehicles with the Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS), this light comes onbriefly when the engine is started.

If the light does not come on, have itfixed so it will be ready to warn ifthere is a problem.

If the ABS light comes on and stayson while driving, stop as soon aspossible and turn the ignition off.

Start the engine again to reset thesystem. If the light stays on afterdriving at a speed above 20 km/h(13 mph), see your dealer forservice. A chime may also soundwhen the light comes on steady.

If the regular brake system warninglight is not on, the vehicle still hasbrakes, but not antilock brakes.If the regular brake system warninglight is also on, the vehicle does nothave antilock brakes and there is aproblem with the regular brakes.See Brake System Warning Light onpage 5‑22.

See Brake System Messages onpage 5‑34 for all brake‐related DICmessages.



Traction Off Light

This light comes on briefly whilestarting the engine. If it does not,have the vehicle serviced by yourdealer. If the system is workingnormally, the indicator light thenturns off.

The traction off light comes on whenthe Traction Control System (TCS)has been turned off by pressing andreleasing the traction control button.

This light and the StabiliTrak Offlight come on when StabiliTrak isturned off.

If the Traction Control System (TCS)is off, wheelspin is not limited.Adjust driving accordingly.

See Traction Control System (TCS)on page 9‑34 and ElectronicStability Program (ESP) onpage 9‑36 for more information.

Electronic StabilityProgram (ESP) Off Light

This light comes on when theStabiliTrak system is turned off bypressing the StabiliTrak/TCS button.If the Traction Control System (TCS)is off, wheel spin is not limited.

When the Electronic StabilityProgram (ESP) is off, the systemdoes not assist in controlling thevehicle. Adjust driving accordingly.

The warning light goes off whentraction control and the StabiliTraksystem are enabled.




Electronic StabilityProgram (ESP)/TractionControl System IndicatorLight

The StabiliTrak system or theTraction Control System (TCS)indicator/warning light come onbriefly when the engine is started.

If the light does not come on, havethe vehicle serviced by the dealer.If the system is working normally,the indicator light turns off.

If the light is on and not flashing, theTCS, and potentially the StabiliTraksystem have been disabled. A DICmessage may display. Check theDIC messages to determine whichfeature(s) is no longer functioningand whether the vehicle requiresservice.

If the indicator/warning light is onand flashing, the TCS and/or theStabiliTrak system is activelyworking.


Tire Pressure Light

For vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), this lightcomes on briefly when the engineis started. It provides informationabout tire pressures and the TPMS.



When the Light is On Steady

This indicates that one or moreof the tires are significantlyunderinflated.

A tire pressure message canaccompany the light. See TireMessages on page 5‑41 for moreinformation. Stop as soon aspossible, and inflate the tires tothe pressure value shown on theTire and Loading Information label.See Tire Pressure on page 10‑59for more information.

When the Light Flashes First andThen is On Steady

This indicates that there may be aproblem with the TPMS. The lightflashes for about a minute andstays on steady for the remainderof the ignition cycle. This sequencerepeats with every ignition cycle.See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation on page 10‑63 formore information.

Engine Oil Pressure Light

{ WARNING

Do not keep driving if the oilpressure is low. The engine canbecome so hot that it catches fire.Someone could be burned. Checkthe oil as soon as possible andhave the vehicle serviced.

Notice: Lack of proper engine oilmaintenance can damage theengine. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always follow the maintenanceschedule for changing engine oil.

The oil pressure light should comeon briefly as the engine is started.If it does not come on have thevehicle serviced by your dealer.

If the light comes on and stays on, itmeans that oil is not flowing throughthe engine properly. The vehiclecould be low on oil and might havesome other system problem. Seeyour dealer.



Fuel Economy Light

For vehicles with the fuel economymode light, it comes on when theeco (economy) switch, located nextto the shift lever, is pressed. Pressthe switch again to turn off the lightand exit the fuel saver mode. SeeDriving for Better Fuel Economy onpage 1‑22 for more information.

Low Fuel Warning Light

This light is located near the fuelgauge and comes on briefly whenthe ignition is turned on as a checkto show it is working.

It also comes on when the fuel tankis low on fuel. The light turns offwhen fuel is added. If it does not,have the vehicle serviced.

Security Light

This light flashes when the securitysystem is activated.

For more information, see VehicleSecurity on page 2‑16.



High-Beam On Light

This light comes on when thehigh-beam headlamps are in use.

See Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger on page 6‑2 for moreinformation.

Adaptive ForwardLighting (AFL) Light

The Adaptive Forward LightingSystem (AFL) pivots the headlampshorizontally to provide greater roadillumination while turning. AFL willoperate when the vehicle speed isgreater than 3 mph (2 km/h). Thislight comes on solid when there is aproblem with the system. It flasheswhen the system is switchingbetween lighting modes.

Front Fog Lamp Light

The fog lamp light comes on whenthe fog lamps are in use.

The light goes out when the foglamps are turned off. See Front FogLamps on page 6‑5 for moreinformation.



Lamps On Reminder

For vehicles with the lamps onreminder light, it comes on when thelights are in use.

Cruise Control Light

The cruise control light is whitewhenever the cruise control is set,and turns green when the cruisecontrol is active.

The light turns off when the cruisecontrol is turned off. See CruiseControl on page 9‑39 for moreinformation.

Information Displays

Driver InformationCenter (DIC)The DIC displays information aboutthe vehicle. It also displays warningmessages if a system problem isdetected. See Vehicle Messages onpage 5‑34 for more information.All messages appear in the DICdisplay located in the center of theinstrument panel cluster.

The vehicle may also have featuresthat can be customized through thecontrols on the radio. See VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑42 formore information.

The DIC displays an indicator whenthe Rainsense wipers are active.



DIC Operation and Displays

The DIC has different displayswhich can be accessed by usingthe DIC buttons on the turn signallever located on the left side of thesteering wheel. The DIC displaystrip, fuel, vehicle system information,and warning messages if a systemproblem is detected.

The bottom of the DIC displayshows what position the shiftlever is in and the odometer. Thedirection the vehicle is driving willbe shown on the top of the display.

DIC Buttons

A. SET/CLR (Set/Clear): Use thisbutton to set or clear the menuitem when it is displayed.

B. wx (Thumbwheel): Use thethumbwheel to scroll throughthe items in each menu. A smallmarker will move up or downthe side of the display as youscroll through the items. Thisshows where each item is inthe menu.

C. MENU: Press this button to getto the Trip/Fuel InformationMenu and the VehicleInformation Menu.

Trip/Fuel InformationMenu Items

Press the MENU button on theturn signal lever until Trip/FuelInformation Menu is displayed.Use the thumbwheel to scrollthrough the following menu items:. Digital Speedometer. Trip. Fuel Range. Average Fuel Economy or

Average Fuel Economy andInstantaneous Fuel Economy

. Average Vehicle Speed

. Navigation

. Speed and Curve Assist

. Distance to Destination

. Blank Display



Digital Speedometer

The speedometer shows how fastthe vehicle is moving in eitherkilometers per hour (km/h) or milesper hour (mph). The speedometercannot be reset.

Trip

The Trip display shows thecurrent distance traveled, in eitherkilometers (km) or miles (mi), sincethe trip odometer was last reset.The trip odometer can be reset tozero by pressing the trip reset stemor the SET/CLR button while the tripodometer display is showing.

Fuel Range

The Fuel Range display shows theapproximate distance the vehiclecan be driven without refueling.The fuel range estimate is basedon an average of the vehicle's fueleconomy over recent driving historyand the amount of fuel remaining inthe fuel tank. Fuel range cannot bereset.

Average Fuel Economy orAverage Fuel Economy andInstantaneous Fuel Economy

The Average Fuel Economy displayshows the approximate averageliters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km)or miles per gallon (mpg). Thisnumber is calculated based on thenumber of L/100 km (mpg) recordedsince the last time this menu itemwas reset. The Average FuelEconomy can be reset by pressingSET/CLR while the Average FuelEconomy display is showing.

The Instantaneous Fuel Economydisplay shows the current fueleconomy in either liters per100 kilometers (L/100 km) or milesper gallon (mpg). This numberreflects only the fuel economy thatthe vehicle has right now andchanges frequently as drivingconditions change. Unlike averageeconomy, this display cannot bereset.

Average Vehicle Speed

The Average Vehicle Speed displayshows the average speed of thevehicle in kilometers per hour (km/h)or miles per hour (mph). Thisaverage is calculated based on thevarious vehicle speeds recordedsince the last reset of this value.The average speed can be reset bypressing the SET/CLR button whilethe Average Vehicle Speed displayis showing.

Navigation

This display is used for the OnStaror Navigation System Turn-by-Turnguidance. See the OnStar Owner'sGuide or the infotainment systemmanual, if the vehicle hasnavigation, for more information.



Speed and Curve Assist

This display will show the speedlimit or the advised speed asdetermined by the informationprovided by the navigation system.The map database loaded in thenavigation system may need to beupdated periodically to displayaccurate information. See “Maps” inthe infotainment system manual forinformation on updating the mapdatabase.

Distance to Destination

This display will show the vehicledistance with estimated time ofarrival to destination. The value canbe cleared or reset by pressingthe SET/CLR button. Move thethumbwheel up or down to increaseor decrease the destination value.

Blank Display

This display shows no information.

Vehicle Information MenuItems

Press the MENU button on theturn signal lever until VehicleInformation Menu is displayed.Use the thumbwheel to scrollthrough the following menu items:. Unit. Battery Voltage. Oil Life Remaining. Tire Pressure. Speed Warning. Blank Display

Unit

Move the thumbwheel up or downto switch between metric or Englishwhen the Unit display is active.Press SET/CLR to confirm thesetting. This will change thedisplays on the cluster and DICto either metric or Englishmeasurements.

Battery Voltage

This display, available on somevehicles, shows the current batteryvoltage. If the voltage is in thenormal range, the value will display.For example, the display may readBATTERY VOLTAGE 15.0 VOLTS.The vehicle's charging systemregulates voltage based on the stateof the battery. The battery voltagecan fluctuate while viewing thisinformation on the DIC. This isnormal. See Charging System Lighton page 5‑18 for more information.If there is a problem with the batterycharging system, the DIC willdisplay a message. See BatteryVoltage and Charging Messages onpage 5‑34.



Oil Life Remaining

This display shows an estimateof the oil's remaining useful life.If 99% OIL LIFE REMAINING isdisplayed, that means 99% of thecurrent oil life remains.

When the remaining oil life is low,the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage will appear on the display.See Engine Oil Messages onpage 5‑37. The oil should bechanged as soon as possible.See Engine Oil on page 10‑10.In addition to the engine oil lifesystem monitoring the oil life,additional maintenance isrecommended in the MaintenanceSchedule in this manual.See Scheduled Maintenance onpage 11‑3 for more information.

Remember, the Oil Life displaymust be reset after each oil change.It will not reset itself. Also, becareful not to reset the Oil Lifedisplay accidentally at any timeother than when the oil has justbeen changed. It cannot be resetaccurately until the next oil change.To reset the engine oil life system,press the SET/CLR button whilethe Oil Life display is active.See Engine Oil Life System onpage 10‑14.

Tire Pressure

The display will show a vehicle withthe approximate pressures of allfour tires. Tire pressure is displayedin either kilopascal (kPa) or inpounds per square inch (psi).See Tire Pressure Monitor Systemon page 10‑61 and Tire PressureMonitor Operation on page 10‑63for more information.

Speed Warning

Speed Warning allows the driver toset a speed that they do not wantto exceed. To set the SpeedWarning, press SET/CLR whenSpeed Warning is displayed. Afterselecting ON, use the thumbwheelto increase or decrease the desiredspeed limit. The value can be setfrom 0-250 km/h (0-160 mph).Press SET/CLR to confirm. If theselected speed limit is exceeded,a pop-up warning is displayedwith a chime.

Blank Display

This display shows no information.

Compass

The vehicle may have a compassdisplay in the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). See Compass onpage 5‑6.



Vehicle MessagesMessages displayed on the DICindicate the status of the vehicleor some action that may be neededto correct a condition. Multiplemessages may display one afterthe other.

The messages that do notrequire immediate action canbe acknowledged and clearedby pressing SET/CLR. Themessages that require immediateaction cannot be cleared until thataction is performed. All messagesshould be taken seriously andclearing the messages does notcorrect the problem.

Battery Voltage andCharging Messages

BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE

This message displays whenthe vehicle has detected that thebattery voltage is dropping beyonda reasonable point. The batterysaver system starts reducing certainfeatures of the vehicle that you maybe able to notice. At the point thatfeatures are disabled, this messageis displayed. It means that thevehicle is trying to save the chargein the battery. Turn off unnecessaryaccessories to allow the battery torecharge.

LOW BATTERY

This message is displayed when thebattery voltage is low. See Batteryon page 10‑30 for more information.

SERVICE BATTERYCHARGING SYSTEM

This message is displayedwhen there is a fault in the batterycharging system. Take the vehicle toyour dealer for service.

Brake System Messages

BRAKE FLUID LOW

This message is displayed when thebrake fluid level is low. See BrakeFluid on page 10‑28.

BRAKES OVERHEATED

This message is displayed when thebrakes are becoming overheated.You may see this when driving onhills. Shift to a lower gear.



STEP ON BRAKE TORELEASE PARK BRAKE

This message is displayed if youattempt to release the ElectricParking Brake without the brakepedal applied. See Parking Brakeon page 9‑31 for more information.

RELEASE PARKING BRAKE

This message is displayed if theElectric Parking Brake is on whilethe vehicle is in motion. Release itbefore you attempt to drive. SeeParking Brake on page 9‑31 formore information.

SERVICE BRAKE ASSIST

This message may be displayedwhen there is a problem with thebrake boost assist system. Whenthis message is displayed, the brakeboost assist motor might be heardoperating and you might noticepulsation in the brake pedal. This isnormal under these conditions. Takethe vehicle to your dealer forservice.

SERVICE PARKING BRAKE

This message is displayed whenthere is a problem with the parkingbrake. Take the vehicle to yourdealer for service.

Compass Messages

CAL

This message is displayed when thecompass needs to be calibrated.See Compass on page 5‑6.

– – –

Three dashes will be displayed if thecompass needs service. See yourdealer for service.

Cruise Control Messages

APPLY BRAKE BEFORECRUISE

If this message displays whenattempting to activate cruise control,apply the brake pedal and try again.

CRUISE SET TO XXX

This message displays when thecruise control is set and shows thespeed it was set to. See CruiseControl on page 9‑39 for moreinformation.

Door Ajar Messages

DOOR OPEN

A door open symbol will bedisplayed on the DIC showingwhich door is open. If the vehiclehas been shifted out of P (Park),a DOOR OPEN message will alsobe displayed. Close the doorcompletely.



HOOD OPEN

This message will display along witha hood open symbol when the hoodis open. Close the hood completely.

POWER LIFTGATEUNAVAILABLE

This message will display if thepower liftgate encounters multipleobstacles on the same power cycle.After removing the obstructions, theliftgate will resume normal poweroperation.

REAR ACCESS OPEN

This message will display along witha symbol when the liftgate is open.Close the liftgate completely.

Engine Cooling SystemMessages

A/C OFF DUE TO HIGHENGINE TEMP

This message displays whenthe engine coolant becomeshotter than the normal operatingtemperature. To avoid addedstrain on a hot engine, theair conditioning compressorautomatically turns off. Whenthe coolant temperature returnsto normal, the air conditioningcompressor turns back on. Youcan continue to drive the vehicle.

If this message continues to appear,have the system repaired by yourdealer as soon as possible to avoiddamage to the engine.

COOLANT LEVEL LOW ADDCOOLANT

This message will display if thecoolant is low. See Engine Coolanton page 10‑20.

ENGINEOVERHEATED — IDLEENGINE

This message displays when theengine coolant temperature is toohot. Stop and allow the vehicle toidle until it cools down.

ENGINEOVERHEATED — STOPENGINE

This message displays and acontinuous chime sounds if theengine cooling system reachesunsafe temperatures for operation.Stop and turn off the vehicle assoon as it is safe to do so to avoidsevere damage. This messageclears when the engine has cooledto a safe operating temperature.



HIGH COOLANTTEMPERATURE

This message displays if the coolanttemperature is hot. See EngineOverheating on page 10‑24.

Engine Oil Messages

CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON

This message displays when theengine oil needs to be changed.When you change the engine oil, besure to reset the Oil Life System.See Engine Oil Life System onpage 10‑14 and Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5‑29 forinformation on how to reset thesystem. See Engine Oil onpage 10‑10 and ScheduledMaintenance on page 11‑3 formore information.

ENGINE OIL HOT, IDLEENGINE

This message displays when theengine oil temperature is too hot.Stop and allow the vehicle to idleuntil it cools down.

ENGINE OIL LOW — ADD OIL

This message displays when theengine oil level is too low. Check theoil level. See Engine Oil onpage 10‑10.

OIL PRESSURE LOW — STOPENGINE

This message displays if low oilpressure levels occur. Stop thevehicle as soon as safely possibleand do not operate it until the causeof the low oil pressure has beencorrected. Check the oil as soon aspossible and have the vehicleserviced by your dealer.

Engine Power Messages

ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED

This message displays when thevehicle's engine power is reduced.Reduced engine power can affectthe vehicle's ability to accelerate.If this message is on, but thereis no reduction in performance,proceed to your destination. Theperformance may be reduced thenext time the vehicle is driven. Thevehicle may be driven at a reducedspeed while this message is on, butmaximum acceleration and speedmay be reduced. Anytime thismessage stays on, the vehicleshould be taken to your dealer forservice as soon as possible.



Fuel System Messages

FUEL LEVEL LOW

This message displays when thevehicle is low on fuel. Refuel assoon as possible.

TIGHTEN GAS CAP

This message displays when thefuel cap is not on tight. Tighten thefuel cap.

Key and Lock Messages

NO REMOTE DETECTED

This message displays when tryingto start the vehicle if an RKEtransmitter is not detected. Thetransmitter battery may be weak.See “Starting the Vehicle with a LowTransmitter Battery” under RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 2‑3.

NO REMOTE PRESS BRAKETO RESTART

This message is displayed if theremote is no longer detected in thevehicle. Press the brake pedal torestart the vehicle.

NUMBER OF KEYSPROGRAMMED

This message displays whenprogramming new keys to thevehicle.

REMOTE LEFT IN VEHICLE

This message displays whenleaving the vehicle with the RKEtransmitter still inside.

REPLACE BATTERY INREMOTE KEY

This message displays when thebattery in the RKE transmitter needsto be replaced.

Lamp Messages

AFL (ADAPTIVE FORWARDLIGHTING) LAMPS NEEDSERVICE

This message displays when theAdaptive Forward Lighting (AFL)system is disabled and needsservice. See your dealer. SeeAdaptive Forward Lighting (AFL) onpage 6‑4 for more information.

AUTOMATIC LIGHTCONTROL ON

This message is displayed when theexterior lamp control is in AUTO andthe lights have turned on. SeeAutomatic Headlamp System onpage 6‑3.

AUTOMATIC LIGHTCONTROL OFF

This message is displayed whenthe exterior lamp control is in AUTOand the lights have turned off. SeeAutomatic Headlamp System onpage 6‑3.



XXX TURN INDICATORFAILURE

When one of the turn signals isout, this message displays toshow which bulb needs to bereplaced. See Bulb Replacement onpage 10‑38 and Replacement Bulbson page 10‑43 for more informationon turn signal bulb replacement.

TURN SIGNAL ON

This message is displayed if theturn signal has been left on. Turn offthe turn signal.

Object Detection SystemMessages

PARK ASSIST OFF

This message is displayed when thepark assist system has been turnedoff. See Ultrasonic Parking Assiston page 9‑41.

SERVICE PARK ASSIST

This message is displayed if thereis a problem with the park assistsystem. Take the vehicle to yourdealer for service.

Ride Control SystemMessages

COMFORT MODE ON

This message displays whenComfort Mode has been activated.See Selective Ride Control onpage 9‑37 for more information.

SERVICE REAR AXLE

This message displays when thereis a problem with the All-WheelDrive (AWD) System. See yourdealer for service.

SERVICE ESP

This message displays if there is aproblem with the Electronic StabilityProgram (ESP). See ElectronicStability Program (ESP) onpage 9‑36.

SERVICE SUSPENSIONSYSTEM

This message displays if there is aproblem with the selective ridecontrol. See Selective Ride Controlon page 9‑37.

SERVICE TRACTIONCONTROL

This message displays when thereis a problem with the TractionControl System (TCS). See TractionControl System (TCS) onpage 9‑34.

SPORT MODE ON

This message displays when SportMode has been activated. SeeSelective Ride Control on page 9‑37and Manual Mode on page 9‑28 formore information.



Airbag System Messages

SERVICE AIRBAG

This message displays if there is aproblem with the airbag system.Take the vehicle to your dealer forservice.

Safety Belt Messages

BUCKLE SEATBELT

This message displays as areminder when the safety beltis not buckled.

Anti-theft Alarm SystemMessages

THEFT ATTEMPTED

This message displays if the vehicledetects a tamper condition.

Service Vehicle Messages

SERVICE AC SYSTEM

This message is displayed if there isa problem with the air conditioningsystem. Take the vehicle to yourdealer for service.

SERVICE POWER STEERING

This message is displayed if there isa problem with the power steeringsystem. Take the vehicle to yourdealer for service.

SERVICE VEHICLE SOON

This message is displayed if there isa problem with the vehicle. Take thevehicle to your dealer for service.

Starting the VehicleMessages

PRESS BRAKE TO STARTVEHICLE

This message is displayed whenattempting to start the vehiclewithout first pressing the brakepedal.

SERVICE KEYLESS STARTSYSTEM

This message is displayed if there isa problem with the pushbutton startsystem. Take the vehicle to yourdealer for service.



Tire Messages

SERVICE TIRE MONITORSYSTEM

This message displays if there isa problem with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS). See TirePressure Monitor Operation onpage 10‑63 for more information.

TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE

This message displays when thesystem is learning new tires. SeeTire Pressure Monitor Operation onpage 10‑63 for more information.

TIRE LOW ADD AIR TO TIRE

This message displays when thepressure in one or more of the tiresis low.

This message also displays LEFTFRONT, RIGHT FRONT, LEFTREAR, or RIGHT REAR to indicatethe location of the low tire.

The low tire pressure warning lightwill also come on. See TirePressure Light on page 5‑25.

If a tire pressure message appearson the DIC, stop as soon as youcan. Inflate the tires by adding airuntil the tire pressure is equal tothe values shown on the Tire andLoading Information label. See Tireson page 10‑52, Vehicle Load Limitson page 9‑12, and Tire Pressure onpage 10‑59.

You can receive more than one tirepressure message at a time. TheDIC also shows the tire pressurevalues. See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5‑29.

Transmission Messages

SERVICE TRANSMISSION

This message displays if there is aproblem with the transmission. Seeyour dealer.

SHIFT DENIED

This message displays when usingthe Driver Shift Control (DSC) andattempting to shift to a gear notappropriate for the vehicle speed

and engine revolutions perminute (rpm). See Manual Mode onpage 9‑28 for more information.

SHIFT TO PARK

This message displays when thetransmission needs to be shifted toP (Park). This may appear whenattempting to remove the key fromthe vehicle if the vehicle is not inP (Park).

TRANSMISSION HOT — IDLEENGINE

This message displays and a chimesounds if the transmission fluid inthe vehicle gets hot. Driving with thetransmission fluid temperature highcan cause damage to the vehicle.Stop the vehicle and let it idle toallow the transmission to cool. Thismessage clears when the fluidtemperature reaches a safe level.



Vehicle ReminderMessages

ICE POSSIBLE DRIVEWITH CARE

This message is displayedwhen ice conditions are possible.

TURN WIPER CONTROL TOINTERMITTENT FIRST

This message is displayed whenattempting to adjust the intermittentwiper speed without intermittentselected on the wiper control.See Windshield Wiper/Washer onpage 5‑3.

Washer Fluid Messages

WASHER FLUID LOW ADDFLUID

This message displays when thewasher fluid level is low. Forinformation on filling the washerfluid, see Washer Fluid onpage 10‑26.

VehiclePersonalizationThe audio system controls are usedto access the personalizationmenus for customizing vehiclefeatures. Not all features areavailable on every vehicle. Only thefeatures available on a particularvehicle will be displayed on thatvehicle.

CONFIG (Configuration): Pressto access the ConfigurationSettings Menu.

MENU/SELECT Knob: Press thecenter of this knob to enter themenus and select menu items.Turn the knob to scroll through themenus.

} BACK: Press to exit or movebackward in a menu.

Entering the PersonalizationMenus

1. Press CONFIG to access theConfiguration Settings menu.

2. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob tohighlight Vehicle Settings.

3. Press the center of the MENU/SELECT knob to select theVehicle Settings menu.

The following list of menu items willbe available:. Climate and Air Quality. Comfort and Convenience. Language. Lighting. Power Door Locks. Remote Locking, Unlocking,

Starting. Return to Factory Settings

Turn the MENU/SELECT knob tohighlight the menu. Press the knobto select it. Each of the menus isdetailed in the following information.



Climate and Air Quality

Select the Climate and Air Qualitymenu and the following will bedisplayed:. Auto Fan Speed. Air Quality Sensor. Remote Start Auto Seat Cool. Remote Start Auto Heated Seats. Auto Defog. Auto Rear Defog

Auto Fan Speed

This will allow you to select theautomatic fan speed. This featuresets the climate control fan speed tomaintain the interior temperature.

Press the MENU/SELECT knobwhen Auto Fan Speed is highlightedto open the menu. Turn the knob tohighlight High, Medium, or Low.Press the knob to confirm theselection and move back to thelast menu.

Air Quality Sensor

This will allow you to select whetherthe system will operate at high orlow sensitivity. Only vehicles withthe dual zone climate control willhave this option.

Press the MENU/SELECT knobwhen Air Quality Sensor ishighlighted to open the menu.Turn the knob to highlight High orLow Sensitivity. Press the knob toconfirm the selection and moveback to the last menu.

Remote Start Auto Seat Cool

When on, this feature will turn thevented seats on when using remotestart on warm days.

Press the MENU/SELECT knobwhen Remote Start Auto Seat Coolis highlighted. Turn the knob toselect On or Off. Press the knob toconfirm and go back to thelast menu.

Remote Start Auto Heated Seats

When on, this feature will turn theheated seats on when using remotestart on cold days.

Press the MENU/SELECT knobwhen Remote Start Auto HeatedSeats is highlighted. Turn the knobto select On or Off. Press the knobto confirm and go back to thelast menu.

Auto Defog

This will allow you to turn the autodefog on or off.

Press the MENU/SELECT knobwhen Auto Defog is highlighted toopen the menu. Turn the knob tohighlight On or Off. Press the knobto confirm the selection and moveback to the last menu.



Auto Rear Defog

This will allow you to turn the autorear defog on or off.

Press the MENU/SELECTknob when Auto Rear Defog ishighlighted to open the menu.Turn the knob to highlight On orOff. Press the knob to confirm theselection and move back to thelast menu.

Comfort and Convenience

Select the Comfort andConvenience menu and thefollowing will be displayed:. Easy Exit Driver Seat. Chime Volume. Reverse Tilt Mirror. Auto Wipe in Reverse Gear


This allows you to turn the easy exitdriver seat feature on or off. Whenon, this feature will move the driverseat rearward upon turning theignition off and opening the driverdoor. This may be performed tomake it easier to exit the vehicle.See Power Seat Adjustment onpage 3‑4 for more information.

Press the MENU/SELECT knobwhen Easy Exit Driver Seat ishighlighted. Turn the knob to selectOn or Off. Press the knob to confirmand go back to the last menu.

Chime Volume

This allows the selection of thechime volume level.

Press the MENU/SELECT knobwhen Chime Volume is highlighted.Turn the knob to select Normal orHigh. Press the knob to confirm andgo back to the last menu.

Reverse Tilt Mirror

This allows you to turn the reversetilt mirror feature on or off. Whenon, both the driver and passengermirrors will tilt downward whenvehicle is shifted to R (Reverse) toimprove visibility of the ground nearthe rear wheels. They will returnto their previous driving positionwhen the vehicle is shifted out ofR (Reverse), the ignition is turnedto OFF, or the vehicle is left inR (Reverse).

Press the MENU/SELECT knobwhen Reverse Tilt Mirror ishighlighted. Turn the knob to selectDriver & Passenger or Off. Pressthe knob to confirm and go back tothe last menu.

Auto Wipe in Reverse Gear

When on, and the front windshieldwipers are on, the rear windowwiper will turn on automaticallywhen the vehicle is shifted intoR (Reverse).



Press the MENU/SELECT knobwhen Auto Wipe in Reverse Gear ishighlighted. Turn the knob to selectOn or Off. Press the knob to confirmand go back to the last menu.

Language

Select the Language menu and thefollowing will be displayed:. English. French. Spanish

Turn the MENU/SELECT knob toselect the language. Press the knobto confirm and go back to thelast menu.

Lighting

Select the Lighting menu and thefollowing will be displayed:. Vehicle Locator Lights. Exit Lighting

Vehicle Locator Lights

This allows the vehicle locator lightsto be turned on or off.

Press the MENU/SELECT knobwhen Vehicle Locator Lights ishighlighted. Turn the knob to selectOn or Off. Press the knob to confirmand go back to the last menu.

Exit Lighting

This allows the selection of howlong the exterior lamps stay onwhen leaving the vehicle when it isdark outside.

Press the MENU/SELECT knobwhen Exit Lighting is highlighted.Turn the knob to select Off,30 Seconds, 1 Minute, or 2 Minutes.Press the knob to confirm and goback to the last menu.

Power Door Locks

Select Power Door Locks and thefollowing will be displayed:. Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out. Auto Door Unlock. Delayed Door Lock

Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out

When on, this feature will keep thedriver door from locking when thedoor is open. If Off is selected, theDelayed Door Lock menu will beavailable and the door will lock asprogrammed through this menu.

Press the MENU/SELECT knobwhen Unlocked Door Anti Lock Outis highlighted. Turn the knob toselect On or Off. Press the knob toconfirm and go back to thelast menu.



Auto Door Unlock

This allows selection of which of thedoors will automatically unlock whenthe vehicle is shifted into P (Park).

Press the MENU/SELECT knobwhen Auto Door Unlock ishighlighted. Turn the knob toselect All Doors, Driver Door,or Off. Press the knob to confirmand go back to the last menu.

Delayed Door Lock

When on, this feature will delaythe locking of the doors untilfive seconds after the last door isclosed. You will hear three chimesto signal delayed locking is in use.Pressing either the power lockbutton or the lock button on the RKEtransmitter twice will override thedelayed locking feature andimmediately lock all of the doors.

Press the MENU/SELECT knobwhen Delayed Door Lock ishighlighted. Turn the knob toselect On or Off. Press the knobto confirm and go back to thelast menu.

Remote Lock/Unlock/Start

Select Remote Lock/Unlock/Startand the following will be displayed:. Unlock Feedback (Lights). Locking Feedback. Door Unlock Options. Passive Door Lock. Passive Door Unlock. Memory Remote Recall. Remote Left in Vehicle Reminder

Unlock Feedback (Lights)

When on, the exterior lamps willflash when unlocking the vehiclewith the RKE transmitter.

Press the MENU/SELECT knobwhen Unlock Feedback (Lights) ishighlighted. Turn the knob to selectFlash Lights or Off. Press the knobto confirm and go back to thelast menu.

Locking Feedback

This allows selection of what type offeedback is given when locking thevehicle with the RKE transmitter.

Press the MENU/SELECTknob when Locking Feedbackis highlighted. Turn the knob toselect Lights and Horn, LightsOnly, Horn Only, or Off. Press theknob to confirm and go back to thelast menu.



Door Unlock Options

This allows selection of which doorswill unlock when pressing the unlockbutton on the RKE transmitter.

Press the MENU/SELECT knobwhen Door Unlock Options ishighlighted. Turn the knob to selectAll Doors or Driver Door Only. Whenset to Driver Door Only, the driverdoor will unlock the first time theunlock button is pressed and alldoors will unlock when the buttonis pressed a second time. Whenset to All Doors, all of the doorswill unlock at the first press of theunlock button. Press the knob toconfirm and go back to thelast menu.

Passive Door Lock

If the vehicle has the keylessaccess system, when enabled,this feature allows the doors tolock after several seconds if alldoors are closed and at least oneRKE transmitter has been removedfrom the interior of the vehicle.It does not matter how far away thatthe transmitter is from the vehicle.This feature can also be configuredto chirp the horn when the doors arepassively locked.

Press the MENU/SELECT knobwhen Passive Door Lock ishighlighted. Turn the knob toselect On With Chirp, On, or Off.Press the knob to confirm and goback to the last menu.

Passive Door Unlock

If the vehicle has the keylessaccess system, this feature allowsyou to select which doors willautomatically unlock when youopen the driver door with the RKEtransmitter present.

Press the MENU/SELECT knobwhen Passive Door Unlock ishighlighted. Turn the knob to selectAll Doors or Driver Door. Press theknob to confirm and go back to thelast menu.

Memory Remote Recall

This allows the Memory RemoteRecall feature to be turned on or off.

Press the MENU/SELECT knobwhen Memory Remote Recall ishighlighted. Turn the knob to selectOn or Off. Press the knob to confirmand go back to the last menu.



Remote Left in Vehicle Reminder

This allows the Remote Left InVehicle reminder feature to beturned on or off. If on, the hornwill chirp if a remote is left in thevehicle.

Press the MENU/SELECT knobwhen Remote Left In Vehicle ishighlighted. Turn the knob to selectOn or Off. Press the knob to confirmand go back to the last menu.

Return to Factory Settings

Select Return to Factory Settingsto return all of the vehiclepersonalization to the defaultsettings. Turn the knob to selectYes or No. Press the knob toconfirm and go back to thelast menu.

Universal RemoteSystemSee Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑12 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-210/220/310.

Universal Remote SystemProgramming

If the vehicle has this feature,you will see these buttons withone LED indicator next to them inthe overhead console.

This system provides a way toreplace up to three remote controltransmitters used to activatedevices such as garage dooropeners, security systems, andhome automation devices.

Do not use the Universal Remotesystem with any garage door openerthat does not have the stop andreverse feature. This includesany garage door opener modelmanufactured before April 1,1982.

Read the instructions completelybefore attempting to program theUniversal Remote system. Becauseof the steps involved, it may behelpful to have another personavailable to assist with programmingthe Universal Remote system.



Keep the original hand-heldtransmitter for use in other vehiclesas well as for future UniversalRemote system programming. It isalso recommended that upon thesale of the vehicle, the programmedUniversal Remote system buttonsbe erased for security purposes.See “Erasing Universal RemoteSystem Buttons” later in thissection.

When programming a garage door,park outside of the garage. Parkdirectly in line with and facing thegarage door opener motor-head orgate motor-head. Be sure thatpeople and objects are clear ofthe garage door or gate beingprogrammed.

It is recommended that a newbattery be installed in the hand-heldtransmitter for quicker and moreaccurate transmission of theradio-frequency signal.

Programming the UniversalRemote System

For questions or help programmingthe Universal Remote system,call 1‐800‐355‐3515 or go towww.homelink.com.

Programming a garage door openerinvolves time-sensitive actions, soread the entire procedure beforestarting. Otherwise, the device willtime out and the procedure will haveto be repeated.

To program up to three devices:

1. Hold the end of the hand-heldtransmitter about 3 to 8 cm(1 to 3 in) away from theUniversal Remote systembuttons while keeping theindicator light in view. Thehand-held transmitter wassupplied by the manufacturer ofthe garage door opener receiver(motor-head unit).

2. At the same time, press andhold both the hand-heldtransmitter button and oneof the three Universal Remotesystem buttons to be used tooperate the garage door. Do notrelease the Universal Remotesystem button or the hand-heldtransmitter button until theindicator light changes from aslowly to a rapidly flashing light.You now may release bothbuttons.

Some entry gates and garagedoor openers may requiresubstitution of Step 2 with theprocedure noted in “GateOperator and CanadianProgramming” later in thissection.



3. Press and hold for five secondsthe newly trained UniversalRemote system button (thebutton selected in Step 2) whileobserving the indicator light andgarage door activation.. If the indicator light stays on

continuously or the garagedoor starts to move whenthe Universal Remotesystem button is pressedand released, then theprogramming is complete.There is no need tocontinue programmingSteps 4 through 6.

. If the Universal Remotesystem indicator light blinksrapidly for two seconds,then turns to a constantlight and the garage doordoes not move, continuewith programming Steps 4through 6.

It may be helpful to haveanother person assist withthe remaining Steps 4through 6.

“Learn” or “Smart” Buttons

4. After Steps 1 through 3 havebeen completed, locate the“Learn” or “Smart” button insidethe garage on the garage dooropener receiver (motor-headunit). The name and color ofthe button may vary bymanufacturer.

5. Firmly press and release the“Learn” or “Smart” button. Afteryou press this button, you willhave 30 seconds to completeStep 6.

6. Immediately return to thevehicle. Firmly press and holdfor two seconds the UniversalRemote system button, selectedin Step 2 to control the garagedoor, and then release it. If thegarage door does not move orthe lamp on the garage dooropener receiver (motor-headunit) does not flash, press andhold the same button a secondtime for two seconds, and thenrelease it. Again, if the doordoes not move or the garagedoor lamp does not flash, pressand hold the same button a thirdtime for two seconds, and thenrelease.

The Universal Remote systemshould now activate thegarage door.

To program the remaining twoUniversal Remote system buttons,begin with Step 1 of “Programmingthe Universal Remote System.”



Gate Operator and CanadianProgramming

If you have questions or need helpprogramming the Universal Remotesystem, call 1‐800‐355‐3515 or goto www.homelink.com.

Canadian radio-frequency lawsrequire transmitter signals to timeout or quit after several seconds oftransmission. This may not be longenough for the Universal Remotesystem to pick up the signal duringprogramming. Similarly, some U.S.gate operators are manufactured totime out in the same manner.

If you live in Canada, or you arehaving difficulty programming a gateoperator or garage door opener byusing the “Programming theUniversal Remote System”procedures, regardless of whereyou live, replace Step 2 under“Programming the Universal RemoteSystem” with the following:

Continue to press and hold theUniversal Remote system buttonwhile you press and release everytwo seconds (cycle) the hand-heldtransmitter button until thefrequency signal has beensuccessfully accepted by theUniversal Remote system. TheUniversal Remote system indicatorlight will flash slowly at first and thenrapidly. Proceed with Step 3 under“Programming the Universal RemoteSystem” to complete.

Universal Remote SystemOperation

Using the Universal RemoteSystem

Press and hold the appropriateUniversal Remote system buttonfor at least half of a second. Theindicator light will come on whilethe signal is being transmitted.

Erasing Universal RemoteSystem Buttons

All programmed buttons should beerased when the vehicle is sold orthe lease ends.

To erase all programmed buttonson the Universal Remote systemdevice:

1. Press and hold down thetwo outside buttons until theindicator light begins to flash.This should take about10 seconds.

2. Release both buttons.



Reprogramming a SingleUniversal Remote SystemButton

To reprogram any of the threeUniversal Remote system buttons:

1. Press and hold the desiredUniversal Remote systembutton. Do not release thebutton.

2. The indicator light will begin toflash after 20 seconds. Withoutreleasing the button, proceedwith Step 1 of the section“Programming the UniversalRemote System.”

If you have questions or need helpprogramming the Universal Remotesystem, call 1‐800‐355‐3515 or goto www.homelink.com. You mayalso call the customer assistancephone number under CustomerAssistance Offices on page 13‑3.


Lighting 6-1

Lighting

Exterior LightingExterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . 6-1Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Automatic HeadlampSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Adaptive ForwardLighting (AFL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 6-5Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Front Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Interior LightingInstrument Panel IlluminationControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Cargo Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7Courtesy Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

Lighting FeaturesEntry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7Battery Load Management . . . . 6-8

Exterior Lighting

Exterior Lamp Controls

The exterior lamp control is locatedon the instrument panel to the left ofthe steering column.

It controls the following systems:. Headlamps. Taillamps. Parking Lamps. License Plate Lamps. Instrument Panel Lights. Fog Lamps


6-2 Lighting

The exterior lamps control has fourpositions:

O (Off): Briefly turn to this positionto turn the automatic light control offor on again.

AUTO (Automatic): Turns theheadlamps on automatically atnormal brightness, together with thefollowing:. Parking Lamps. Taillamps. License Plate Lamps. Instrument Panel Lights

; (Parking Lamps): Turns theparking lamps on together with thefollowing:. Taillamps. License Plate Lamps. Instrument Panel Lights

2 (Headlamps): Turns theheadlamps on together with thelamps listed below. A warning chimesounds if the driver door is openedwhen the ignition switch is off andthe headlamps are on.. Parking Lamps. Taillamps. License Plate Lamps. Instrument Panel Lights

# (Front Fog Lamps): Forvehicles with fog lamps, press toturn the lamps on or off.

See Front Fog Lamps on page 6‑5.

Headlamp High/Low-Beam ChangerPush the turn signal/lane changelever away from you to turn the highbeams on.

Pull the lever toward you to return tolow beams.

This indicator light turns on in theinstrument panel cluster when thehigh‐beam headlamps are on.

Flash-to-PassThe flash‐to‐pass feature works withthe low beams or Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) on or off.

To flash the high beams, pull theturn signal/lane change lever all theway toward you, then release it.


Lighting 6-3

Daytime RunningLamps (DRL)Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) canmake it easier for others to see thefront of your vehicle during the day.

A light sensor on top of theinstrument panel makes the DRLwork, so be sure it is not covered.

The DRL system makes thelow‐beam headlamps come onat a reduced brightness or forvehicles with High IntensityDischarge (HID) headlamps, theDRL lights will come on when thefollowing conditions are met:. The ignition is in the ON/

RUN mode.. The exterior lamp control is

in AUTO.. The engine is running.

When the DRL are on, only thelow‐beam headlamps, at a reducedlevel of brightness, will be on. Theheadlamps, taillamps, sidemarker,instrument panel, and other lampswill not be on.

The headlamps automaticallychange from DRL to the regularheadlamps depending on thedarkness of the surroundings. Theother lamps that come on with theheadlamps will also come on.

When it is bright enough outside,the headlamps go off and the DRLcome on.

To turn the DRL off or on again, turnthe exterior lamp control to the offposition and then release.

Automatic HeadlampSystem

This feature automatically turns thelamps on and off. A light sensor ontop of the instrument panel makesthe automatic headlamp systemwork, so be sure it is not covered.

With the automatic headlampsystem, the following will happen:. When it is dark enough outside,

and the exterior lamp control isin the AUTO position, theDaytime Running Lamps (DRL)go off, and the headlamps andparking lamps come on. Theother lamps that come on withthe headlamps also come on.


6-4 Lighting

. When it is bright enough outside,the headlamps go off, and theDRL come on, as long as theexterior lamp control is in theAUTO position. See ExteriorLamp Controls on page 6‑1.

If the vehicle is started in a darkgarage, the automatic headlampsystem comes on immediately.If it is light outside when thevehicle leaves the garage, thereis a slight delay before theautomatic headlamp systemchanges to the DRL. During thatdelay, the instrument panel clustermay not be as bright as usual. Makesure the instrument panel brightnesscontrol is in full bright position. SeeInstrument Panel IlluminationControl on page 6‑6 for moreinformation.

The vehicle can be idled with thelamps off, even when it is darkoutside. After starting the vehicle,turn the exterior lamps control tooff, then release it. The lamps willremain off until the control is turnedto off again.

The automatic headlamp systemalso provides exterior illuminationas you leave the vehicle. If theautomatic headlamp system hasturned on the lamps when theignition is turned off, the lampsremain on until one of the followingoccurs:. The exterior lamp control is

moved from O to the parkinglamp position.

. The delay time selected haselapsed.

See Vehicle Personalization onpage 5‑42 to select the delay time.You can also select no delay time.

If the ignition is turned off with theexterior lamps control in the parkinglamp or headlamp position, thedelay will not occur. The lamps willturn off as soon as the control isturned off.

The regular headlamp systemshould be turned on when needed.

Adaptive ForwardLighting (AFL)For vehicles with uplevelheadlamps, the Adaptive ForwardLighting System (AFL) adjusts theheadlamps to provide greater roadillumination in various drivingconditions.

To enable AFL, set the exteriorlamp control to the AUTO position.Moving the control out of the AUTOposition will deactivate the system.AFL will operate when the vehiclespeed is greater than 3 km/h(2 mph). AFL will not operate whenthe transmission is in R (Reverse).AFL is not immediately operableafter starting the vehicle; driving ashort distance is required tocalibrate the AFL. See ExteriorLamp Controls on page 6‑1.

Curve Lighting

The light beam pivots based on thesteering wheel position and vehiclespeed of at least 10 km/h (6 mph).


Lighting 6-5

The headlamps shine at an angle ofup to 15 degrees to the right or leftof the direction of travel.

Hazard Warning Flashers

| (Hazard Warning Flashers):Press this button on the instrumentpanel, to make the front and rearturn signal lamps flash on and off.This warns others that you arehaving trouble. Press again to turnthe flashers off.

Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals

An arrow on the instrument panelcluster will flash in the direction ofthe turn or lane change.

Move the lever all the way up ordown to signal a turn.

Raise or lower the lever until thearrow starts to flash to signal a lanechange. The turn signal flashesthree times.

The lever returns to its startingposition when it is released.

If after signaling a turn or lanechange the arrow flashes rapidly ordoes not come on, a signal bulbmay be burned out.

Have the bulbs replaced. If the bulbis not burned out, check the fuse.See Fuses and Circuit Breakers onpage 10‑44 for more information.

Front Fog Lamps

The front fog lamp button is locatedon the exterior lamp control, on theoutboard side of the steering wheel.

The ignition and the low‐beamheadlamps must be on to turn onthe fog lamps.


6-6 Lighting

# (Front Fog Lamps) : Press toturn the fog lamps on or off. Anindicator light on the instrumentpanel cluster comes on when thefog lamps are on.

The fog lamps come on togetherwith the parking lamps.

Some localities have laws thatrequire the headlamps to be onalong with the fog lamps.

Interior Lighting

Instrument PanelIllumination Control

This feature controls the brightnessof the instrument panel lights.

D (Instrument PanelBrightness): Turn the thumbwheelup or down to brighten or dim theinstrument panel lights.

Night Panel

The night panel feature reduces theinterior lighting during night timedriving.

Press the night panel button, on theinstrument panel to the right of thesteering wheel, to turn it on or off.When the feature is on, the vehicledisplays, instrument panel centerstack area, and cluster lighting isreduced. The speedometer is notaffected. All button backlighting isreduced, but can still be adjustedwith the instrument panelillumination control.


Lighting 6-7

Cargo LampThe cargo lamp is located over therear compartment and is controlledby the dome lamp. See DomeLamps on page 6‑7.

Courtesy LampsThe courtesy lamps come onautomatically when any door isopened and the dome lamp is inthe door position.

Dome LampsThe dome lamp is located in theoverhead console.

To change the dome lamp settings,press the following:

* (Dome Lamp Override): Turnsthe lamp off, even when a dooris open.

1 (Door): The lamp comes onautomatically when a door isopened.

+ (On): Turns the dome lamp on.

Reading LampsThere are reading lamps located onthe overhead console and over therear passenger doors. These lampscome on automatically when anydoor is opened.

To manually turn the reading lampson or off:

. Press# or$ next to eachoverhead console reading lamp.

. Press the lamp lens on the rearpassenger reading lamps.

Lighting Features

Entry LightingThe headlamps, taillamps, licenseplate lamps, back‐up lamps, domelamps, and most of the interior lightsturn on briefly, when K is pressedon the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter, or when the door handleis pulled. After about 30 secondsthe exterior lamps turn off, and thenthe dome and remaining interiorlights dim to off. The entry lightingcan be manually turned off, bychanging the ignition out of the offposition, or by pressing Q on theRKE transmitter.

This feature can be changed.See Vehicle Personalization onpage 5‑42.

Exit LightingThe headlamps, taillamps, parkinglamps, back‐up lamps, and licenseplate lamps come on at night, or inareas with limited lighting, when a


6-8 Lighting

door is opened after the ignition isturned off. The dome lamps alsocome on when a door is openedafter the ignition is changed to theoff position.

The exterior lights and dome lampremain on after the door is closedfor a set amount of time, thenautomatically turn off.

The exterior lights turn offimmediately by turning the exteriorlamps control to off.

This feature can be changed. SeeVehicle Personalization onpage 5‑42.

Battery LoadManagementThe vehicle has Electric PowerManagement (EPM) that estimatesthe battery's temperature and stateof charge. It then adjusts the voltagefor best performance and extendedlife of the battery.

When the battery's state of chargeis low, the voltage is raised slightlyto quickly bring the charge back up.When the state of charge is high,the voltage is lowered slightly toprevent overcharging. If the vehiclehas a voltmeter gauge or a voltagedisplay on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC), you may see thevoltage move up or down. This isnormal. If there is a problem, analert will be displayed.

The battery can be discharged atidle if the electrical loads are veryhigh. This is true for all vehicles.This is because the generator(alternator) may not be spinning fastenough at idle to produce all of thepower needed for very highelectrical loads.

A high electrical load occurs whenseveral of the following are on, suchas: headlamps, high beams, foglamps, rear window defogger,climate control fan at high speed,heated seats, engine cooling fans,trailer loads, and loads plugged intoaccessory power outlets.

EPM works to prevent excessivedischarge of the battery. It does thisby balancing the generator's outputand the vehicle's electrical needs.It can increase engine idle speed togenerate more power wheneverneeded. It can temporarily reducethe power demands of someaccessories.

Normally, these actions occur insteps or levels, without beingnoticeable. In rare cases at thehighest levels of corrective action,this action may be noticeable to thedriver. If so, a DIC message mightbe displayed, such as BATTERYSAVER ACTIVE, BATTERYVOLTAGE LOW, or LOW BATTERY.If one of these messages displays, itis recommended that the driverreduce the electrical loads as muchas possible. See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5‑29.


Infotainment System 7-1

InfotainmentSystem

IntroductionInfotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

Introduction

InfotainmentYour vehicle has an infotainmentsystem. For more information, seethe separate infotainment systemmanual.


7-2 Infotainment System

2 NOTES


Climate Controls 8-1

Climate Controls

Climate Control SystemsDual Automatic Climate ControlSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Rear Climate ControlSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

Air VentsAir Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

MaintenancePassenger Compartment AirFilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7

Climate Control Systems

Dual Automatic Climate Control SystemThe heating, cooling, and ventilation for the vehicle can be controlled withthis system.

A. Driver and PassengerTemperature Control

B. Driver and Passenger Heatedand Ventilated Seats

C. AUTO (Automatic Operation)

D. Air Delivery Mode Controls

E. Defrost

F. Air Conditioning

G. ZONE

H. Fan Control

I. Rear Window Defogger

J. Recirculation


8-2 Climate Controls

Automatic Operation

The system automatically controlsthe fan speed, air delivery, airconditioning, and recirculation inorder to heat or cool the vehicle tothe desired temperature.

When the indicator light is on, thesystem is in full automatic operation.If the air delivery mode or fansetting is manually adjusted, theauto indicator turns off and displayswill show the selected settings.

To place the system inautomatic mode:

1. Press AUTO.

2. Set the temperature. Allow thesystem time to stabilize. Thenadjust the temperature asneeded for best comfort.

English units can be changed tometric units through the DriverInformation Center (DIC). SeeVehicle Personalization onpage 5‑42.

Driver and PassengerTemperature Control: Thetemperature can be adjustedseparately for the driver and thepassenger. Turn the knob clockwiseor counterclockwise to increase ordecrease the temperature.

ZONE: Press to link all climatezone settings to the driver settings.The ZONE indicator light turns off.When the passenger settings areadjusted, the ZONE indicator lightis on.

Manual Operation

9 ...A (Fan Control): Press toincrease or decrease the fan speed.Pressing the button cancelsautomatic operation and the systemgoes into manual mode. PressAUTO to return to automaticoperation.

Air Delivery Mode Controls:Press to change the direction of theairflow. The current mode appearsin the display screen. Changing themode cancels the automatic

operation and the system goes intomanual mode. Press AUTO toreturn to automatic operation.

To change the current mode, pressone or a combination of the buttonsindicated:

Y (Vent): Air is directed to theinstrument panel outlets.

Y /[ (Bi-Level): Air is dividedbetween the instrument paneloutlets and the floor outlets.

8 /Y /[ (Tri‐Level): Air isdivided between the windshield,instrument panel, and floor outlets.

[ (Floor): Air is directed to thefloor outlets.

8 /[ (Defog): Clears the windowsof fog or moisture. Air is directed tothe windshield and floor outlets.

8 (Upper): Air is directed to thewindshield outlets.

Y /Y (Hi-Level): Air is dividedbetween the windshield andinstrument panel outlets.



0 (Defrost): Press to clear thewindshield of fog or frost morequickly. Air is directed to thewindshield.

# (Air Conditioning): Press toturn the automatic air conditioningon or off. If the fan is turned off orthe outside temperature falls belowfreezing, the air conditioner willnot run.

Press AUTO to return to automaticoperation and the air conditionerruns as needed. When the indicatorlight is on, the air conditioner runsautomatically to cool the air insidethe vehicle or to dry the air neededto defog the windshield faster.

h (Recirculation): Press to turnon recirculation. An indicator lightcomes on. Air is recirculated toquickly cool the inside of the vehicleor prevent outside air and odorsfrom entering.

Automatic Air Recirculation:When the AUTO indicator light ison, the air is automaticallyrecirculated as needed to helpquickly cool the inside of thevehicle.

The climate control system mayhave a sensor to detect air pollution.In auto recirculation control, the AirQuality Control system may operate.To adjust the sensitivity of the AirQuality Control, see “Climate andAir Quality” under VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑42.

Auto Defog: The climate controlsystem may have a sensor toautomatically detect high humidityinside the vehicle. When highhumidity is detected, the climatecontrol system may adjust tooutside air supply and turn on theair conditioner. If the climate controlsystem does not detect possiblewindow fogging, it returns to normaloperation. To turn Auto Defog off oron, see “Climate and Air Quality”under Vehicle Personalization onpage 5‑42.

Rear Window Defogger

= (Rear Window Defogger):Press to turn the rear windowdefogger on or off.

The rear window defogger turns offautomatically after about10 minutes. If turned on again itruns for about five minutes beforeturning off. At higher speeds, therear window defogger may stay oncontinuously.

The rear window defogger can beset to automatic operation; see“Climate and Air Quality” underVehicle Personalization onpage 5‑42. When auto rear defog isselected, the rear window defoggerturns on automatically when theinterior temperature is cold and theoutside temperature is about 4°C(40°F) and below. The auto reardefogger turns off automaticallyafter about 10 minutes. At higherspeeds, the rear window defoggermay stay on continuously.



The heated outside rearview mirrorsturn on when the rear windowdefogger button is on and help toclear fog or frost from the surface ofthe mirrors. See Heated Mirrors onpage 2‑20.

Notice: Do not try to clear frostor other material from the insideof the front windshield and rearwindow with a razor blade oranything else that is sharp. Thismay damage the rear windowdefogger grid and affect yourradio's ability to pick up stationsclearly. The repairs wouldn't becovered by your warranty.

Heated and Ventilated Seats:Press to heat or ventilate the seat.See Heated and Ventilated FrontSeats on page 3‑10.

Remote Start Climate ControlOperation: For vehicles with theremote vehicle start feature, theclimate control system may runwhen the vehicle is started remotely.The system uses the driver'sprevious settings to heat or cool theinside of the vehicle. See RemoteVehicle Start on page 2‑9.

The rear window defogger turns onif it is cold outside.

Sensor

The solar sensor located on top ofthe instrument panel near thewindshield, monitors the solar heat.

The climate control system uses thesensor information to adjust thetemperature, fan speed,recirculation, and air delivery modefor best comfort.

If the sensor is covered, theautomatic climate control systemmay not work properly.



Rear Climate Control SystemFor vehicles with the rear heat and air conditioning controls, they areintegrated with the rear seat audio controls located in the center console.

Rear Climate Control with Rear Seat Audio Controls

A. Fan Control

B. Air Delivery Mode Control

C. Temperature Control

ZONE: When the rear climatecontrol is turned on from the rear,the ZONE indicator light will turn on.

Press the ZONE button on the frontclimate control system to turn off therear blower and match the rearsettings to the front. The ZONEindicator light and rear climatecontrol display will turn off.

The rear climate control can beturned off by pressing ] −.

Independent Mode: This modedirects rear seating airflowaccording to the settings ofthe rear controls.

The front climate control systemmust be on for the rear climatecontrol to work. To turn on the rearclimate control from rear seating,press any rear climate controlbutton.

The rear climate control will notwork if the front climate controlsystem is in defrost.

Automatic Operation

AUTO: PressN until the AUTOsetting is selected to control the reartemperature, air delivery, and fanspeed automatically.



Manual Operation

] −/+^ (Fan Control): Pressthese buttons on the rear seataudio control panel to increase ordecrease the airflow. Pressing + ^when the system is off will turn thesystem on. The air delivery moderemains in its previous setting.

− /+ (Temperature Control): Pressthese buttons to adjust thetemperature of the air flowing intothe passenger area. Press + forwarmer air and press − forcooler air.

N (Air Delivery Mode Control):Press the mode button to changethe direction of the airflow. Multiplepresses will cycle through thedelivery selections.

Air VentsMove the sliding knob on the airoutlets up and down or left and rightto direct the airflow. Use thethumbwheels near the air outlets toopen or close off the airflow.

Operation Tips. Clear away any ice, snow,

or leaves from air inlets at thebase of the windshield that couldblock the flow of air into thevehicle.

. Keep the path under the frontseats clear of objects to helpcirculate the air inside thevehicle more effectively.

. Use of non‐Saab approved hooddeflectors can adversely affectthe performance of the system.Check with your dealer beforeadding equipment to the outsideof the vehicle.



Maintenance

Passenger CompartmentAir FilterThe filter removes dust, pollen, andother airborne irritants from outsideair that is pulled into the vehicle.

The filter should be replaced as partof routine scheduled maintenance.To find out what type of filter to use,see Maintenance ReplacementParts on page 11‑6.

1. Open the glove box completelyand remove the four screwsalong the upper portion of theglove box.

2. When released, lower the upperportion of the glove box.

3. Locate the service door for thepassenger compartment air filter.

4. Release the two latches holdingthe service door. Lower theservice door.

5. Remove the old air filter.

6. Install the new air filter.

7. Close the service door andlatches.

8. Reinstall the upper portion of theglove box.

See your dealer if additionalassistance is needed.



2 NOTES


Driving and Operating 9-1

Driving andOperating

Driving InformationDefensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . 9-7Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . 9-8Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9If the Vehicle Is Stuck . . . . . . . . 9-11Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . 9-12

Starting and OperatingNew Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . 9-17Adjustable Throttle and BrakePedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18

Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18Starting the GasolineEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20

Engine Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22

Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23Shifting out of Park . . . . . . . . . . 9-24Parking over ThingsThat Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24

Engine ExhaustEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25

Automatic TransmissionAutomatic Transmission . . . . . 9-26Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28Fuel Economy Mode . . . . . . . . . 9-29

Drive SystemsAll-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30

BrakesAntilock BrakeSystem (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30

Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . 9-34

Ride Control SystemsTraction ControlSystem (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34

Electronic StabilityProgram (ESP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36

Limited-Slip Rear Axle . . . . . . . 9-37Selective Ride Control . . . . . . . 9-37

Cruise ControlCruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39

Object Detection SystemsUltrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 9-41Rear VisionCamera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43

FuelFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . 9-48Gasoline Specifications (U.S.and Canada Only) . . . . . . . . . . 9-48

California FuelRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-48

Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 9-49Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-49Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-50Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-51


9-2 Driving and Operating

TowingGeneral TowingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52

Driving Characteristics andTowing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52

Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-56Towing Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . 9-59Trailer SwayControl (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-61

Conversions and Add-OnsAdd-On ElectricalEquipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-61

Driving Information

Defensive DrivingDefensive driving means “alwaysexpect the unexpected.” The firststep in driving defensively is to wearthe safety belt. See Safety Belts onpage 3‑14.

{ WARNING

Assume that other road users(pedestrians, bicyclists, and otherdrivers) are going to be carelessand make mistakes. Anticipatewhat they might do and be ready.In addition:

. Allow enough followingdistance between you andthe driver in front of you.

. Focus on the task of driving.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Driver distraction can causecollisions resulting in injury orpossible death. These simpledefensive driving techniquescould save your life.

Drunk Driving

{ WARNING

Drinking and then driving isvery dangerous. Your reflexes,perceptions, attentiveness, andjudgment can be affected by evena small amount of alcohol. Youcan have a serious — or evenfatal — collision if you drive afterdrinking.

Do not drink and drive or ride witha driver who has been drinking.Ride home in a cab; or if you arewith a group, designate a driverwho will not drink.



Death and injury associated withdrinking and driving is a globaltragedy.

Alcohol affects four things thatanyone needs to drive a vehicle:judgment, muscular coordination,vision, and attentiveness.

Police records show thatalmost 40 percent of all motorvehicle-related deaths involvealcohol. In most cases, thesedeaths are the result of someonewho was drinking and driving.In recent years, more than17,000 annual motor vehicle-relateddeaths have been associated withthe use of alcohol, with about250,000 people injured.

For persons under 21, it is againstthe law in every U.S. state to drinkalcohol. There are good medical,psychological, and developmentalreasons for these laws.

The obvious way to eliminate theleading highway safety problem isfor people never to drink alcoholand then drive.

Medical research shows thatalcohol in a person's system canmake crash injuries worse,especially injuries to the brain,spinal cord, or heart. This meansthat when anyone who has beendrinking — driver or passenger — isin a crash, that person's chance ofbeing killed or permanently disabledis higher than if the person had notbeen drinking.

Control of a VehicleThe following three systemshelp to control the vehicle whiledriving — brakes, steering, andaccelerator. At times, as whendriving on snow or ice, it is easy toask more of those control systemsthan the tires and road can provide.Meaning, you can lose control ofthe vehicle. See Traction ControlSystem (TCS) on page 9‑34 andElectronic Stability Program (ESP)on page 9‑36.

Adding non‐dealer accessories canaffect vehicle performance. SeeAccessories and Modifications onpage 10‑3.



BrakingSee Brake System Warning Light onpage 5‑22.

Braking action involves perceptiontime and reaction time. Deciding topush the brake pedal is perceptiontime. Actually doing it isreaction time.

Average reaction time is aboutthree‐fourths of a second. But thatis only an average. It might be lesswith one driver and as long as twoor three seconds or more withanother. Age, physical condition,alertness, coordination, andeyesight all play a part. So doalcohol, drugs, and frustration.But even in three‐fourths of asecond, a vehicle moving at100 km/h (60 mph) travels 20 m(66 ft). That could be a lot ofdistance in an emergency, sokeeping enough space betweenthe vehicle and others is important.

And, of course, actual stoppingdistances vary greatly with thesurface of the road, whether it ispavement or gravel; the conditionof the road, whether it is wet, dry,or icy; tire tread; the condition of thebrakes; the weight of the vehicle;and the amount of brake forceapplied.

Avoid needless heavybraking. Some people drive inspurts — heavy accelerationfollowed by heavy braking — ratherthan keeping pace with traffic. Thisis a mistake. The brakes might nothave time to cool between hardstops. The brakes will wear outmuch faster with a lot of heavybraking. Keeping pace with thetraffic and allowing realistic followingdistances eliminates a lot ofunnecessary braking. That meansbetter braking and longer brake life.

If the engine ever stops while thevehicle is being driven, brakenormally but do not pump thebrakes. If the brakes are pumped,the pedal could get harder to pushdown. If the engine stops, there willstill be some power brake assist butit will be used when the brake isapplied. Once the power assist isused up, it can take longer to stopand the brake pedal will be harderto push.

Adding non‐dealer accessories canaffect vehicle performance. SeeAccessories and Modifications onpage 10‑3.



Steering

Power Steering

If power steering assist is lostbecause the engine stops or thepower steering system is notfunctioning, the vehicle can besteered but it will take more effort.

Steering Tips

It is important to take curves at areasonable speed.

Traction in a curve depends on thecondition of the tires and the roadsurface, the angle at which thecurve is banked, and vehicle speed.While in a curve, speed is the onefactor that can be controlled.

If there is a need to reduce speed,do it before entering the curve,while the front wheels are straight.

Try to adjust the speed so you candrive through the curve. Maintain areasonable, steady speed. Wait toaccelerate until out of the curve, andthen accelerate gently into thestraightaway.

Steering in Emergencies

There are times when steering canbe more effective than braking. Forexample, you come over a hill andfind a truck stopped in your lane,or a car suddenly pulls out fromnowhere, or a child darts out frombetween parked cars and stops rightin front of you. These problems canbe avoided by braking— if you canstop in time. But sometimes youcannot stop in time because thereis no room. That is the time forevasive action— steering aroundthe problem.

The vehicle can perform very well inemergencies like these. First applythe brakes. See Braking onpage 9‑4. It is better to remove asmuch speed as possible from acollision. Then steer around theproblem, to the left or rightdepending on the space available.

An emergency like this requiresclose attention and a quick decision.If holding the steering wheel at therecommended 9 and 3 o'clockpositions, it can be turned a full180 degrees very quickly withoutremoving either hand. But you haveto act fast, steer quickly, and just asquickly straighten the wheel onceyou have avoided the object.

The fact that such emergencysituations are always possible is agood reason to practice defensivedriving at all times and wear safetybelts properly.



Off-Road RecoveryThe vehicle's right wheels can dropoff the edge of a road onto theshoulder while driving.

If the level of the shoulder is onlyslightly below the pavement,recovery should be fairly easy.Ease off the accelerator and then,if there is nothing in the way, steer

so that the vehicle straddles theedge of the pavement. Turn thesteering wheel 8 to 13 cm (3 to5 in), about one-eighth turn,until the right front tire contactsthe pavement edge. Then turn thesteering wheel to go straight downthe roadway.

Loss of ControlLet us review what driving expertssay about what happens when thethree control systems— brakes,steering, and acceleration— do nothave enough friction where the tiresmeet the road to do what the driverhas asked.

In any emergency, do not give up.Keep trying to steer and constantlyseek an escape route or area ofless danger.

Skidding

In a skid, a driver can lose control ofthe vehicle. Defensive drivers avoidmost skids by taking reasonablecare suited to existing conditions,and by not overdriving thoseconditions. But skids are alwayspossible.

The three types of skids correspondto the vehicle's three controlsystems. In the braking skid, thewheels are not rolling. In thesteering or cornering skid, too muchspeed or steering in a curve causestires to slip and lose cornering force.And in the acceleration skid, toomuch throttle causes the drivingwheels to spin.

If the vehicle starts to slide, easeyour foot off the accelerator pedaland quickly steer the way youwant the vehicle to go. If you startsteering quickly enough, the vehiclemay straighten out. Always be readyfor a second skid if it occurs.



Of course, traction is reduced whenwater, snow, ice, gravel, or othermaterial is on the road. For safety,slow down and adjust your driving tothese conditions. It is important toslow down on slippery surfacesbecause stopping distance is longerand vehicle control more limited.

While driving on a surface withreduced traction, try to avoidsudden steering, acceleration,or braking, including reducingvehicle speed by shifting to a lowergear. Any sudden changes couldcause the tires to slide. You mightnot realize the surface is slipperyuntil the vehicle is skidding. Learn torecognize warning clues— such asenough water, ice, or packed snowon the road to make a mirroredsurface— and slow down when youhave any doubt.

Remember: Antilock brakes helpavoid only the braking skid.

Driving on Wet RoadsRain and wet roads can reducevehicle traction and affect yourability to stop and accelerate.Always drive slower in these typesof driving conditions and avoiddriving through large puddles anddeep‐standing or flowing water.

{ WARNING

Wet brakes can cause crashes.They might not work as well in aquick stop and could causepulling to one side. You couldlose control of the vehicle.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

After driving through a largepuddle of water or a car/vehiclewash, lightly apply the brakepedal until the brakes worknormally.

Flowing or rushing water createsstrong forces. Driving throughflowing water could cause thevehicle to be carried away. If thishappens, you and other vehicleoccupants could drown. Do notignore police warnings and bevery cautious about trying to drivethrough flowing water.



Hydroplaning

Hydroplaning is dangerous. Watercan build up under the vehicle'stires so they actually ride on thewater. This can happen if the road iswet enough and you are going fastenough. When the vehicle ishydroplaning, it has little or nocontact with the road.

There is no hard and fast rule abouthydroplaning. The best advice is toslow down when the road is wet.

Other Rainy Weather Tips

Besides slowing down, other wetweather driving tips include:. Allow extra following distance.. Pass with caution.. Keep windshield wiping

equipment in good shape.

. Keep the windshield washer fluidreservoir filled.

. Have good tires with propertread depth. See Tires onpage 10‑52.

. Turn off cruise control.

Highway HypnosisAlways be alert and pay attention toyour surroundings while driving.If you become tired or sleepy, find asafe place to park the vehicleand rest.

Other driving tips include:. Keep the vehicle well ventilated.. Keep interior temperature cool.. Keep your eyes moving — scan

the road ahead and to the sides.. Check the rearview mirror and

vehicle instruments often.

Hill and Mountain RoadsDriving on steep hills or throughmountains is different than drivingon flat or rolling terrain. Tips fordriving in these conditions include:. Keep the vehicle serviced and in

good shape.. Check all fluid levels and brakes,

tires, cooling system, andtransmission.

. Shift to a lower gear when goingdown steep or long hills.

{ WARNING

If you do not shift down, thebrakes could get so hot that theywould not work well. You wouldthen have poor braking or evennone going down a hill. You couldcrash. Shift down to let the engineassist the brakes on a steepdownhill slope.



{ WARNING

Coasting downhill in N (Neutral)or with the ignition off isdangerous. The brakes will haveto do all the work of slowing downand they could get so hot thatthey would not work well. Youwould then have poor braking oreven none going down a hill. Youcould crash. Always have theengine running and the vehiclein gear when going downhill.

. Stay in your own lane. Do notswing wide or cut across thecenter of the road. Drive atspeeds that let you stay in yourown lane.

. Top of hills: Be alert —something could be in yourlane (stalled car, accident).

. Pay attention to special roadsigns (falling rocks area, windingroads, long grades, passing orno-passing zones) and takeappropriate action.

Winter Driving

Driving on Snow or Ice

Drive carefully when there is snowor ice between the tires and theroad, creating less traction or grip.Wet ice can occur at about 0°C(32°F) when freezing rain begins tofall, resulting in even less traction.Avoid driving on wet ice or infreezing rain until roads can betreated with salt or sand.

Drive with caution, whatever thecondition. Accelerate gently sotraction is not lost. Accelerating tooquickly causes the wheels to spinand makes the surface under thetires slick, so there is even lesstraction.

Try not to break the fragile traction.If you accelerate too fast, the drivewheels will spin and polish thesurface under the tires even more.

The Antilock Brake System (ABS)on page 9‑30 improves vehiclestability during hard stops onslippery roads, but apply the brakessooner than when on dry pavement.

Allow greater following distance onany slippery road and watch forslippery spots. Icy patches canoccur on otherwise clear roads inshaded areas. The surface of acurve or an overpass can remain icywhen the surrounding roads areclear. Avoid sudden steeringmaneuvers and braking whileon ice.

Turn off cruise control on slipperysurfaces.



Blizzard Conditions

Being stuck in snow can be aserious situation. Stay with thevehicle unless there is help nearby.If possible, use the RoadsideAssistance Program on page 13‑4.To get help and keep everyone inthe vehicle safe:. Turn on the hazard warning

flashers.. Tie a red cloth to an outside

mirror.

{ WARNING

Snow can trap engine exhaustunder the vehicle. This maycause exhaust gases to getinside. Engine exhaust containsCarbon Monoxide (CO) whichcannot be seen or smelled. It cancause unconsciousness and evendeath.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:. Clear away snow from aroundthe base of your vehicle,especially any that is blockingthe exhaust pipe.

. Check again from time totime to be sure snow doesnot collect there.

. Open a window about 5 cm(2 in) on the side of thevehicle that is away from thewind to bring in fresh air.

. Fully open the air outlets onor under the instrumentpanel.

. Adjust the climate controlsystem to a setting thatcirculates the air inside thevehicle and set the fan speedto the highest setting. SeeClimate Control System in theIndex.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

For more information aboutcarbon monoxide, see EngineExhaust on page 9‑24.

Snow can trap exhaust gasesunder your vehicle. This cancause deadly CO (CarbonMonoxide) gas to get inside. COcould overcome you and kill you.You cannot see it or smell it, soyou might not know it is in yourvehicle. Clear away snow fromaround the base of your vehicle,especially any that is blocking theexhaust.

Run the engine for short periodsonly as needed to keep warm, butbe careful.



To save fuel, run the engine for onlyshort periods as needed to warmthe vehicle and then shut the engineoff and close the window most ofthe way to save heat. Repeat thisuntil help arrives but only when youfeel really uncomfortable from thecold. Moving about to keep warmalso helps.

If it takes some time for help toarrive, now and then when you runthe engine, push the acceleratorpedal slightly so the engine runsfaster than the idle speed. Thiskeeps the battery charged to restartthe vehicle and to signal for helpwith the headlamps. Do this as littleas possible to save fuel.

If the Vehicle Is StuckSlowly and cautiously spin thewheels to free the vehicle whenstuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.

If stuck too severely for the tractionsystem to free the vehicle, turn thetraction system off and use therocking method.

{ WARNING

If the vehicle's tires spin at highspeed, they can explode, and youor others could be injured. Thevehicle can overheat, causing anengine compartment fire or otherdamage. Spin the wheels as littleas possible and avoid goingabove 55 km/h (35 mph).

For information about using tirechains on the vehicle, see TireChains on page 10‑75.

Rocking the Vehicle to Getit Out

Turn the steering wheel left andright to clear the area around thefront wheels. Turn off any tractionsystem. Shift back and forthbetween R (Reverse) and a forwardgear, spinning the wheels as little aspossible. To prevent transmissionwear, wait until the wheels stopspinning before shifting gears.Release the accelerator pedal whileshifting, and press lightly on theaccelerator pedal when thetransmission is in gear. Slowlyspinning the wheels in the forwardand reverse directions causes arocking motion that could free thevehicle. If that does not get thevehicle out after a few tries, it mightneed to be towed out. If the vehicledoes need to be towed out, seeTowing the Vehicle on page 10‑97.



Vehicle Load LimitsIt is very important to know howmuch weight the vehicle cancarry. This weight is called thevehicle capacity weight andincludes the weight of alloccupants, cargo and allnonfactory‐installed options.Two labels on the vehicle showhow much weight it mayproperly carry, the Tire andLoading Information label andthe Certification label.

{ WARNING

Do not load the vehicle anyheavier than the GrossVehicle Weight Rating(GVWR), or either themaximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR).This can cause systems tobreak and change the way thevehicle handles. This couldcause loss of control and acrash. Overloading can alsoshorten the life of the vehicle.

Tire and Loading InformationLabel

Label Example

A vehicle-specific Tire andLoading Information label isattached to the vehicle's centerpillar (B-pillar). With the driverdoor open, the label is attachednear the door lock post.



The Tire and LoadingInformation label shows thenumber of occupant seatingpositions (A), and the maximumvehicle capacity weight (B) inkilograms and pounds.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label also showsthe tire size of the originalequipment tires (C) and therecommended cold tire inflationpressures (D). For moreinformation on tires and inflationsee Tires on page 10‑52 andTire Pressure on page 10‑59.

There is also important loadinginformation on the Certificationlabel. It tells you the GrossVehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)and the Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR) for the front andrear axle. See “CertificationLabel” later in this section.

Steps for Determining CorrectLoad Limit

1. Locate the statement“The combined weight ofoccupants and cargo shouldnever exceed XXX kg orXXX lbs” on your vehicle'splacard.

2. Determine the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers that will beriding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers from XXX kgor XXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equalsthe available amount of cargoand luggage load capacity.For example, if the “XXX”amount equals 1400 lbs andthere will be five 150 lbpassengers in your vehicle,the amount of available cargoand luggage load capacityis 650 lbs (1400 − 750(5 x 150) = 650 lbs).

5. Determine the combinedweight of luggage and cargobeing loaded on the vehicle.That weight may not safelyexceed the available cargoand luggage load capacitycalculated in Step 4.



6. If your vehicle will be towinga trailer, the load from yourtrailer will be transferred toyour vehicle. Consult thismanual to determine how thisreduces the available cargoand luggage load capacity ofyour vehicle.

See Trailer Towing on page 9‑56for important information ontowing a trailer, towing safetyrules and trailering tips. Example 1

A. Vehicle Capacity Weight forExample 1 = 453 kg(1,000 lbs).

B. Subtract Occupant Weight@ 68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 =136 kg (300 lbs).

C. Available Occupant andCargo Weight = 317 kg(700 lbs).

Example 2


B. Subtract Occupant Weight@ 68 kg (150 lbs) × 5 =340 kg (750 lbs).

C. Available Cargo Weight =113 kg (250 lbs).



Example 3


B. Subtract Occupant Weight@ 91 kg (200 lbs) × 5 =453 kg (1,000 lbs).

C. Available Cargo Weight =0 kg (0 lbs).

Refer to the vehicle's Tire andLoading Information label forspecific information about thevehicle's capacity weight andseating positions. The combinedweight of the driver, passengers,and cargo should never exceedthe vehicle's capacity weight.

Certification Label

Label Example

A vehicle-specific Certification/Tire label is attached to thecenter b-pillar. The label shows

the size of the vehicle's originaltires and the inflation pressuresneeded to obtain the grossweight capacity of the vehicle.This is called Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR). TheGVWR includes the weight ofthe vehicle, all occupants, fuel,and cargo.

The Certification/Tire label alsotells you the maximum weightsfor the front and rear axles,called Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR). To find out the actualloads on the front and rearaxles, you need to go to a weighstation and weigh the vehicle.Your dealer can help you withthis. Be sure to spread out theload equally on both sides of thecenter line.

Never exceed the GVWR for thevehicle, or the GAWR for eitherthe front or rear axle.



If the vehicle is carrying a heavyload, it should be spread out.See “Steps for DeterminingCorrect Load Limit” earlier inthis section.

{ WARNING

Do not load the vehicle anyheavier than the GrossVehicle Weight Rating(GVWR), or either themaximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR).This can cause systems tobreak and change the way thevehicle handles. This couldcause loss of control and acrash. Overloading can alsoshorten the life of the vehicle.

Your warranty does not coverparts or components that failbecause of overloading.

The label will help you decidehow much cargo and installedequipment your vehicle cancarry.

Using heavier suspensioncomponents to get addeddurability might not changeyour weight ratings. Ask yourdealer to help you load yourvehicle the right way.

If you put things inside yourvehicle – like suitcases,tools, packages, or anythingelse – they will go as fast as thevehicle goes. If you have to stopor turn quickly, or if there is acrash, they will keep going.

{ WARNING

Things inside the vehicle canstrike and injure people in asudden stop or turn, or in acrash.

. Put things in the cargoarea of the vehicle. In thecargo area, put them asfar forward as possible.Try to spread the weightevenly.

(Continued)



WARNING (Continued)

. Never stack heavierthings, like suitcases,inside the vehicle so thatsome of them are abovethe tops of the seats.

. Do not leave anunsecured child restraintin the vehicle.

. Secure loose items in thevehicle.

. Do not leave a seat foldeddown unless needed.

Starting andOperating

New Vehicle Break-InNotice: The vehicle does notneed an elaborate break-in. But itwill perform better in the long runif you follow these guidelines:. Do not drive at any oneconstant speed, fast or slow,for the first 805 km (500mi).Do not make full-throttlestarts. Avoid downshifting tobrake or slow the vehicle.

. During the first 1 000 km(600mi), avoid using morethan moderate accelerationin lower gears and avoidvehicle speeds above110 km/h (68mph).

. Between the first 1 000 km(600mi) and 5 000 km(3,000 mi), heavyacceleration in lower gears

can be used. Vehicle speedsabove 110 km/h (68mph)should be limited tofive minutes per use.

. Avoid making hard stops forthe first 322 km (200mi) orso. During this time the newbrake linings are not yetbroken in. Hard stops withnew linings can meanpremature wear and earlierreplacement. Follow thisbreaking-in guideline everytime you get new brakelinings.

. Do not tow a trailer duringbreak-in. See DrivingCharacteristics and TowingTips on page 9‑52 for thetrailer towing capabilities ofyour vehicle and moreinformation.

Following break‐in, engine speedand load can be graduallyincreased.



Adjustable Throttle andBrake PedalIf the vehicle has this feature, theposition of the throttle and brakepedals can be adjusted.

The switch used to adjust thepedals is located on the right sideof the steering column, below thewiper stalk. Pull the switch towardyou to move the pedals further fromthe floor, or push the switch awayfrom you to move the pedals closerto the floor.

Adjust the throttle and brake pedalswhile the vehicle is in P (Park)without pressing on the pedals.The pedals cannot be adjustedwhile the vehicle is in R (Reverse)or when cruise control is engaged.The throttle and brake pedals canalso be adjusted while driving.

Ignition Positions

The vehicle has an electronickeyless ignition with pushbuttonstart.

Pressing the button cycles it throughthree modes, ACC/ACCESSORY,ON/RUN/START, and STOPPINGTHE ENGINE/OFF.

If the pushbutton start is notworking, the vehicle may be near astrong radio antenna signal causinginterference to the keyless entrysystem. See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5‑29 formore information.

To shift out of P (Park), the vehiclemust be in ON/RUN and the brakepedal must be applied.

STOPPING THE ENGINE/OFF(No LED Lights): When thevehicle is stopped, press the engineSTART/STOP button once to turnthe engine off. If the vehicle is inP (Park), the ignition will turn off,



and Retained Accessory Power(RAP) will remain active. SeeRetained Accessory Power (RAP)on page 9‑22 for more information.If the vehicle is not in P (Park),the ignition will return to ACC/ACCESSORY and display themessage SHIFT TO PARK in theDriver Information Center (DIC).See Driver Information Center (DIC)on page 5‑29 for more information.When the vehicle is shifted intoP (Park), the ignition system willswitch to OFF. In an emergency,if the vehicle must be shut off whiledriving:

1. Brake using a firm and steadypressure. Do not pump thebrakes repeatedly. This maydeplete power assist, requiringincreased brake pedal force.

2. Shift the vehicle to N (Neutral).This can be done while thevehicle is moving. After shiftingto N (Neutral), firmly apply thebrakes and steer the vehicle to asafe location.

3. Come to a complete stop, shiftto P (Park), and turn the ignitionto OFF. On vehicles with anautomatic transmission, the shiftlever must be in P (Park) to turnthe ignition to the OFF position.

4. Set the parking brake. SeeParking Brake on page 9‑31.

{ WARNING

Turning off the vehicle whilemoving may cause loss of powerassist in the brake and steeringsystems and disable the airbags.While driving, only shut thevehicle off in an emergency.

5. In case of emergency the enginecan be switched off while thevehicle is running: push theStart/Stop button twice withinfive seconds, or hold thebutton down for more thantwo seconds. When the engineis not running, considerablymore force is needed to brakeand steer.

ACC/ACCESSORY (Amber LEDLight): This mode allows you touse some electrical accessorieswhen the engine is off.

With the ignition off, pressing thebutton one time without the brakepedal applied will place the ignitionsystem in ACC/ACCESSORY.

The ignition will switch fromACC/ACCESSORY to OFF after10 minutes to prevent batteryrun down.



ON/RUN/START (Green LEDLight): This mode is for driving andstarting. With the ignition off, andthe brake pedal applied, pressingthe button once will place theignition system in ON/RUN/START.Once engine cranking begins,release the button. Engine crankingwill continue until the engine starts.See Starting the Gasoline Engineon page 9‑20 for more information.The ignition will then remain inON/RUN.

Starting the GasolineEngineTo place the transmission in theproper gear:

Move the shift lever to P (Park) orN (Neutral). To restart the enginewhen the vehicle is already moving,use N (Neutral).

Notice: Do not try to shift toP (Park) if the vehicle is moving.If you do, you could damage thetransmission. Shift to P (Park)only when the vehicle is stopped.

The RKE transmitter must be insidethe vehicle for the ignition to work.

Cell phone chargers can interferewith the operation of the keylessaccess system. Battery chargersshould not be plugged in whenstarting or turning off the engine.

To start the vehicle:

Starting Procedure

1. With the brake pedal applied,press the START button locatedon the center console.

2. When the engine beginscranking, let go of the button andthe engine cranks automaticallyuntil it starts.

If the transmitter is not inthe vehicle or something isinterfering with the transmitter,the Driver Information Center(DIC) will display NO REMOTEDETECTED. See DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5‑29 for more information.

If the battery in the RKEtransmitter needs replacing, theDIC displays REPLACEBATTERY IN REMOTE KEY.The vehicle can still be driven.



See Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System Operation onpage 2‑3 for more information.

3. Do not race the engineimmediately after starting it.Operate the engine andtransmission gently until the oilwarms up and lubricates allmoving parts.

4. If the engine does not start andno DIC message is displayed,wait 15 seconds before tryingagain to let the cranking motorcool down.

If the engine does not start afterfive to 10 seconds, especially invery cold weather (below0°F or −18°C), it could beflooded with too much gasoline.Try pushing the acceleratorpedal all the way to the floorwhile cranking for up to15 seconds.

Notice: Cranking the engine forlong periods of time, by pressingthe START button immediatelyafter cranking has ended, canoverheat and damage thecranking motor, and drain thebattery. Wait at least 15 secondsbetween each try, to allow thecranking motor to cool down.

When the engine starts, let go of theaccelerator. If the vehicle startsbriefly but then stops again, do thesame thing. This clears the extragasoline from the engine.

The vehicle has aComputer-Controlled CrankingSystem. This feature assists instarting the engine and protectscomponents. Once cranking hasbeen initiated, the engine continues

cranking for a few seconds or untilthe vehicle starts. If the engine doesnot start, cranking automaticallystops after 15 seconds to preventcranking motor damage. To preventgear damage, this system alsoprevents cranking if the engine isalready running.

Notice: The engine is designedto work with the electronics inthe vehicle. If you add electricalparts or accessories, you couldchange the way the engineoperates. Before adding electricalequipment, check with yourdealer. If you do not, the enginemight not perform properly. Anyresulting damage would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.



Engine HeaterThe engine coolant heater,if available, can help in cold weatherconditions at or below −18°C (0°F)for easier starting and better fueleconomy during engine warm-up.Plug in the coolant heater at leastfour hours before starting thevehicle. An internal thermostat inthe plug end of the cord will preventengine coolant heater operation attemperatures above −18°C (0°F).

To Use the Engine CoolantHeater

1. Turn off the engine.

2. Open the hood and unwrap theelectrical cord. The cord islocated near the air cleaner.

3. Plug it into a normal, grounded110-volt AC outlet.

{ WARNING

Plugging the cord into anungrounded outlet could cause anelectrical shock. Also, the wrongkind of extension cord couldoverheat and cause a fire. Youcould be seriously injured. Plugthe cord into a properly groundedthree-prong 110-volt AC outlet.If the cord will not reach, use aheavy-duty three-prong extensioncord rated for at least 15 amps.

4. Before starting the engine, besure to unplug and store thecord as it was before to keep itaway from moving engine parts.If you do not it could bedamaged.

The length of time the heater shouldremain plugged in depends onseveral factors. Ask a dealer in thearea where you will be parking thevehicle for the best advice on this.

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP)These accessories can be usedafter the engine is turned off:. Audio system (up to 10 minutes

or driver door is opened).. Power windows, sunroof

(if equipped), and power outlets(up to 10 minutes or any dooris opened).



Shifting Into Park

{ WARNING

It can be dangerous to get out ofthe vehicle if the shift lever is notfully in P (Park) with the parkingbrake firmly set. The vehicle canroll. If you have left the enginerunning, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could beinjured. To be sure the vehicle willnot move, even when you are onfairly level ground, use the stepsthat follow.

1. Hold the brake pedal down andset the parking brake.

See Parking Brake on page 9‑31for more information.

2. Move the shift lever into P (Park)by pushing the lever all the waytoward the front of the vehicle.

3. Turn the ignition off.

Leaving the Vehicle with theEngine Running

{ WARNING

It can be dangerous to leave thevehicle with the engine running.The vehicle could move suddenlyif the shift lever is not fully inP (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. And, if you leave thevehicle with the engine running,it could overheat and even catchfire. You or others could beinjured. Do not leave the vehiclewith the engine running.

If you have to leave the vehiclewith the engine running, be surethe vehicle is in P (Park) and theparking brake is firmly set beforeyou leave it. After you have movedthe shift lever into P (Park), holddown the regular brake pedal. Seeif you can move the shift lever awayfrom P (Park) without first pulling it

toward you. If you can, it means thatthe shift lever was not fully lockedinto P (Park).

Torque Lock

Torque lock is when the weightof the vehicle puts too muchforce on the parking pawl in thetransmission. This happens whenparking on a hill and shifting thetransmission into P (Park) is notdone properly and then it is difficultto shift out of P (Park). To preventtorque lock, set the parking brakeand then shift into P (Park). To findout how, see "Shifting Into P (Park)"listed previously.

If torque lock does occur, yourvehicle may need to be pusheduphill by another vehicle to relievethe parking pawl pressure, so youcan shift out of P (Park).

If you are towing a trailer andparking on a hill, see DrivingCharacteristics and Towing Tips onpage 9‑52.



Shifting out of ParkThis vehicle is equipped with anautomatic transmission shift lockcontrol system. The shift lockcontrol is designed to preventmovement of the shift lever out ofP (Park), unless the ignition is inON/RUN and the brake pedal isapplied

The shift lock control is alwaysfunctional except in the case ofan uncharged or low voltage (lessthan 9‐volt) battery.

If the vehicle has an unchargedbattery or a battery with low voltage,try charging or jump starting thebattery. See Jump Starting onpage 10‑92.

To shift out of P (Park):

1. Apply the brake pedal.

2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN.

3. Press the shift lever button.

4. Move the shift lever to thedesired position.

If you still are unable to shift out ofP (Park):

1. Fully release the shift leverbutton.

2. Hold the brake pedal down andpress the shift lever buttonagain.

3. Move the shift lever to thedesired position.

If you still cannot move the shiftlever from P (Park), consult yourdealer or a professional towingservice.

Parking over ThingsThat Burn

{ WARNING

Things that can burn could touchhot exhaust parts under thevehicle and ignite. Do not parkover papers, leaves, dry grass,or other things that can burn.

Engine Exhaust

{ WARNING

Engine exhaust contains carbonmonoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. Exposure to COcan cause unconsciousness andeven death.

Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:. The vehicle idles in areaswith poor ventilation (parkinggarages, tunnels, deep snowthat may block underbodyairflow or tail pipes).

. The exhaust smells orsounds strange or different.

. The exhaust system leaksdue to corrosion or damage.

. The vehicle exhaust systemhas been modified, damagedor improperly repaired.

(Continued)



WARNING (Continued)

. There are holes or openingsin the vehicle body fromdamage or after marketmodifications that are notcompletely sealed.

If unusual fumes are detected orif it is suspected that exhaust iscoming into the vehicle:

. Drive it only with the windowscompletely down.

. Have the vehicle repairedimmediately.

Never park the vehicle with theengine running in an enclosedarea such as a garage or abuilding that has no fresh airventilation.

Running the VehicleWhile ParkedIt is better not to park with theengine running. But if you ever haveto, here are some things to know.

{ WARNING

Idling a vehicle in an enclosedarea with poor ventilation isdangerous. Engine exhaust mayenter the vehicle. Engine exhaustcontains Carbon Monoxide (CO)which cannot be seen or smelled.It can cause unconsciousnessand even death. Never run theengine in an enclosed area thathas no fresh air ventilation. Formore information, see EngineExhaust on page 9‑24.

{ WARNING

It can be dangerous to get out ofthe vehicle if the automatictransmission shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll.Do not leave the vehicle when theengine is running unless youhave to. If you have left theengine running, the vehicle canmove suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure thevehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground,always set the parking brake andmove the shift lever to P (Park).

Follow the proper steps to be surethe vehicle will not move. SeeShifting Into Park on page 9‑23.

If parking on a hill and pulling atrailer, see Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips on page 9‑52.



AutomaticTransmissionThe shift lever is located on thecenter console between the frontseats.

There are several different positionsfor the shift lever.

P (Park): This position locks thewheels. It is the best position to usewhen you start the engine becausethe vehicle cannot move easily.

{ CAUTION

It is dangerous to get out of thevehicle if the shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll.

Do not leave the vehicle whenthe engine is running unless youhave to. If you have left theengine running, the vehicle canmove suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure thevehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground,always set the parking brake andmove the shift lever to P (Park).See Shifting Into Park onpage 9‑23. If you are pulling atrailer, see Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips on page 9‑52.

Make sure the shift lever is fully inP (Park) before starting the engine.The vehicle has an automatictransmission shift lock controlsystem. You must fully apply theregular brakes first and then pressthe shift lever button before you canshift from P (Park) when the ignitionkey is in ON/RUN. If you cannotshift out of P (Park), ease pressureon the shift lever and push the shiftlever all the way into P (Park) asyou maintain brake application.Then press the shift lever buttonand move the shift lever intoanother gear. See Shifting out ofPark on page 9‑24.



Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse)while the vehicle is movingforward could damage thetransmission. The repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Shift to R (Reverse)only after the vehicle is stopped.

R (Reverse): Use this gear toback up.

At low vehicle speeds, R (Reverse)can be used to rock the vehicleback and forth to get out of snow,ice, or sand without damaging thetransmission. See If the Vehicle IsStuck on page 9‑11 for additionalinformation.

N (Neutral): In this position, theengine does not connect with thewheels. To restart when the vehicleis already moving, use N (Neutral)only. You can also use N (Neutral)when the vehicle is being towed.

{ CAUTION

Shifting into a drive gear while theengine is running at high speed isdangerous. Unless your foot isfirmly on the brake pedal, thevehicle could move very rapidly.You could lose control and hitpeople or objects. Do not shiftinto a drive gear while the engineis running at high speed.

Notice: Shifting out of P (Park)or N (Neutral) with the enginerunning at high speed maydamage the transmission. Therepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Be sure theengine is not running at highspeed when shifting the vehicle.

D (Drive): This position is fornormal driving. It provides the bestfuel economy. If you need morepower for passing, and you are:. Going less than 55 km/h

(35 mph), push the acceleratorpedal about halfway down.

. Going about 55 km/h (35 mph) ormore, push the accelerator allthe way down.

The transmission will shift downto a lower gear and have morepower.

Downshifting the transmission inslippery road conditions could resultin skidding; see Skidding underLoss of Control on page 9‑6

Notice: Spinning the tiresor holding the vehicle in oneplace on a hill using only theaccelerator pedal may damagethe transmission. If you arestuck, do not spin the tires. Whenstopping on a hill, use the brakesto hold the vehicle in place.



Manual Mode

Driver Shift Control (DSC)

Notice: If you drive the vehicle ata high rpm without upshiftingwhile using Driver Shift Control(DSC), you could damage thevehicle. Always upshift whennecessary while using DSC.

DSC allows you to shift anautomatic transmission similarto a manual transmission. To usethe DSC feature:

1. Move the shift lever tothe left from D (Drive) toM (Manual Mode).

2. Press the shift lever forward (+)to upshift or rearward (−) todownshift.

An M will be displayed inthe DIC.

To use the DSC feature with the tapshift controls (if equipped):

1. Move the shift lever to the leftfrom D (Drive) toM (Manual Mode).

2. The tap shift controls are on theback of the steering wheel. Tapthe left control (−) to downshift,and the right control (+) toupshift.

The tachometer display on theinstrument panel cluster will showwhich gear the vehicle is in. Thenumber indicates the requestedgear range when moving the shiftlever forward or rearward. SeeTachometer on page 5‑12 for moreinformation.

While using the DSC feature, thevehicle will have firmer, quickershifting. You can use this for sportdriving or when climbing ordescending hills, to stay in gearlonger, or to downshift for morepower or engine braking.



The transmission will only allowyou to shift into gears appropriatefor the vehicle speed and enginerevolutions per minute (rpm). Thetransmission will not automaticallyshift to the next lower gear if theengine rpm is too high, nor to thenext higher gear when the maximumengine rpm is reached.

If shifting is prevented for anyreason, the currently selected gearwill flash multiple times, indicatingthat the transmission has not shiftedgears.

While in the DSC mode, thetransmission will automaticallydownshift when the vehicle comesto a stop. This will allow for morepower during take-off.

When accelerating the vehicle froma stop in snowy and icy conditions,you may want to shift into secondgear. A higher gear ratio allows youto gain more traction on slipperysurfaces.

Fuel Economy ModeThe vehicle may have a fueleconomy mode. When engaged,fuel economy mode can improve thevehicle's fuel economy.

Pressing the eco button by the shiftlever will engage fuel economymode. When activated, the eco lightin the instrument cluster will comeon. See Fuel Economy Light onpage 5‑27. Pressing the button asecond time will turn fuel economymode off.

When fuel economy mode is on:. The transmission will upshift

sooner, and downshift later.. The torque converter will lock up

sooner, and stay on longer.. The gas pedal will be less

sensitive.. The vehicle's computers will

more aggressively shut off fuelto the engine under deceleration.

. The engine operates at lowerrpm's in fuel economy mode,which can increase noise andvibration. This is normal.



Drive Systems

All-Wheel DriveVehicles with this feature alwayssend engine power to all fourwheels. It is fully automatic, andadjusts itself as needed for roadconditions.

When using a compact spare tireon an AWD vehicle, the systemautomatically detects the compactspare and disables AWD. To restoreAWD operation and preventexcessive wear on the system,replace the compact spare with afull-size tire as soon as possible.See Compact Spare Tire onpage 10‑92 for more information.

Brakes

Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS)This vehicle has the AntilockBrake System (ABS), an advancedelectronic braking system that helpsprevent a braking skid.

When the engine is started and thevehicle begins to drive away, ABSchecks itself. A momentary motor orclicking noise might be heard whilethis test is going on, and it mighteven be noticed that the brakepedal moves a little. This is normal.

If there is a problem with ABS, thiswarning light stays on. See AntilockBrake System (ABS) Warning Lighton page 5‑23.

If driving safely on a wet road andit becomes necessary to slam onthe brakes and continue brakingto avoid a sudden obstacle, acomputer senses that the wheelsare slowing down. If one of thewheels is about to stop rolling, thecomputer will separately work thebrakes at each wheel.



ABS can change the brake pressureto each wheel, as required, fasterthan any driver could. This can helpthe driver steer around the obstaclewhile braking hard.

As the brakes are applied, thecomputer keeps receiving updateson wheel speed and controlsbraking pressure accordingly.

Remember: ABS does not changethe time needed to get a foot up tothe brake pedal or always decreasestopping distance. If you get tooclose to the vehicle in front of you,there will not be enough time toapply the brakes if that vehiclesuddenly slows or stops. Alwaysleave enough room up ahead tostop, even with ABS.

Using ABS

Do not pump the brakes. Just holdthe brake pedal down firmly and letABS work. You might hear the ABSpump or motor operating and feelthe brake pedal pulsate, but this isnormal.

Braking in Emergencies

ABS allows the driver to steer andbrake at the same time. In manyemergencies, steering can helpmore than even the very bestbraking.

Parking Brake

The vehicle has an Electric ParkingBrake (EPB). The switch for theEPB is in the center console. TheEPB can always be activated,even if the ignition is OFF. Toavoid draining the battery, do notoperate the EPB too often withoutthe engine running.



The system has a parking brakestatus light and a parking brakewarning light. See Brake SystemWarning Light on page 5‑22. Thereare also three Driver InformationCenter (DIC) messages. See DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5‑29 for more information.In case of insufficient electricalpower, the EPB cannot be appliedor released.

Before leaving the vehicle, checkthe parking brake status light toensure the parking brake is applied.

EPB Apply

The EPB can be applied any timethe vehicle is stopped. The EPB isapplied by momentarily lifting up onthe EPB switch. Once fully applied,the parking brake status light will beon. While the brake is being applied,the status light will flash until fullapply is reached. If the light doesnot come on, or remains flashing,

you need to have the vehicleserviced. Do not drive the vehicleif the parking brake status light isflashing. See your dealer. SeeBrake System Warning Light onpage 5‑22 for more information.

If the EPB is applied while thevehicle is in motion, a chime willsound, and the DIC messageRELEASE PARKING BRAKEwill be displayed. The vehicle willdecelerate as long as the switch isheld in the up position. Releasingthe EPB switch during thedeceleration will release the parkingbrake. If the switch is held in the upposition until the vehicle comes to astop, the EPB will remain applied.

If the parking brake status lightflashes continuously, the EPB isonly partially applied or released,or there is a problem with the EPB.The DIC message SERVICEPARKING BRAKE will be displayed.

If this light flashes continuously,release the EPB and attempt toapply it again. If this light continuesto flash, do not drive the vehicle.See your dealer.

If the parking brake warning light ison, the EPB has detected an errorin another system and is operatingwith reduced functionality. To applythe EPB when this light is on, lift upon the EPB switch and hold it in theup position. Full application of theparking brake by the EPB systemmay take a longer period of timethan normal when this light is on.Continue to hold the switch until theparking brake status light remainson. If the parking brake warning lightis on, see your dealer.

If the EPB fails to apply, the rearwheels should be blocked toprevent vehicle movement.



EPB Release

To release the EPB, place theignition in the ON/RUN position,apply and hold the brake pedal,and push down momentarily onthe EPB switch. If you attempt torelease the EPB without the brakepedal applied, a chime will sound,and the DIC message STEP ONBRAKE TO RELEASE PARKBRAKE will be displayed. The EPBis released when the parking brakestatus light is off.

If the parking brake warning light ison, the EPB has detected an errorin another system and is operatingwith reduced functionality. Torelease the EPB when this light ison, push down on the EPB switchand hold it in the down position.EPB release may take a longerperiod of time than normal whenthis light is on. Continue to hold theswitch until the parking brake statuslight is off. If the light is on, see yourdealer.

Notice: Driving with the parkingbrake on can overheat the brakesystem and cause prematurewear or damage to brake systemparts. Make sure that the parkingbrake is fully released and thebrake warning light is off beforedriving.

Automatic EPB Release

The EPB will automatically release ifthe vehicle is running, placed intogear, and an attempt is made todrive away. Avoid rapid accelerationwhen the EPB is applied, topreserve parking brake lining life.

If you are towing a trailer andparking on a hill, see DrivingCharacteristics and Towing Tips onpage 9‑52 for more information.

Brake AssistThis vehicle has a brake assistfeature designed to assist the driverin stopping or decreasing vehiclespeed in emergency drivingconditions. This feature uses thestability system hydraulic brakecontrol module to supplement thepower brake system underconditions where the driver hasquickly and forcefully applied thebrake pedal in an attempt to quicklystop or slow down the vehicle. Thestability system hydraulic brakecontrol module increases brakepressure at each corner of thevehicle until the ABS activates.Minor brake pedal pulsation orpedal movement during this timeis normal and the driver shouldcontinue to apply the brake pedalas the driving situation dictates.The brake assist feature willautomatically disengage when thebrake pedal is released or brakepedal pressure is quicklydecreased.



Hill Start Assist (HSA)This vehicle has a Hill Start Assist(HSA) feature, which may be usefulwhen the vehicle is stopped on agrade. This feature is designed toprevent the vehicle from rolling,either forward or rearward, duringvehicle drive off. After the drivercompletely stops and holds thevehicle in a complete standstill on agrade, HSA will be automaticallyactivated. During the transitionperiod between when the driverreleases the brake pedal and startsto accelerate to drive off on a grade,HSA holds the braking pressure toensure that there is no rolling. Thebrakes will automatically releasewhen the accelerator pedal isapplied within the two‐secondwindow. It will not activate if thevehicle is in a drive gear and facingdownhill or if the vehicle is facinguphill and in R (Reverse).

Ride Control Systems

Traction ControlSystem (TCS)The vehicle may have a TractionControl System (TCS) that limitswheel spin. On a front-wheel-drivevehicle, the system operates if itsenses that one or both of the frontwheels are spinning or beginning tolose traction. On an All-Wheel-Drive(AWD) vehicle, the system willoperate if it senses that any of thewheels are spinning or beginning tolose traction. When this happens,the system brakes the spinningwheel(s) and/or reduces enginepower to limit wheel spin.

The system may be heard or feltwhile it is working, but this isnormal.

TCS automatically comes onwhenever the vehicle is started.To limit wheel spin, especially inslippery road conditions, the systemshould always be left on. But, TCScan be turned off if needed.

TCS/ESP Light

d flashes to indicate that thetraction control system is active.

If there is a problem detectedwith TCS, SERVICE TRACTIONCONTROL is displayed on theDriver Information Center (DIC).See Ride Control System Messageson page 5‑39. When this messageis displayed and d comes on andstays on, the vehicle is safe to drivebut the system is not operational.Driving should be adjustedaccordingly.



If d comes on and stays on, resetthe system by:

1. Stopping the vehicle.

2. Turning the engine off andwaiting 15 seconds.

3. Starting the engine.

If d still comes on and stays on, thevehicle needs service.

Notice: Do not repeatedly brakeor accelerate heavily when TCS isoff. The vehicle's driveline couldbe damaged.

TCS/ESP Button

TCS can be turned on and offby pressing and releasing theTCS/ESP button.

TCS Off Light

When TCS is turned off, i comeson and the system will not limitwheel spin. Driving should be

adjusted accordingly. Press andrelease the TCS/ESP button againto turn the system back on.

When TCS is turned off on AWDvehicles, the system may still makenoise. This is normal and necessarywith AWD hardware.

It may be necessary to turn thesystem off if the vehicle gets stuckin sand, mud or snow and rockingthe vehicle is required. See If theVehicle Is Stuck on page 9‑11 formore information. See also WinterDriving on page 9‑9 for informationon using TCS when driving in snowyor icy conditions.

Adding accessories can affect thevehicle performance. SeeAccessories and Modifications onpage 10‑3 for more information.



Electronic StabilityProgram (ESP)The vehicle may have avehicle stability enhancementsystem called Electronic StabilityProgram (ESP). It is an advancedcomputer‐controlled system thatassists with directional control of thevehicle in difficult driving conditions.

ESP activates when the computersenses a difference between theintended path and the direction thevehicle is actually traveling. ESPselectively applies braking pressureat any one of the vehicle brakes tohelp steer the vehicle in theintended direction.

ESP comes on automaticallywhenever the vehicle is started.To assist with directional control ofthe vehicle, the system shouldalways be left on.

TCS/ESP Light

When the ESP systemactivates, d flashes on theinstrument panel. This also occurswhen traction control is activated.A noise may be heard or vibrationmay be felt in the brake pedal. Thisis normal. Continue to steer thevehicle in the intended direction.

If there is a problem detected withESP, SERVICE ESP is displayed onthe Driver Information Center (DIC).See Ride Control System Messageson page 5‑39. When this messageis displayed and d comes on andstays on, the vehicle is safe to drivebut the system is not operational.Driving should be adjustedaccordingly.

If d comes on and stays on, resetthe system by:

1. Stopping the vehicle.

2. Turning the engine off andwaiting 15 seconds.

3. Starting the engine.

If d still comes on and stays on,the vehicle needs service.



TCS/ESP Button

ESP can be turned on and off bypressing and holding the TCS/ESPbutton.

ESP Off Light TCS Off Light

When ESP is turned off, g and icome on the instrument panel.The system will not assist with

directional control of the vehicle orlimit wheel spin. Driving should beadjusted accordingly.

If cruise control is being used whenESP activates, cruise control willautomatically disengage. Press thecruise control button to reengagewhen road conditions allow. SeeCruise Control on page 9‑39 formore information.

Limited-Slip Rear AxleVehicles with a limited-slip rear axlecan give more traction on snow,mud, ice, sand, or gravel. Whentraction is low, this feature allowsthe drive wheel with the mosttraction to move the vehicle. Thelimited-slip rear axle also gives thedriver enhanced control whencornering hard or completing amaneuver, such as a lane change.

Selective Ride Control

TCS/ESP Button

2.8 L V6 Engine

The vehicle may have a ridecontrol system called SelectiveRide Control. The suspensionsetting can be changed at any timeby turning the TCS/ESP button toS (Sport) or C (Comfort). Turningthe TCS/ESP button to the S (Sport)position will provide a stiffer andfirmer suspension. Turning theTCS/ESP button to the C (Comfort)



position will provide a smoothersuspension. Changes will occur inthe transmission patterns, steering,and suspension.

3.0 L V6 Engine

The vehicle may have a ride controlsystem called Selective RideControl. The suspension setting canbe changed at any time by turningthe TCS/ESP button to S (Sport) orC (Comfort). Turning the TCS/ESPbutton to the S (Sport) position willprovide a sporty shift pattern in thetransmission but will not affect thesuspension. Turning the TCS/ESPbutton to the C (Comfort) positionwill provide a normal suspension.Changes will occur only in thetransmission shift patterns and notin steering or suspension.

The S (Sport) and C (Comfort)modes can be change independentof the shift lever position.

When in the Sport Mode, the vehiclewill still shift automatically. Thetransmission may remain in a gearlonger than it would in the normaldriving mode based on braking,throttle input, and vehicle lateralacceleration. SPORT MODE ON willbe displayed in the DIC. See RideControl System Messages onpage 5‑39. The word “Sport” willdisplay below the odometer. Thegear position will also be indicatedin the tachometer.

Within Sport Mode there is a furtherperformance feature calledPerformance Mode Lift Foot (PMLF)Mode. The feature is activatedautomatically when sports orienteddriving is detected, based oncornering and on/off throttleapplication. PMLF allows thetransmission to hold the currentgear instead of upshifting when thethrottle is lifted.

If the shift lever is moved to the leftfrom the D (Drive) position, thevehicle will enter the M (ManualMode). See Manual Mode onpage 9‑28 under “AutomaticTransmission” for more information.

If there is a problem detected withSelective Ride Control, SERVICESUSPENSION SYSTEM displayson the DIC. See Ride ControlSystem Messages on page 5‑39.Driving should be adjustedaccordingly.



Cruise ControlWith cruise control, the vehicle canmaintain a speed of about 40 km/h(25 mph) or more without keepingyour foot on the accelerator. Cruisecontrol does not work at speedsbelow 40 km/h (25 mph).

If the brakes are applied, the cruisecontrol is turned off.

If the vehicle has an ElectronicStability Program (ESP) or TractionControl System (TCS) and beginsto limit wheel spin while usingcruise control, the cruise controlautomatically disengages. SeeElectronic Stability Program (ESP)on page 9‑36 or Traction ControlSystem (TCS) on page 9‑34. Whenroad conditions allow you to safelyuse it again, the cruise control canbe turned back on.

{ WARNING

Cruise control can be dangerouswhere you cannot drive safely ata steady speed. So, do not usethe cruise control on windingroads or in heavy traffic.

Cruise control can be dangerouson slippery roads. On such roads,fast changes in tire traction cancause excessive wheel slip, andyou could lose control. Do not usecruise control on slippery roads.

The cruise control buttons are onthe steering wheel.

1 (On/Off): Press to turn thecruise control system on and off.

* (Cancel): Press to disengagecruise control without erasing theset speed from memory.

RES/+ (Resume/Accelerate):Move the thumbwheel up to makethe vehicle resume to a previouslyset speed or to accelerate.



SET/− (Set/Coast): Move thethumbwheel down to set a speedand activate cruise control, or tomake the vehicle decelerate.

Setting Cruise Control

If the cruise button is on when not inuse, it could get bumped and go intocruise when not desired. Keep thecruise button turned off when cruisecontrol is not being used.

To set a speed:

1. Press5 to turn the cruisecontrol system on.

2. Get to the speed desired.

3. Move the thumbwheel downtoward SET/− and release it.The desired set speed brieflyappears in the instrument panelcluster.

4. Take your foot off the acceleratorpedal.

Resuming a Set Speed

If the cruise control is set at adesired speed and then the brakesare applied or the cancel buttonis pressed, the cruise control isdisengaged without erasing the setspeed from memory.

Once the vehicle reaches about40 km/h (25 mph) or more, movethe thumbwheel up toward RES/+briefly. The vehicle returns to thespeed selected previously and staysthere.

Increasing Speed While UsingCruise Control

If the cruise control system isalready activated:. Move the thumbwheel up toward

RES/+ and hold it until thevehicle accelerates to thedesired speed, and thenrelease it.

. To increase the speed in smallamounts, move the thumbwheelup toward RES/+ briefly andthen release it. Each time this isdone, the vehicle goes about1.6 km/h (1 mph) faster.

Reducing Speed While UsingCruise Control

If the cruise control system isalready activated:. Move the thumbwheel down

toward SET/− and hold until thedesired lower speed is reached,then release it.

. To slow down in small amounts,move the thumbwheel downtoward SET/− briefly and thenrelease it. Each time this isdone, the vehicle goes about1.6 km/h (1 mph) slower.



Passing Another Vehicle WhileUsing Cruise Control

Use the accelerator pedal toincrease the vehicle's speed.When you take your foot off thepedal, the vehicle will slow down tothe previous set cruise speed.

Using Cruise Control on Hills

How well the cruise control workson hills depends upon the vehiclespeed, load, and the steepness ofthe hills. When going up steep hills,you might have to step on theaccelerator pedal to maintainthe vehicle speed. When goingdownhill, you might have to brake orshift to a lower gear to maintain thevehicle's speed. When the brakesare applied the cruise control isdisengaged.

Ending Cruise Control

There are three ways to end cruisecontrol:. To disengage the cruise control,

step lightly on the brake pedal.The indicator light will go off.

. Press*.

. Press5 to turn the cruisecontrol system off completely.The cruise control cannot beresumed.

Erasing Speed Memory

The cruise control set speed iserased from memory if 5 is pressedor if the vehicle is turned off.

Object DetectionSystems

Ultrasonic Parking AssistFor vehicles with the UltrasonicFront and Rear Parking Assist(UFRPA) system, it assists thedriver with parking and avoidingobjects. UFRPA operates atspeeds less than 8 km/h (5 mph).The sensors on the front andrear bumper detect objects up to1.2 m (4 ft) in front of the vehicle,2.5 m (8 ft) behind the vehicle, andat least 25.4 cm (10 in) off theground.



{ WARNING

The Ultrasonic Front and RearParking Assist (UFRPA) systemdoes not replace driver vision.It cannot detect:

. Objects that are below thebumper, underneath thevehicle, or if they are tooclose or far from the vehicle.

. Children, pedestrians,bicyclists, or pets.

If you do not use proper carebefore moving forward and whilebacking; vehicle damage, injury,or death could occur. Even withUFRPA, always check in front ofthe vehicle before moving forwardand behind the vehicle beforebacking up. While moving forwardand backing, be sure to look forobjects and check the vehiclemirrors.

How the System Works

When the vehicle is shifted intoR (Reverse), the front and rearsensors automatically turn on.After the vehicle is shifted out ofR (Reverse), the rear sensors turnoff and the front sensors stay onuntil the vehicle is above a certainspeed. The front sensors may alsobe turned on by pressing the parkassist button located next to theshift lever without shifting intoR (Reverse) while the vehicle istraveling at a low speed. See“Turning the System On and Off”later in this section.

When the vehicle is in N (Neutral),the system may be active. If thevehicle is in a car wash, the sensorsmay detect objects in the car wash.See “Turning the System On andOff” later in this section to turn thesystem off.

High-toned beeps heard from thefront speakers are for objectsdetected near the front bumper.

Low-toned beeps heard from therear speakers are for objectsdetected near the rear bumper.

When an object is detected, high- orlow‐toned beeps are heard. As thevehicle gets closer to an object, thetime between the beeps becomesshorter. When the distance is lessthan 30 cm (11.8 in), beeping iscontinuous. The distance may beless during warmer or humidweather.

PARK ASSIST OFF displays on theDriver Information Center (DIC) toindicate that UFRPA is off. Themessage disappears after a shortperiod of time.

Turning the System On and Off

The UFRPA system can be turnedon and off by pressing the parkassist button located next to theshift lever.



The LED next to the park assistbutton lights up when the system ison and turns off when it has beendisabled.

When the System Does NotSeem to Work Properly

UFRPA defaults to the on settingeach time the vehicle is started; ifUFRPA does not turn on and thelight on the park assist button is off,the system may not be workingproperly. One of the followingmessages may appear on the DIC.

SERVICE PARK ASSIST: If thismessage occurs, take the vehicle toyour dealer to repair the system.

PARK ASSIST OFF: This messagecan occur under the followingconditions:. The driver has disabled the

system.. The ultrasonic sensors are not

clean. Keep the vehicle'sbumpers free of mud, dirt, snow,ice, and slush. For cleaninginstructions, see Exterior Careon page 10‑101.

. A trailer was attached to thevehicle, or an object washanging out of the liftgate duringthe last drive cycle. Once theattached object is removed,UFRPA will return to normaloperation.

. An object is attached to the frontof the vehicle.

. A tow bar is attached to thevehicle.

. The vehicle's bumper isdamaged. Take the vehicle toyour dealer to repair the system.

. Other conditions may affectsystem performance, such asvibrations from a jackhammer orthe compression of air brakes ona very large truck.

If the system is still disabled, afterdriving forward at least 25 km/h(15 mph), take the vehicle to yourdealer.

Rear VisionCamera (RVC)The vehicle may have a Rear VisionCamera (RVC) system. Read thisentire section before using it.

The RVC system can assist thedriver when backing up bydisplaying a view of the area behindthe vehicle.



{ WARNING

The Rear Vision Camera (RVC)system does not replace drivervision. RVC does not:

. Detect objects that areoutside the camera's field ofview, below the bumper,or underneath the vehicle.

. Detect children, pedestrians,bicyclists, or pets.

Do not back the vehicle by onlylooking at the RVC screen, or usethe screen during longer, higherspeed backing maneuvers orwhere there could be cross-traffic.Your judged distances using thescreen will differ from actualdistances.

If you do not use proper carebefore backing up, you couldhit a vehicle, child, pedestrian,bicyclist, or pet, resulting invehicle damage, injury, or death.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Even though the vehicle has theRVC system, always checkcarefully before backing up bychecking behind and around thevehicle.

Vehicles Without a NavigationSystem

When the vehicle is on and thedriver shifts into R (Reverse), thevideo image automatically appearson the inside rearview mirror. Oncethe driver shifts out of R (Reverse),the video image automaticallydisappears from the inside rearviewmirror.

Turning the Rear Vision CameraSystem Off or On

To turn off the RVC system, pressand holdz, located on the insiderearview mirror, until the leftindicator light turns off. The RVCdisplay is now disabled.

To turn the RVC system on again,press and holdz until the leftindicator light illuminates. The RVCsystem display is now enabled andthe display will appear in the mirrornormally.

Vehicles With a NavigationSystem

An image appears on the navigationscreen with the message “CheckSurroundings for Safety” when thevehicle is shifted into R (Reverse).The navigation screen goes to theprevious screen after approximately10 seconds once the vehicle isshifted out of R (Reverse).

To cancel the delay, do one of thefollowing:. Press a hard key on the

navigation system.. Shift into P (Park).. Reach a vehicle speed of

8 km/h (5 mph).



Turning the Rear Vision CameraSystem On or Off

To turn the rear vision camerasystem on or off:

1. Shift into P (Park).


3. Select Display.

4. Select Camera. When acheckmark appears next to theCamera option, the RVC systemis on.

Symbols

The navigation system may have afeature that lets the driver viewsymbols on the navigation screenwhile using the rear vision camera.The Ultrasonic Front and RearParking Assist (UFRPA) systemmust not be disabled to use thecaution symbols. The error message“Rear Parking Assist SymbolsUnavailable” may display if UFRPAhas been disabled and the symbolshave been turned on. SeeUltrasonic Parking Assist onpage 9‑41.

The symbols appear and may coveran object when viewing thenavigation screen when an object isdetected by the UFRPA system.

To turn the symbols on or off:



3. Select Display.

4. Select Symbols. When acheckmark appears next to theSymbols option, symbols willappear.

Guidelines

The RVC system has a guidelineoverlay that can help the driver alignthe vehicle when backing into aparking spot.

To turn the guidelines on or off:



3. Select Display.

4. Select Guidelines. When acheckmark appears next to theGuidelines option, guidelines willappear.



Rear Vision Camera ErrorMessages

SERVICE REAR VISION CAMERASYSTEM: This message candisplay when the system is notreceiving information it requires fromother vehicle systems.

If any other problem occurs or if aproblem persists, see your dealer.

Rear Vision Camera Location

The camera is located above thelicense plate.

The area displayed by the camera islimited.

It does not display objects that areclose to either corner or under thebumper and can vary depending onvehicle orientation or roadconditions. The distance of theimage that appears on the screen isdifferent from the actual distance.

The following illustration shows thefield of view that the cameraprovides.

A. View displayed by the camera.

B. Corner of the rear bumper.



When the System Does NotSeem to Work Properly

The rear vision camera system maynot work properly or display a clearimage if:. The RVC is turned off. See

“Turning the Rear Vision CameraSystem On or Off” earlier in thissection.

. It is dark.

. The sun or the beam ofheadlamps is shining directlyinto the camera lens.

. Ice, snow, mud, or anything elsebuilds up on the camera lens.Clean the lens, rinse it withwater, and wipe it with a softcloth.

. The back of the vehicle is in anaccident. The position andmounting angle of the cameracan change or the camera canbe affected. Be sure to have thecamera and its position andmounting angle checked at yourdealer.

FuelUse of the recommended fuel is animportant part of the propermaintenance of this vehicle. To helpkeep the engine clean and maintainoptimum vehicle performance, werecommend the use of gasolineadvertised as TOP TIER DetergentGasoline.

Look for the TOP TIER label on thefuel pump to ensure gasoline meetsenhanced detergency standardsdeveloped by auto companies. A listof marketers providing TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline can be found atwww.toptiergas.com.

The eighth digit of the VehicleIdentification Number (VIN) showsthe code letter or number thatidentifies the vehicle's engine.The VIN is at the top left of theinstrument panel. See VehicleIdentification Number (VIN) onpage 12‑1.



Recommended FuelIf the vehicle has the 3.0L V6 engine(VIN Code Y), use regular unleadedgasoline with a posted octane ratingof 87 or higher. If the octane ratingis less than 87, an audible knockingnoise, commonly referred to asspark knock, might be heard whendriving. If this occurs, use agasoline rated at 87 octane orhigher as soon as possible. If heavyknocking is heard when usinggasoline rated at 87 octane orhigher, the engine needs service.

If the vehicle has the 2.8L V6 engine(VIN Code 6), use premiumunleaded gasoline with a postedoctane rating of 91 or higher. Forbest performance, use premiumunleaded gasoline with a postedoctane rating of 93. In anemergency, you can use regularunleaded gasoline with an octanerating of 87 or higher. If 87 octanefuel is used, do not perform anyaggressive driving maneuvers suchas wide open throttle applications.

You might also hear audible sparkknock during acceleration. Refill thetank with premium fuel as soon aspossible to avoid damaging theengine. If heavy knocking is heardwhen using gasoline rated at91octane or higher, the engineneeds service.

Gasoline Specifications(U.S. and Canada Only)At a minimum, gasoline shouldmeet ASTM specificationD 4814 in the United States orCAN/CGSB‐3.5 or 3.511 in Canada.Some gasolines contain anoctane-enhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT). We recommendagainst the use of gasolinescontaining MMT. See Fuel Additiveson page 9‑49 for additionalinformation.

California FuelRequirementsIf the vehicle is certified to meetCalifornia Emissions Standards, it isdesigned to operate on fuels thatmeet California specifications. Seethe underhood emission controllabel. If this fuel is not available instates adopting California EmissionsStandards, the vehicle will operatesatisfactorily on fuels meetingfederal specifications, but emissioncontrol system performance mightbe affected. The malfunctionindicator lamp could turn on and thevehicle might fail a smog‐check test.See Malfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 5‑18. If this occurs, return toyour authorized dealer for diagnosis.If it is determined that the conditionis caused by the type of fuel used,repairs might not be covered by thevehicle warranty.



Fuels in ForeignCountriesNever use leaded gasoline or anyother fuel not recommended in theprevious text on fuel. Costly repairscaused by use of improper fuelwould not be covered by the vehiclewarranty.

To check the fuel availability, ask anauto club, or contact a major oilcompany that does business in thecountry where you will be driving.

Fuel AdditivesTo provide cleaner air, all gasolinesin the United States are nowrequired to contain additives thathelp prevent engine and fuel systemdeposits from forming, allowing theemission control system to workproperly. In most cases, nothingshould have to be added to the fuel.However, some gasolines containonly the minimum amount ofadditive required to meet U.S.Environmental Protection Agency

regulations. To help keep fuelinjectors and intake valves cleanand avoid problems due to dirtyinjectors or valves, look for gasolinethat is advertised as TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline. Look for theTOP TIER label on the fuel pump toensure gasoline meets enhanceddetergency standards developed bythe auto companies. A list ofmarketers providing TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline can be found atwww.toptiergas.com.

Gasolines containing oxygenates,such as ethers and ethanol, andreformulated gasolines might beavailable in your area. Werecommend that you use thesegasolines, if they comply with thespecifications described earlier.However, E85 (85% ethanol) andother fuels containing more than10% ethanol must not be used invehicles that were not designed forthose fuels.

Notice: This vehicle was notdesigned for fuel that containsmethanol. Do not use fuelcontaining methanol. It cancorrode metal parts in the fuelsystem and also damage plasticand rubber parts. That damagewould not be covered under thevehicle warranty.

Some gasolines that arenot reformulated for lowemissions can contain anoctane-enhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendantwhere you buy gasoline whether thefuel contains MMT. We recommendagainst the use of such gasolines.Fuels containing MMT can reducespark plug life and affect emissioncontrol system performance. Themalfunction indicator lamp mightturn on. If this occurs, return to yourdealer for service.



Filling the Tank

{ WARNING

Fuel vapor burns violently and afuel fire can cause bad injuries.To help avoid injuries to you andothers, read and follow all theinstructions on the fuel pumpisland. Turn off the engine whenrefueling. Do not smoke near fuelor when refueling the vehicle. Donot use cellular phones. Keepsparks, flames, and smokingmaterials away from fuel. Do notleave the fuel pump unattendedwhen refueling the vehicle. This isagainst the law in some places.Do not re-enter the vehicle whilepumping fuel. Keep children awayfrom the fuel pump; never letchildren pump fuel.

The tethered fuel cap is locatedbehind a hinged fuel door on thepassenger side of the vehicle.

To open the fuel door, push therearward center edge in and releaseand it will open.

To remove the fuel cap, turn itslowly counterclockwise.

While refueling, hang the tetheredfuel cap from the hook on thefuel door.

When reinstalling the cap,turn it clockwise until it clicksonce, otherwise the malfunction

indicator lamp could turn on. SeeMalfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 5‑18.

{ WARNING

Fuel can spray out on you if youopen the fuel cap too quickly.If you spill fuel and thensomething ignites it, you could bebadly burned. This spray canhappen if the tank is nearly full,and is more likely in hot weather.Open the fuel cap slowly and waitfor any hiss noise to stop. Thenunscrew the cap all the way.

Be careful not to spill fuel. Do nottop off or overfill the tank and wait afew seconds after you have finishedpumping before removing thenozzle. Clean fuel from paintedsurfaces as soon as possible. SeeExterior Care on page 10‑101.

When replacing the fuel cap, turn itclockwise until it clicks once. Makesure the cap is fully installed. The



diagnostic system can determine ifthe fuel cap has been left off orimproperly installed. This wouldallow fuel to evaporate into theatmosphere. See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp on page 5‑18.

{ WARNING

If a fire starts while you arerefueling, do not remove thenozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel byshutting off the pump or bynotifying the station attendant.Leave the area immediately.

Notice: If a new fuel cap isneeded, be sure to get the righttype of cap from your dealer. Thewrong type of fuel cap might notfit properly, might cause themalfunction indicator lamp tolight, and could damage the fueltank and emissions system. SeeMalfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 5‑18.

Filling a Portable FuelContainer

{ WARNING

Never fill a portable fuel containerwhile it is in the vehicle. Staticelectricity discharge from thecontainer can ignite the fuelvapor. You can be badly burnedand the vehicle damaged if thisoccurs. To help avoid injury to youand others:

. Dispense fuel only intoapproved containers.

. Do not fill a container while itis inside a vehicle, in avehicle's trunk, pickup bed,or on any surface other thanthe ground.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Bring the fill nozzle in contactwith the inside of the fillopening before operating thenozzle. Contact should bemaintained until the filling iscomplete.

. Do not smoke whilepumping fuel.

. Do not use a cellular phonewhile pumping fuel.



Towing

General TowingInformationOnly use towing equipment that hasbeen designed for the vehicle.Contact your dealer or traileringdealer for assistance with preparingthe vehicle for towing a trailer.

See the following trailer towinginformation in this section:. For information on driving while

towing a trailer, see “DrivingCharacteristics andTowing Tips.”

. For maximum vehicle and trailerweights, see “Trailer Towing.”

. For information on equipment totow a trailer, see “TowingEquipment.”

For information on towing a disabledvehicle, see Towing the Vehicle onpage 10‑97. For information ontowing the vehicle behind anothervehicle such as a motor home, seeRecreational Vehicle Towing onpage 10‑97.

Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips

{ WARNING

The driver can lose control whenpulling a trailer if the correctequipment is not used or thevehicle is not driven properly.For example, if the trailer is tooheavy, the brakes may not workwell— or even at all. The driverand passengers could beseriously injured. The vehicle mayalso be damaged; the resultingrepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Pull a traileronly if all the steps in this sectionhave been followed. Ask yourdealer for advice and informationabout towing a trailer with thevehicle.



The vehicle can tow a trailer whenequipped with the proper trailertowing equipment. For traileringcapacity, see Trailer Towing onpage 9‑56. Trailering changeshandling, acceleration, braking,durability and fuel economy. Withthe added weight, the engine,transmission, wheel assemblies andtires are forced to work harder andunder greater loads. The trailer alsoadds wind resistance, increasing thepulling requirements. For safetrailering, correctly use the propertrailering equipment.

The following information hasimportant trailering tips and rulesfor your safety and that of yourpassengers. Read this sectioncarefully before pulling a trailer.

Pulling a Trailer

Here are some important points:. There are many laws, including

speed limit restrictions that applyto trailering. Check for legalrequirements.

. Do not tow a trailer at all duringthe first 1 600 km (1,000 mi)the new vehicle is driven.The engine, axle or other partscould be damaged.

. During the first 800 km (500 mi)that a trailer is towed, do notdrive over 80 km/h (50 mph) anddo not make starts at full throttle.This reduces wear on thevehicle.

. The vehicle can tow in D (Drive).Use a lower gear if thetransmission shifts too often.

. Do not use the Fuel Saver Modewhen towing.

. Obey speed limit restrictions.Do not drive faster than themaximum posted speed fortrailers, or no more than 90 km/h(55 mph), to reduce wear on thevehicle.



Driving with a Trailer

Towing a trailer requires experience.Get familiar with handling andbraking with the added trailerweight. The vehicle is now longerand not as responsive as thevehicle is by itself.

Check all trailer hitch parts andattachments, safety chains,electrical connectors, lamps, tiresand mirror adjustments. If the trailerhas electric brakes, start the vehicleand trailer moving and then applythe trailer brake controller by handto be sure the brakes are working.

During the trip, check regularly to besure that the load is secure, and thelamps and trailer brakes are workingproperly.

Towing with a Stability ControlSystem

When towing, the sound of thestability control system might beheard. The system is reacting to thevehicle movement caused by thetrailer, which mainly occurs duringcornering. This is normal whentowing heavier trailers.

Following Distance

Stay at least twice as far behind thevehicle ahead as you would whendriving the vehicle without a trailer.This can help to avoid situationsthat require heavy braking andsudden turns.

Passing

More passing distance is neededwhen towing a trailer. Because therig is longer, it is necessary to gofarther beyond the passed vehiclebefore returning to the lane.

Backing Up

Hold the bottom of the steeringwheel with one hand. To move thetrailer to the left, move that hand tothe left. To move the trailer to theright, move your hand to the right.Always back up slowly and,if possible, have someoneguide you.

Making Turns

Notice: Making very sharp turnswhile trailering could cause thetrailer to come in contact with thevehicle. The vehicle could bedamaged. Avoid making verysharp turns while trailering.

When turning with a trailer, makewider turns than normal so thetrailer will not strike soft shoulders,curbs, road signs, trees or otherobjects. Use the turn signal well inadvance and avoid jerky or suddenmaneuvers.



Turn Signals when Towing aTrailer

The turn signal indicators on theinstrument panel flash wheneversignaling a turn or lane change.Properly hooked up, the trailerlamps also flash, telling otherdrivers the vehicle is turning,changing lanes or stopping.

When towing a trailer, the arrows onthe instrument panel flash for turnseven if the bulbs on the trailer areburned out. Check occasionally tobe sure the trailer bulbs are stillworking.

Driving on Grades

Reduce speed and shift to alower gear before starting down along or steep downgrade. If thetransmission is not shifted down,the brakes might have to be usedso much that they would get hot andno longer work well.

The vehicle can tow in D (Drive).Use a lower gear if the transmissionshifts too often.

When towing at high altitude onsteep uphill grades, engine coolantboils at a lower temperature than atnormal altitudes. If the engine isturned off immediately after towingat high altitude on steep uphillgrades, the vehicle could showsigns similar to engine overheating.To avoid this, let the engine runwhile parked, preferably on levelground, with the transmission inP (Park) for a few minutes beforeturning the engine off. If theoverheat warning comes on, seeEngine Overheating on page 10‑24.

Parking on Hills

{ WARNING

Parking the vehicle on a hill withthe trailer attached can bedangerous. If something goeswrong, the rig could start to move.People can be injured, and boththe vehicle and the trailer can bedamaged. When possible, alwayspark the rig on a flat surface.

If parking the rig on a hill:

1. Press the brake pedal, but donot shift into P (Park) yet. Turnthe wheels into the curb if facingdownhill or into traffic if facinguphill.

2. Have someone place chocksunder the trailer wheels.

3. When the wheel chocks are inplace, release the brake pedaluntil the chocks absorb the load.



4. Reapply the brake pedal. Thenapply the parking brake and shiftinto P (Park).

5. Release the brake pedal.

Leaving After Parking on a Hill

1. Apply and hold the brake pedalwhile you:. Start the engine.. Shift into a gear.. Release the parking brake.

2. Let up on the brake pedal.

3. Drive slowly until the trailer isclear of the chocks.

4. Stop and have someone pick upand store the chocks.

Maintenance when TrailerTowing

The vehicle needs service moreoften when pulling a trailer. Seethe Maintenance Schedule formore information. Things thatare especially important in trailer

operation are automatictransmission fluid, engine oil,axle lubricant, belts, cooling systemand brake system. Inspect thesebefore and during the trip.

Check periodically to see that allhitch nuts and bolts are tight.

Engine Cooling when TrailerTowing

The cooling system may temporarilyoverheat during severe operatingconditions. See Engine Overheatingon page 10‑24.

Trailer TowingBefore pulling a trailer, there arethree important considerations thathave to do with weight:. The weight of the trailer. The weight of the trailer tongue. The total weight on the vehicle's

tires

Weight of the Trailer

How heavy can a trailer safely be?

It depends on how the rig is used.For example, speed, altitude, roadgrades, outside temperature andhow much the vehicle is used to pulla trailer are all important. It candepend on any special equipmenton the vehicle, and the amount oftongue weight the vehicle can carry.See “Weight of the Trailer Tongue”later in this section for moreinformation.

Maximum trailer weight is calculatedassuming only the driver is in thetow vehicle and it has all therequired trailering equipment.The weight of additional optionalequipment, passengers and cargo inthe tow vehicle must be subtractedfrom the maximum trailer weight.



Use the following chart to determine how much the vehicle can weigh, based upon the vehicle model and options.

Vehicle Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR*

2.8L Engine, AWD 1 588 kg (3,500 lbs) 3 725 kg (8,212 lbs)

3.0L Engine, FWD 1134 kg (2,500 lbs) 3 187 kg (7,025 lbs)

3.0L Engine, FWD with Trailering Package 1 588 kg (3,500 lbs) 3 640 kg (8,025 lbs)

3.0L Engine, AWD 1134 kg (2,500 lbs) 3 271 kg (7,212 lbs)

3.0L Engine, AWD with Trailering Package 1 588 kg (3,500 lbs) 3 725 kg (8,212 lbs)

*The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle andtrailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversions. The GCWR for the vehicle should not beexceeded.

Ask your dealer for traileringinformation or advice. SeeCustomer Assistance Offices onpage 13‑3 for more information.

Weight of the Trailer Tongue

The tongue load (A) of any trailer isan important weight to measurebecause it affects the total grossweight of the vehicle. The Gross

Vehicle Weight (GVW) includes thecurb weight of the vehicle, anycargo carried in it, and the peoplewho will be riding in the vehicle.If there are a lot of options,equipment, passengers or cargo inthe vehicle, it will reduce the tongueweight the vehicle can carry, whichwill also reduce the trailer weight the

vehicle can tow. If towing a trailer,the tongue load must be added tothe GVW because the vehicle willbe carrying that weight, too. SeeVehicle Load Limits on page 9‑12for more information about thevehicle's maximum load capacity.



If a weight-carrying hitch or aweight-distributing hitch is beingused, the trailer tongue (A) shouldweigh 10‐15 percent of the totalloaded trailer weight (B).

After loading the trailer, weighthe trailer and then the tongue,separately, to see if the weights areproper. If they are not, adjustmentsmight be made by moving someitems around in the trailer.

Trailering may be limited by thevehicle's ability to carry tongueweight. Tongue weight cannot causethe vehicle to exceed the GVWR

(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) orthe RGAWR (Rear Gross AxleWeight Rating). The effect ofadditional weight may reduce thetrailering capacity more than thetotal of the additional weight.

Consider the following example:

A vehicle model base weight is2 495 kg (5,500 lbs); 1 270 kg(2,800 lbs) at the front axle and1 225 kg (2,700 lbs) at the rear axle.It has a GVWR of 3 266 kg(7,200 lbs), a RGAWR of 1 814 kg(4,000 lbs) and a GCWR (GrossCombination Weight Rating) of6 350 kg (14,000 lbs). The trailerrating should be:

Expect tongue weight to be at least10 percent of trailer weight (386 kg(850 lbs)) and because the weight is

applied well behind the rear axle,the effect on the rear axle is greaterthan just the weight itself, as muchas 1.5 times as much. The weight atthe rear axle could be 386 kg(850 lbs) X 1.5 = 578 kg (1,275 lbs).Since the rear axle already weighs1 225 kg (2,700 lbs), adding 578 kg(1,275 lbs) brings the total to1 803 kg (3,975 lbs). This is veryclose to, but within the limit forRGAWR as well. The vehicle is setto trailer up to 3 856 kg (8,500 lbs).

If the vehicle has many options andthere is a front seat passenger andtwo rear seat passengers with someluggage and gear in the vehicle aswell. 136 kg (300 lbs) could beadded to the front axle weight and181 kg (400 lbs) to the rear axleweight. The vehicle now weighs:



Weight is still below 3 266 kg(7,200 lbs) and you might think318 additional kilograms (700 lbs)should be subtracted from thetrailering capacity to stay withinGCWR limits. The maximum trailerwould only be 3 538 kg (7,800 lbs).You may go further and think thetongue weight should be limited toless than 454 kg (1,000 lbs) to avoidexceeding GVWR. But the effecton the rear axle must still beconsidered. Because the rear axlenow weighs 1 406 kg (3,100 lbs),408 kg (900 lbs) can be put onthe rear axle without exceedingRGAWR. The effect of tongueweight is about 1.5 times the actualweight. Dividing the 408 kg (900 lbs)by 1.5 leaves only 272 kg (600 lbs)of tongue weight that can behandled. Since tongue weight isusually at least 10 percent of totalloaded trailer weight, expect thatthe largest trailer the vehicle canproperly handle is 2 722 kg(6,000 lbs).

It is important that the vehicledoes not exceed any of itsratings — GCWR, GVWR, RGAWR,Maximum Trailer Rating or TongueWeight. The only way to be sure it isnot exceeding any of these ratingsis to weigh the vehicle and trailer.

Total Weight on the Vehicle'sTires

Be sure the vehicle's tires areinflated to the upper limit for coldtires. These numbers can be foundon the Certification label or seeVehicle Load Limits on page 9‑12for more information. Make sure notto go over the GVW limit for thevehicle, or the GAWR, including theweight of the trailer tongue. If usinga weight distributing hitch, makesure not to go over the rear axlelimit before applying the weightdistribution spring bars.

Towing Equipment

Hitches

It is important to have the correcthitch equipment. Crosswinds, largetrucks going by and rough roads area few reasons why the right hitch isneeded.. The rear bumper on the vehicle

is not intended for hitches. Donot attach rental hitches or otherbumper-type hitches to it. Useonly a frame-mounted hitch thatdoes not attach to the bumper.

. Will any holes be made in thebody of the vehicle when thetrailer hitch is installed? If thereare, then be sure to seal theholes later when the hitch isremoved. If the holes are notsealed, dirt, water, and deadlycarbon monoxide (CO) from theexhaust can get into the vehicle.See Engine Exhaust onpage 9‑24.



Hitch Cover

The vehicle may have a hitch cover.To remove the hitch cover:

1. Turn the fasteners on the lowertabs 90 degreescounterclockwise.

2. Lift the lower edge of the coverabout 45 degrees.

3. Pull the cover downward todisengage the upperattachments.

To reinstall the hitch cover:

1. Hold the cover at a 45 degreeangle to the vehicle and pushthe upper tabs in the hitch coverinto the slots in the fascia.

2. Move the bottom of the coverforward until the lower tabs lineup with the lower fascia slots.

3. Snap the hitch cover into placeby pushing the upper cornersforward.

4. Turn the fasteners on the lowertabs 90 degrees clockwise tolock the cover in place.

Safety Chains

Always attach chains between thevehicle and the trailer. Cross thesafety chains under the tongue ofthe trailer to help prevent the tonguefrom contacting the road if itbecomes separated from the hitch.Always leave just enough slack sothe rig can turn. Never allow safetychains to drag on the ground.

Trailer Brakes

A loaded trailer that weighs morethan 450 kg (1,000 lbs) needs tohave its own brake system that isadequate for the weight of thetrailer. Be sure to read and followthe instructions for the trailer brakesso they are installed, adjusted andmaintained properly.

Because the vehicle has anti-lockbrakes, do not tap into the vehicle'sbrake system. If you do, both brakesystems will not work well, or at all.

Trailer Wiring Harness

All of the electrical circuits requiredfor the trailer lighting system can beaccessed at a connector mounted tothe frame, behind the rear bumpercover.



Trailer SwayControl (TSC)The vehicle has a Trailer SwayControl (TSC) feature as part of theElectronic Stability Program (ESP)system. If TSC detects that thetrailer is swaying, the vehicle brakesare automatically applied.

When TSC is applying the brakes,the TCS/ESP indicator light flashesto notify the driver to reduce speed.See Electronic Stability Program(ESP) Off Light on page 5‑24. If thetrailer continues to sway, ESP willreduce engine torque to help slowthe vehicle.

TSC will not function if ESP isturned off.

Conversions andAdd-Ons

Add-On ElectricalEquipmentNotice: Do not add anythingelectrical to the vehicle unlessyou check with your dealer first.Some electrical equipment candamage the vehicle and thedamage would not be covered bythe vehicle's warranty. Someadd-on electrical equipment cankeep other components fromworking as they should.

Add-on equipment can drain thevehicle's 12‐volt battery, even if thevehicle is not operating.

The vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to add anythingelectrical to the vehicle, seeServicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 3‑42 and AddingEquipment to the Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 3‑43.



2 NOTES


Vehicle Care 10-1

Vehicle Care

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-3California Proposition65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

California PerchlorateMaterials Requirements . . . . 10-3

Accessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

Vehicle ChecksDoing Your OwnService Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4

Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5Engine CompartmentOverview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6

Engine Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-14Automatic TransmissionFluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . 10-16

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . 10-24Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . 10-26Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . 10-31Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-32

Wiper BladeReplacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . 10-34

Bulb ReplacementBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-38Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38Taillamps and Turn SignalLamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40

Back-Up Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . 10-42Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . 10-43

Electrical SystemElectrical SystemOverload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44

Fuses and CircuitBreakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44

Engine Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45

Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47

Rear Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49


10-2 Vehicle Care

Wheels and TiresTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . 10-53Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55Tire Terminology andDefinitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56

Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59Tire Pressure for High-SpeedOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61

Tire Pressure MonitorSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61

Tire Pressure MonitorOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63

Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68

Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69Different Size Tires andWheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-71

Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72

Wheel Alignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-74Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-75If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-75Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 10-77

Storing the Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 10-85

Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-85Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . 10-92

Jump StartingJump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-92

TowingTowing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 10-97Recreational VehicleTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-97

Appearance CareExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-101Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-105Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-108


Vehicle Care 10-3

General InformationFor service and parts needs, visityour dealer. You will receivegenuine parts and trained andsupported service people.

California Proposition65 WarningMost motor vehicles, including thisone, contain and/or emit chemicalsknown to the State of California tocause cancer and birth defects orother reproductive harm. Engineexhaust, many parts and systems,many fluids, and some componentwear by-products contain and/oremit these chemicals.

California PerchlorateMaterials RequirementsCertain types of automotiveapplications, such as airbaginitiators, seat belt pretensioners,and lithium batteries contained inRemote Keyless Entry transmitters,may contain perchlorate materials.Special handling may be necessary.For additional information, seewww.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

Accessories andModificationsAdding non‐dealer accessories ormaking modifications to the vehiclecan affect vehicle performance andsafety, including such things asairbags, braking, stability, ride andhandling, emissions systems,aerodynamics, durability, andelectronic systems like antilockbrakes, traction control, and stabilitycontrol. These accessories ormodifications could even causemalfunction or damage not coveredby the vehicle warranty.


10-4 Vehicle Care

Damage to vehicle componentsresulting from modifications or theinstallation or use of non‐companycertified parts, including controlmodule or software modifications, isnot covered under the terms of thevehicle warranty and may affectremaining warranty coverage foraffected parts.

Accessories from your dealerare designed to complementand function with other systemson the vehicle. Your dealer canaccessorize the vehicle usinggenuine accessories. When yougo to your dealer and ask foraccessories, you will know thatcompany-trained and supportedservice technicians will perform thework using genuine accessories.

Vehicle Checks

Doing Your OwnService Work

{ WARNING

You can be injured and thevehicle could be damaged if youtry to do service work on a vehiclewithout knowing enough about it.

. Be sure you have sufficientknowledge, experience,the proper replacementparts, and tools beforeattempting any vehiclemaintenance task.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Be sure to use the propernuts, bolts, and otherfasteners. Metric and Englishfasteners can be easilyconfused. If the wrongfasteners are used, partscan later break or fall off.You could be hurt.

If doing some of your own servicework, use the proper servicemanual. It tells you much moreabout how to service the vehiclethan this manual can.


Vehicle Care 10-5

This vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to do your ownservice work, see Airbag SystemCheck on page 3‑44.

Keep a record with all parts receiptsand list the mileage and the date ofany service work performed.

HoodTo open the hood:

1. Pull the release handle with theabove symbol on it. It is locatedbelow the instrument panel tothe left of the steering wheel.

2. Move the secondary hoodrelease lever to the right torelease the striker. The lever islocated near the middle ofthe hood.

3. Lift the hood.

Before closing the hood, be sure allthe filler caps are on properly.


10-6 Vehicle Care

Engine Compartment Overview

2.8 L V6 Engine


Vehicle Care 10-7

A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter onpage 10‑16.

B. Power Steering Reservoir andCap. See Power Steering Fluidon page 10‑26.

C. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See EngineOil on page 10‑10.

D. Engine Oil Dipstick. See EngineOil on page 10‑10.

E. Brake Master CylinderReservoir. See Brakes onpage 10‑27.

F. Battery (Out of View). SeeBattery on page 10‑30.

G. Engine Coolant Surge Tank andPressure Cap. See EngineCoolant on page 10‑20.

H. Remote Positive (+) Terminal.See Jump Starting onpage 10‑92.

I. Remote Negative (−) Terminal(Out of View). See JumpStarting on page 10‑92.

J. Engine Compartment FuseBlock on page 10‑45.

K. Windshield Washer FluidReservoir. See Washer Fluid onpage 10‑26.


10-8 Vehicle Care

3.0 L V6 Engine


Vehicle Care 10-9

A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter onpage 10‑16.

B. Power Steering Reservoir andCap (Under Engine Cover).See Power Steering Fluid onpage 10‑26.

C. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See EngineOil on page 10‑10.

D. Engine Oil Dipstick(Out of View). See Engine Oilon page 10‑10.

E. Engine Cover on page 10‑10.

F. Transmission Fluid Cap andDipstick (Out of View). SeeAutomatic Transmission Fluidon page 10‑16.

G. Brake Master CylinderReservoir. See Brakes onpage 10‑27.

H. Engine Coolant Surge Tank andPressure Cap. See EngineCoolant on page 10‑20.

I. Battery (Out of View). SeeBattery on page 10‑30.

J. Remote Positive (+) Terminal.See Jump Starting onpage 10‑92.

K. Remote Negative (−) Terminal(Out of View). See JumpStarting on page 10‑92.

L. Engine Compartment FuseBlock on page 10‑45.

M. Windshield Washer FluidReservoir. See Washer Fluid onpage 10‑26.


10-10 Vehicle Care

Engine Cover

Engine Cover (3.0 L V6)

A. Oil Fill Cap

B. Engine Cover Bolt

C. Engine Cover

To remove:

1. Remove the oil fill cap (A).

2. Remove the engine coverbolt (B).

3. Raise the engine cover (C) torelease it from the retainers.

4. Lift and remove the enginecover.

5. Reverse Steps 1 through 4 toreinstall the engine cover.

Engine OilTo ensure proper engineperformance and long life, carefulattention must be paid to engine oil.Following these simple, butimportant steps will help protectyour investment:. Always use engine oil approved

to the proper specification and ofthe proper viscosity grade. See“Selecting the Right Engine Oil”in this section.

. Check the engine oil levelregularly and maintain theproper oil level. See “CheckingEngine Oil” and “When to AddEngine Oil” in this section.

. Change the engine oil at theappropriate time. See Engine OilLife System on page 10‑14.

. Always dispose of engine oilproperly. See “What to Do withUsed Oil” in this section.


Vehicle Care 10-11

Checking Engine Oil

It is a good idea to check the engineoil level at each fuel fill. In order toget an accurate reading, the vehiclemust be on level ground. Theengine oil dipstick handle is a yellowloop. See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 10‑6 for thelocation of the engine oil dipstick.

Obtaining an accurate oil levelreading is essential:

1. If the engine has been runningrecently, turn off the engine andallow several minutes for the oilto drain back into the oil pan.Checking the oil level too soonafter engine shutoff will notprovide an accurate oil levelreading.

2. Pull out the dipstick and clean itwith a paper towel or cloth, thenpush it back in all the way.Remove it again, keeping the tipdown, and check the level.

When to Add Engine Oil

If the oil is below the cross-hatchedarea at the tip of the dipstick, add1 L (1 qt) of the recommended oiland then recheck the level. See“Selecting the Right Engine Oil” inthis section for an explanation ofwhat kind of oil to use. For engineoil crankcase capacity, seeCapacities and Specifications onpage 12‑2.

Notice: Do not add too much oil.Oil levels above or below theacceptable operating rangeshown on the dipstick are harmfulto the engine. If you find that youhave an oil level above theoperating range, i.e., the enginehas so much oil that the oil levelgets above the cross-hatchedarea that shows the properoperating range, the engine couldbe damaged. You should drainout the excess oil or limit drivingof the vehicle and seek a serviceprofessional to remove theexcess amount of oil.

See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10‑6 for the location of theengine oil fill cap.

Add enough oil to put the levelsomewhere in the proper operatingrange. Push the dipstick all the wayback in when through.


10-12 Vehicle Care

Selecting the Right Engine Oil

Selecting the right engine oildepends on both the proper oilspecification and viscosity grade:

Specification

Use and ask for engine oils with thedexos™ certification mark. Oilsmeeting the requirements of thevehicle should have the dexoscertification mark on the container.This certification mark indicates thatthe oil has been approved to thedexos specification.

This vehicle was filled at the factorywith dexos‐approved engine oil.

Notice: Use only engine oilthat is approved to the dexosspecification or an equivalentengine oil of the appropriateviscosity grade. Engine oilsapproved to the dexosspecification will show the dexossymbol on the container. Failureto use the recommended engineoil or equivalent can result inengine damage not covered bythe vehicle warranty. If you areunsure whether the oil isapproved to the dexosspecification, ask your serviceprovider.

Use of Substitute Engine Oils ifdexos is unavailable for top‐up only:Engine oil not meeting the dexosspecification or equivalent shouldnot be used for an oil change. In theevent that dexos‐approved engineoil is not available for maintainingproper oil level, however, you may

use substitute engine oil displayingthe API Starburst symbol and ofSAE 5W-30 viscosity grade.Extensive use of oils that do notmeet the dexos specification,however, may result in reducedperformance under certaincircumstances.

Maintaining the proper oil level isvery important. However, if you usea substitute oil for any reason, werecommend that you perform acomplete oil change back to dexosas soon as possible to protect theengine and maintain engine peakperformance.

Viscosity Grade

SAE 5W-30 is the best viscositygrade for the vehicle. Do notuse other viscosity oils such asSAE 10W‐30, 10W‐40, or 20W-50.


Vehicle Care 10-13

Cold Temperature Operation: In anarea of extreme cold, where thetemperature falls below −29°C(−20°F), an SAE 0W-30 oil shouldbe used. An oil of this viscositygrade will provide easier coldstarting for the engine at extremelylow temperatures. When selectingan oil of the appropriate viscositygrade, be sure to always select anoil that meets the requiredspecification, dexos. See“Specification” earlier in thissection for more information.

Engine Oil Additives/EngineOil Flushes

Do not add anything to the oil. Therecommended oils with the dexosspecification and displaying thedexos certification mark are all thatis needed for good performance andengine protection.

Engine oil system flushes are notrecommended and could causeengine damage not covered by thevehicle warranty.


10-14 Vehicle Care

What to Do with Used Oil

Used engine oil contains certainelements that can be unhealthy foryour skin and could even causecancer. Do not let used oil stay onyour skin for very long. Clean yourskin and nails with soap and water,or a good hand cleaner. Wash orproperly dispose of clothing or ragscontaining used engine oil. See themanufacturer's warnings about theuse and disposal of oil products.

Used oil can be a threat to theenvironment. If you change yourown oil, be sure to drain all the oilfrom the filter before disposal. Neverdispose of oil by putting it in thetrash or pouring it on the ground,into sewers, or into streams orbodies of water. Recycle it by takingit to a place that collects used oil.

Engine Oil Life System

When to Change Engine Oil

This vehicle has a computer systemthat indicates when to change theengine oil and filter. This is basedon a combination of factors whichinclude engine revolutions, enginetemperature, and miles driven.Based on driving conditions, themileage at which an oil change isindicated can vary considerably. Forthe oil life system to work properly,the system must be reset every timethe oil is changed.

When the system has calculatedthat oil life has been diminished,it indicates that an oil change isnecessary. A CHANGE ENGINEOIL SOON message comes on. SeeEngine Oil Messages on page 5‑37.Change the oil as soon as possiblewithin the next 1 000 km (600 mi).It is possible that, if driving underthe best conditions, the oil lifesystem might indicate that an oilchange is not necessary for upto a year. The engine oil andfilter must be changed at leastonce a year and at this time thesystem must be reset.


Vehicle Care 10-15

Your dealer has trained servicepeople who will perform this workand reset the system. It is alsoimportant to check the oil regularlyover the course of an oil draininterval and keep it at the properlevel.

If the system is ever resetaccidentally, the oil must bechanged at 5 000 km (3,000 mi)since the last oil change.Remember to reset the oillife system whenever the oil ischanged.

How to Reset the Engine OilLife System

Reset the system whenever theengine oil is changed so that thesystem can calculate the nextengine oil change. To reset thesystem:

1. Using the DIC MENU button andthumbwheel on the turn signallever, display OIL LIFEREMAINING on the DIC. SeeDriver Information Center (DIC)on page 5‑29 and Engine OilMessages on page 5‑37.

2. Press the SET/CLR button toreset the oil life at 100%.

Be careful not to reset the oil lifedisplay accidentally at any timeother than after the oil ischanged. It cannot be resetaccurately until the next oilchange.

The oil life system can also be resetas follows:

1. Turn the ignition on with theengine off.

2. Fully press and release theaccelerator pedal three timeswithin five seconds.

If the CHANGE ENGINE OILSOON message is not on, thesystem is reset.

The system is reset when theCHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage is off.

If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage comes back on when thevehicle is started, the engine oil lifesystem has not been reset. Repeatthe procedure.


10-16 Vehicle Care

Automatic TransmissionFluid

How to Check AutomaticTransmission Fluid

It is not necessary to checkthe transmission fluid level.A transmission fluid leak is theonly reason for fluid loss. If a leakoccurs, take the vehicle to yourdealer service department and haveit repaired as soon as possible.

There is a special procedure forchecking and changing thetransmission fluid. Because thisprocedure is difficult, you shouldhave this done at your dealerservice department. Contact yourdealer for additional information.

Change the fluid and filter at theintervals listed in ScheduledMaintenance on page 11‑3, and besure to use the fluid listed inRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑4.

Engine Air Cleaner/FilterSee Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10‑6 for the location of theengine air cleaner/filter.

When to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/Filter

Inspect the air cleaner/filter at thescheduled maintenance intervalsand replace it at the first oil changeafter each 80 000 km (50,000 mi)interval. See ScheduledMaintenance on page 11‑3 for moreinformation. If driving in dusty/dirtyconditions, inspect the filter at eachengine oil change.


Vehicle Care 10-17

How to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/Filter

To inspect the air cleaner/filter,remove the filter from the vehicleand lightly shake the filter to releaseloose dust and dirt. If the filterremains covered with dirt, a newfilter is required. Never usecompressed air to clean the filter.

To inspect or replace the engine aircleaner/filter:

1. Open the hood. See Hood onpage 10‑5.

2. Locate the air filter housing onthe front of the passenger sideof the engine compartment. SeeEngine Compartment Overviewon page 10‑6.

A. Air Duct Clamp

B. Electrical Connectors

C. Retaining Clips

3. Disconnect the outlet duct byloosening the air duct clamp (A).

4. Disconnect the electricalconnectors (B).

5. Lift the retaining clips (C) on theair filter housing.

6. Turn and tilt the cover slightlyupward and slide the cover awayfrom the outside edge of vehicle.Remove the air filter.

A. Cover Cut Outs

B. Air Filter Tabs


10-18 Vehicle Care

7. To install the air filter, place thefilter inside the box where thepleats fit in between the tabslocated inside the lower box.Ensure that the cover cutouts (A) on both sides match theair filter tabs (B) on both sides.

8. Replace the air cleaner cover byinserting the tabs appropriatelyinto the slots. Lower the cover tomeet the bottom of the box.Place the retaining clips on theretention features and clipclosed.

9. Retighten the air duct clamp.

10. Reconnect the electricalconnectors.

{ WARNING

Operating the engine with the aircleaner/filter off can cause youor others to be burned. The aircleaner not only cleans the air; ithelps to stop flames if the enginebackfires. Use caution whenworking on the engine and do notdrive with the air cleaner/filter off.

Notice: If the air cleaner/filter isoff, dirt can easily get into theengine, which could damage it.Always have the air cleaner/filterin place when you are driving.

Notice: Installing an aircleaner different than the onerecommended in MaintenanceReplacement Parts may causeengine damage not covered bythe vehicle warranty.


Vehicle Care 10-19

Cooling SystemWhen it is safe to lift the hood:

3.0 L V6 Engine Shown, 2.8 LV6 Engine Similar

A. Engine Cooling Fans

B. Engine Coolant Surge Tank andPressure Cap

{ WARNING

An electric engine cooling fanunder the hood can start up evenwhen the engine is not runningand can cause injury. Keephands, clothing, and tools awayfrom any underhood electric fan.

If the coolant inside the coolantsurge tank is boiling, do not doanything else until it cools down.The vehicle should be parked on alevel surface.

The coolant level should bebetween the MIN and MAX lines.If it is not, the vehicle may have aleak at the radiator hoses, heaterhoses, radiator, water pump,or somewhere else in the coolingsystem.

{ WARNING

Heater and radiator hoses, andother engine parts, can be veryhot. Do not touch them. If you do,you can be burned.

Do not run the engine if thereis a leak. If you run the engine, itcould lose all coolant. That couldcause an engine fire, and youcould be burned. Get any leakfixed before you drive the vehicle.


10-20 Vehicle Care

If there seems to be no leak,with the engine on, check tosee if the electric engine coolingfans are running. If the engine isoverheating, the fans should berunning. If it is not, the vehicleneeds service. Turn off the engine.

Notice: Using coolant other thanDEX-COOL® can cause prematureengine, heater core, or radiatorcorrosion. In addition, the enginecoolant could require changingsooner, at 50 000 km (30,000mi)or 24months, whichever occursfirst. Any repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always use DEX-COOL(silicate-free) coolant in thevehicle.

Engine CoolantThe cooling system in the vehicleis filled with DEX-COOL® enginecoolant. This coolant is designed toremain in the vehicle for 5 years or240 000 km (150,000 mi), whicheveroccurs first.

The following explains the coolingsystem and how to check and addcoolant when it is low. If there is aproblem with engine overheating,see Engine Overheating onpage 10‑24

What to Use

{ WARNING

Adding only plain water or someother liquid to the cooling systemcan be dangerous. Plain waterand other liquids, can boil beforethe proper coolant mixture will.The coolant warning system isset for the proper coolant mixture.With plain water or the wrongmixture, the engine could get toohot but you would not get theoverheat warning. The enginecould catch fire and you orothers could be burned. Use a50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and DEX-COOL coolant.


Vehicle Care 10-21

Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOLcoolant. If using this mixture,nothing else needs to be added.This mixture:. Gives freezing protection down

to −37°C (−34°F), outsidetemperature.

. Gives boiling protection up to129°C (265°F), enginetemperature.

. Protects against rust andcorrosion.

. Will not damage aluminum parts.

. Helps keep the proper enginetemperature.

Notice: If an improper coolantmixture is used, the engine couldoverheat and be badly damaged.The repair cost would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Too much water in the mixturecan freeze and crack the engine,radiator, heater core, and otherparts.

Never dispose of engine coolant byputting it in the trash, pouring it onthe ground, or into sewers, streams,or bodies of water. Have the coolantchanged by an authorized servicecenter, familiar with legalrequirements regarding usedcoolant disposal. This will helpprotect the environment and yourhealth.

Checking Coolant

The vehicle must be on a levelsurface when checking the coolantlevel.

Check to see if coolant is visible inthe coolant surge tank. If the coolantinside the coolant surge tank isboiling, do not do anything else untilit cools down. If coolant is visiblebut the coolant level is not at theindicated mark, add a 50/50 mixtureof clean, drinkable water andDEX-COOL coolant at the coolantsurge tank, but be sure the coolingsystem is cool before this is done.See Engine Overheating onpage 10‑24 for more information.

The coolant surge tank is located inthe engine compartment on thedriver side of the vehicle. SeeEngine Compartment Overview onpage 10‑6 for more information onlocation.


10-22 Vehicle Care

How to Add Coolant to theCoolant Surge Tank

Notice: This vehicle has aspecific coolant fill procedure.Failure to follow this procedurecould cause the engine tooverheat and be severelydamaged.

If no problem is found, checkto see if coolant is visible in thecoolant surge tank. If coolant isvisible but the coolant level is notat the indicated level mark, add a50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and DEX-COOL coolant atthe coolant surge tank, but be surethe cooling system, including thecoolant surge tank pressure cap, iscool before you do it.

{ WARNING

Steam and scalding liquids from ahot cooling system can blow outand burn you badly. They areunder pressure, and if you turnthe coolant surge tank pressurecap— even a little— they cancome out at high speed. Neverturn the cap when the coolingsystem, including the coolantsurge tank pressure cap, is hot.Wait for the cooling system andcoolant surge tank pressure capto cool if you ever have to turnthe pressure cap.

{ WARNING

Adding only plain water or someother liquid to the cooling systemcan be dangerous. Plain waterand other liquids, can boil beforethe proper coolant mixture will.The coolant warning system is setfor the proper coolant mixture.With plain water or the wrongmixture, the engine could get toohot but you would not get theoverheat warning. The enginecould catch fire and you orothers could be burned. Use a50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and DEX-COOL coolant.


Vehicle Care 10-23

Notice: In cold weather, watercan freeze and crack the engine,radiator, heater core and otherparts. Use the recommendedcoolant and the proper coolantmixture.

{ WARNING

You can be burned if you spillcoolant on hot engine parts.Coolant contains ethylene glycoland it will burn if the engine partsare hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

2.8 L V6 Engine 3.0 L V6 Engine

1. Remove the coolant surge tankpressure cap when the coolingsystem, including the coolantsurge tank pressure cap andupper radiator hose, is nolonger hot.

Turn the pressure cap slowlycounterclockwise aboutone-quarter of a turn. If youhear a hiss, wait for that to stop.This will allow any pressurestill left to be vented out thedischarge hose.


10-24 Vehicle Care

2. Keep turning the pressure capslowly and remove it.

3. Fill the coolant surge tank withthe proper DEX-COOL coolantmixture to the indicatedlevel mark.

4. With the coolant surge tankpressure cap off, start theengine and let it run until youcan feel the upper radiator hosegetting hot. Watch out for theengine cooling fan(s).

By this time, the coolant levelinside the coolant surge tankmay be lower. If the level islower, add more of the properDEX-COOL coolant mixture tothe coolant surge tank until thelevel reaches the indicatedlevel mark.

5. Replace the pressure cap.Be sure the pressure cap ishand-tight.

Check the level in the coolant surgetank when the cooling system hascooled down. If the coolant is not atthe proper level, repeat Steps 1through 3 and reinstall the pressurecap. If the coolant still is not at theproper level when the system coolsdown again, see your dealer.

Engine OverheatingThe vehicle has an indicator to warnof engine overheating.

There is an engine coolanttemperature warning light on theinstrument panel. See EngineCoolant Temperature Gauge onpage 5‑14.

The decision may be made notto lift the hood when this warningappears, but instead get servicehelp right away. See RoadsideAssistance Program on page 13‑4.

If the decision is made to lift thehood, make sure the vehicle isparked on a level surface.

Then check to see if the enginecooling fans are running. If theengine is overheating, both fansshould be running. If they are not,do not continue to run the engineand have the vehicle serviced.

Notice: Engine damage fromrunning the engine withoutcoolant is not covered by thewarranty.

Notice: If the engine catches firebecause of being driven with nocoolant, the vehicle can be badlydamaged. The costly repairswould not be covered by thevehicle warranty.


Vehicle Care 10-25

If Steam Is Coming from theEngine Compartment

{ WARNING

Steam from an overheated enginecan burn you badly, even if youjust open the hood. Stay awayfrom the engine if you see or hearsteam coming from it. Just turn itoff and get everyone away fromthe vehicle until it cools down.Wait until there is no sign ofsteam or coolant before youopen the hood.

If you keep driving when theengine is overheated, the liquidsin it can catch fire. You or otherscould be badly burned. Stop theengine if it overheats, and get outof the vehicle until the engineis cool.

If No Steam Is Coming fromthe Engine Compartment

If an engine overheat warning isdisplayed but no steam can be seenor heard, the problem may not betoo serious. Sometimes the enginecan get a little too hot when thevehicle:. Climbs a long hill on a hot day.. Stops after high-speed driving.. Idles for long periods in traffic.. Tows a trailer.

If the overheat warning displays withno sign of steam:

1. Turn the air conditioning off.

2. Turn the heater on to the highesttemperature and to the highestfan speed. Open the windows asnecessary.

3. In heavy traffic, let the engineidle in N (Neutral) while stopped.If it is safe to do so, pull off theroad, shift to P (Park) orN (Neutral) and let theengine idle.

If the temperature overheat gaugeis no longer in the overheat zoneor an overheat warning no longerdisplays, the vehicle can be driven.Continue to drive the vehicle slowfor about 10 minutes. Keep a safevehicle distance from the vehicle infront of you. If the warning does notcome back on, continue to drivenormally.

If the warning continues, pull over,stop, and park the vehicleright away.

If there is no sign of steam, idlethe engine for three minuteswhile parked. If the warning isstill displayed, turn off the engineuntil it cools down.


10-26 Vehicle Care

Power Steering Fluid

See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10‑6 for reservoir location.

When to Check Power SteeringFluid

It is not necessary to regularlycheck power steering fluid unlessa leak is suspected in the systemor an unusual noise is heard. A fluidloss in this system could indicate aproblem. Have the system inspectedand repaired.

How to Check Power SteeringFluid

To check the power steering fluid:

1. Turn the engine off and let theengine compartment cool down.

2. Remove the engine cover,if required. See Engine Cover onpage 10‑10.

3. Wipe the cap and the top of thereservoir clean.

4. Unscrew the cap and wipe thedipstick with a clean rag.

5. Replace the cap and completelytighten it.

6. Remove the cap again and lookat the fluid level on the dipstick.

The level should be within the HOTmark. If necessary, add only enoughfluid to bring the level withinthe mark.

What to Use

To determine what kind of fluid touse, see Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑4. Alwaysuse the proper fluid.

Washer Fluid

What to Use

When windshield washer fluid isneeded, be sure to read themanufacturer's instructions beforeuse. If operating the vehicle in anarea where the temperature may fallbelow freezing, use a fluid that hassufficient protection againstfreezing.


Vehicle Care 10-27

Adding Washer Fluid

The WASHER FLUID LOW ADDFLUID message appears on theDriver Information Center (DIC)when the fluid level is low.

Open the cap with the washersymbol on it. Add washer fluidup to the fill mark. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10‑6 for reservoir location.

Notice. When using concentratedwasher fluid, follow themanufacturer's instructionsfor adding water.

. Do not mix water withready-to-use washer fluid.Water can cause the solutionto freeze and damage thewasher fluid tank and otherparts of the washer system.Also, water does not clean aswell as washer fluid.

. Fill the washer fluid tank onlythree-quarters full when it isvery cold. This allows forfluid expansion if freezingoccurs, which coulddamage the tank if it iscompletely full.

. Do not use engine coolant(antifreeze) in the windshieldwasher. It can damage thewindshield washer systemand paint.

BrakesThis vehicle has disc brakes.Disc brake pads have built-in wearindicators that make a high-pitchedwarning sound when the brake padsare worn and new pads are needed.The sound can come and go or beheard all the time the vehicle ismoving, except when applying thebrake pedal firmly.

{ WARNING

The brake wear warning soundmeans that soon the brakes willnot work well. That could lead toa crash. When the brake wearwarning sound is heard, have thevehicle serviced.

Notice: Continuing to drive withworn-out brake pads could resultin costly brake repair.


10-28 Vehicle Care

Some driving conditions or climatescan cause a brake squeal when thebrakes are first applied or lightlyapplied. This does not meansomething is wrong with the brakes.

Properly torqued wheel nuts arenecessary to help prevent brakepulsation. When tires are rotated,inspect brake pads for wear andevenly tighten wheel nuts in theproper sequence to torquespecifications in Capacities andSpecifications on page 12‑2.

Brake linings should always bereplaced as complete axle sets.

Brake Pedal Travel

See your dealer if the brake pedaldoes not return to normal height,or if there is a rapid increase inpedal travel. This could be a signthat brake service might berequired.

Brake Adjustment

Every time the brakes are applied,with or without the vehicle moving,the brakes adjust for wear.

Replacing Brake System Parts

The braking system on a vehicle iscomplex. Its many parts have to beof top quality and work well togetherif the vehicle is to have really goodbraking. The vehicle was designedand tested with top-quality brakeparts. When parts of the brakingsystem are replaced, be sure to getnew, approved replacement parts.If this is not done, the brakes mightnot work properly. For example,installing disc brake pads that arewrong for the vehicle, can changethe balance between the front andrear brakes — for the worse. Thebraking performance expected canchange in many other ways if thewrong replacement brake parts areinstalled.

Brake Fluid

The brake master cylinder reservoiris filled with DOT 3 brake fluid asindicated on the reservoir cap. SeeEngine Compartment Overview onpage 10‑6 for the location of thereservoir.

There are only two reasons why thebrake fluid level in the reservoirmight go down:. The brake fluid level goes down

because of normal brake liningwear. When new linings areinstalled, the fluid level goesback up.

. A fluid leak in the brakehydraulic system can also causea low fluid level. Have the brakehydraulic system fixed, since aleak means that sooner or laterthe brakes will not work well.


Vehicle Care 10-29

Do not top off the brake fluid.Adding fluid does not correct a leak.If fluid is added when the liningsare worn, there will be too muchfluid when new brake linings areinstalled. Add or remove brake fluid,as necessary, only when work isdone on the brake hydraulic system.

{ WARNING

If too much brake fluid is added,it can spill on the engine andburn, if the engine is hot enough.You or others could be burned,and the vehicle could bedamaged. Add brake fluid onlywhen work is done on the brakehydraulic system.

When the brake fluid falls to a lowlevel, the brake warning light comeson. See Brake System WarningLight on page 5‑22.

What to Add

Use only new DOT 3 brake fluidfrom a sealed container. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑4.

Always clean the brake fluidreservoir cap and the area aroundthe cap before removing it. Thishelps keep dirt from entering thereservoir.

{ WARNING

With the wrong kind of fluid inthe brake hydraulic system, thebrakes might not work well. Thiscould cause a crash. Always usethe proper brake fluid.

Notice. Using the wrong fluid canbadly damage brakehydraulic system parts. Forexample, just a few drops ofmineral-based oil, such asengine oil, in the brakehydraulic system candamage brake hydraulicsystem parts so badly thatthey will have to be replaced.Do not let someone put inthe wrong kind of fluid.

. If brake fluid is spilled on thevehicle's painted surfaces,the paint finish can bedamaged. Be careful not tospill brake fluid on thevehicle. If you do, wash it offimmediately.


10-30 Vehicle Care

BatteryRefer to the replacement numbershown on the original battery labelwhen a new battery is needed. SeeEngine Compartment Overview onpage 10‑6 for battery location.

{ DANGER

Battery posts, terminals, andrelated accessories contain leadand lead compounds, chemicalsknown to the State of California tocause cancer and reproductiveharm. Wash hands after handling.

Vehicle Storage

{ WARNING

Batteries have acid that can burnyou and gas that can explode.You can be badly hurt if you arenot careful. See Jump Starting onpage 10‑92 for tips on workingaround a battery withoutgetting hurt.

Infrequent Usage: Remove theblack, negative (−) cable from thebattery to keep the battery fromrunning down.

Extended Storage: Remove theblack, negative (−) cable from thebattery or use a battery tricklecharger.

All-Wheel Drive

Transfer Case

When to Check and ChangeLubricant

Refer to the Maintenance Scheduleto determine how often to check thelubricant and when to change it.See Scheduled Maintenance onpage 11‑3.

How to Check Lubricant

A. Fill Plug

B. Drain Plug


Vehicle Care 10-31

To get an accurate reading, thevehicle should be on a levelsurface.

If the level is below the bottom ofthe filler plug hole, located on thetransfer case, some lubricant needsto be added. Add enough lubricantto raise the level to the bottom ofthe filler plug hole. A fluid loss couldindicate a problem; check and haveit repaired, if needed.

What to Use

Refer to the Maintenance Scheduleto determine what kind of lubricantto use. See Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 11‑4.

Starter Switch Check

{ WARNING

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle couldmove suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle.

2. Firmly apply both the parkingbrake and the regular brake.See Parking Brake onpage 9‑31.

Do not use the acceleratorpedal, and be ready to turn offthe engine immediately if itstarts.

3. Try to start the engine in eachgear. The vehicle should startonly in P (Park) or N (Neutral).If the vehicle starts in any otherposition, contact your dealer forservice.


10-32 Vehicle Care

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check

{ WARNING

When you are doing this check,the vehicle could begin to move.You or others could be injuredand property could be damaged.Make sure there is room in frontof the vehicle in case it begins toroll. Be ready to apply the regularbrake at once should the vehiclebegin to move.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with thevehicle facing downhill. Keepingyour foot on the regular brake, setthe parking brake.. To check the parking brake's

holding ability: With the enginerunning and the transmission inN (Neutral), slowly remove footpressure from the regular brakepedal. Do this until the vehicle isheld by the parking brake only.

. To check the P (Park)mechanism's holding ability:With the engine running, shift toP (Park). Then release theparking brake followed by theregular brake.

Contact your dealer if service isrequired.

Wiper Blade ReplacementWindshield wiper blades should beinspected for wear or cracking. SeeScheduled Maintenance onpage 11‑3 for more information.

It is a good idea to clean or replacethe wiper blade assembly on aregular basis or when worn. Forproper windshield wiper bladelength and type, see MaintenanceReplacement Parts on page 11‑6.

Notice: Allowing the wiper bladearm to touch the windshield whenno wiper blade is installed coulddamage the windshield. Anydamage that occurs would not becovered by your warranty. Do notallow the wiper blade arm totouch the windshield.


Vehicle Care 10-33

Front Wiper BladeReplacement

To replace the wiper bladeassembly:

1. Pull the windshield wiperassembly away from thewindshield.

2. Press the button in the middle ofthe wiper arm connector, andpull the wiper blade away fromthe arm connector.

3. Remove the wiper blade.

4. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 forwiper blade replacement.

Rear Wiper Blade Replacement

The rear wiper blade and wiper armhave a cover for protection. Thecover must be removed before thewiper blade can be replaced.

To remove the cover:

1. Slide a plastic tool under thecover and push upward tounlock.

2. Slide the cover toward the wiperblade tip to unhook it from theblade assembly.

3. Remove the cover.

4. After replacing the wiper blade,the cover hooks must slide intothe blade assembly slotsand lock.

To remove the wiper blade:

1. Lift the wiper arm away from thewindshield.

A. Wiper Arm

B. Release Lever

C. Blade Assembly


10-34 Vehicle Care

2. Push the release lever (B) todisengage the hook and pushthe wiper arm (A) out of theblade assembly (C).

3. Push the new blade assemblysecurely on the wiper arm untilthe release lever clicks intoplace.

4. Replace the wiper cover.

Headlamp AimingThe headlamp aiming system hasbeen preset at the factory.

If the vehicle is damaged in anaccident, the aim of the headlampscan be affected and adjustmentcould be necessary.

It is recommended that a dealeradjust the headlamps. To re-aim theheadlamps yourself, use thefollowing procedure.

The vehicle should be properlyprepared as follows:. The vehicle should be placed so

the headlamps are 7.6 m (25 ft)from a light colored wall.

. The vehicle must have all fourtires on a level surface which islevel all the way to the wall.

. The vehicle should be placed soit is perpendicular to the wall orother flat surface.

. The vehicle should not have anysnow, ice, or mud on it.

. The vehicle should be fullyassembled and all other workstopped while headlamp aimingis being performed.


Vehicle Care 10-35

. The vehicle should be normallyloaded with a full tank of fuel andone person or 75 kg (160 lbs)sitting on the driver seat.

. Tires should be properly inflated.

Headlamp aiming is done with thevehicle's low-beam headlamps. Thehigh-beam headlamps will becorrectly aimed if the low-beamheadlamps are aimed properly.

To adjust the vertical aim:

1. Open the hood. See Hood onpage 10‑5 for more information.

Base Vehicle (HalogenHeadlamps)

Uplevel Vehicle (HID Headlamps)

2. Locate the aim point at thecenter inner projectorcondensing lens of the low-beamheadlamp (not the outer lens).

3. Measure the distance from theground to the aim dot on thelow‐beam headlamp. Record thedistance.


10-36 Vehicle Care

4. At the wall measure from theground upward (A) to therecorded distance fromStep 3 and mark it.

5. Draw or tape a horizontal line (B)on the wall the width of thevehicle at the height of the markin Step 4.

Notice: Do not cover a headlampto improve beam cut-off whenaiming. Covering a headlamp maycause excessive heat build-upwhich may cause damage to theheadlamp.

6. Turn on the low-beamheadlamps and place a piece ofcardboard or equivalent in frontof the headlamp not beingadjusted. This allows only thebeam of light from the headlampbeing adjusted to be seen on theflat surface.

7. Locate the vertical headlampaiming screws, which are underthe hood near each headlampassembly.


Vehicle Care 10-37

For the vehicle equipped with abase level lamp (halogen bulb),there will be one verticalheadlamp aiming screw (V1).The aiming screw (V1) isadjusted from the enginecompartment side of thebeauty cover.

For the vehicle equipped with anuplevel headlamp (HID), therewill be two vertical headlampaiming screws (V1 and V2). Theaiming screw (V2) is adjustedthrough the access hole in thebeauty cover.

The adjustment screw can beturned with a 6 mm hex key.

8. For the base vehicle, turn thevertical aiming screw (V1) untilthe headlamp beam is aimed tothe horizontal tape line. Turn itclockwise or counterclockwise toraise or lower the angle ofthe beam.

For the uplevel vehicle, turn thevertical aiming screws (V1 andV2) simultaneously until theheadlamp beam is aimed to thehorizontal tape line. Turn themclockwise or counterclockwise toraise or lower the angle ofthe beam.

9. Make sure that the light from theheadlamp is positioned at thebottom edge of the horizontaltape line. The lamp on theleft (A) shows the correctheadlamp aim. The lamp on theright (B) shows the incorrectheadlamp aim.

10. Repeat Steps 7 through 9 forthe opposite headlamp.


10-38 Vehicle Care

Bulb ReplacementFor the proper type of replacementbulbs, see Replacement Bulbs onpage 10‑43.

For any bulb‐changing procedurenot listed in this section, contactyour dealer.

Halogen Bulbs

{ WARNING

Halogen bulbs have pressurizedgas inside and can burst if youdrop or scratch the bulb. You orothers could be injured. Be sureto read and follow the instructionson the bulb package.

Headlamps

Base Headlamp Assembly (DriverSide Shown, Passenger SideSimilar)

A. Turn Signal Lamp

B. Low‐Beam Headlamp/DaytimeRunning Lamp (DRL)

C. High‐Beam Headlamp

Uplevel Headlamp Assembly(Driver Side Shown, PassengerSide Similar)

A. Turn Signal Lamp

B. High/Low‐Beam Headlamp

C. Daytime Running Lamp (DRL)


Vehicle Care 10-39

Low-Beam Headlamps/DaytimeRunning Lamps (DRL) (Base)

1. Remove the protective cap fromthe back of the headlampassembly.

2. Disconnect the electricalconnector.

3. Remove the bulb socket fromthe headlamp assembly.

4. Replace the bulb in the bulbsocket.

5. Install the bulb socket in theheadlamp assembly.

6. Connect the electrical connector.

7. Install the protective cap in theback of the headlamp assembly.

High-Beam Headlamps (Base)

1. Disconnect the electricalconnector for the low-beam/Daytime Running Lamp (DRL)from the back of the headlampassembly.

2. Remove the bulb socket fromthe headlamp assembly.




High/Low‐Beam Headlamps(Uplevel)

The high/low‐beam headlamps onthe uplevel are High IntensityDischarge (HID) and should bereplaced at the dealer.

Daytime Running Lamp (DRL)(Uplevel)

To replace the DaytimeRunning Lamp:

1. Disconnect the electricalconnector for the DRL bulbreplacement from the back of theheadlamp assembly.

2. Remove the DRL bulb socketfrom the headlamp assembly.





10-40 Vehicle Care

Front Turn Signal Lamp(Base and Uplevel)

To replace the front turnsignal lamp:

1. Remove the turn signal lampbulb socket from the headlampassembly.

2. Remove the turn signal lampbulb from the socket.



Taillamps and Turn SignalLamps

A. Stoplamp

B. Turn Signal Lamp

To replace one of these bulbs:

1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgateon page 2‑12.

A. Taillamp Assembly

B. Taillamp Cover

2. Remove the taillamp cover (B)from the lamp assembly (A) bypulling rearward to unfasten itfrom the tabs and clips.


Vehicle Care 10-41

3. Remove the two screws from thetaillamp assembly.

4. Pull the taillamp assemblystraight back to remove.

A. Stoplamp

B. Turn Signal Lamp

5. Turn the turn stoplamp (A) orturn signal lamp (B) bulb socketcounterclockwise to remove itfrom the taillamp assembly.

6. Pull the bulb straight out fromthe socket.

7. Press a new bulb into thesocket, insert it into the taillampassembly, and turn the bulbsocket clockwise.

8. Reinstall the taillamp assemblyand tighten the screws.

9. Reinstall the taillamp cover bysnapping it into place.


10-42 Vehicle Care

Back-Up Lamps

To replace one of these bulbs:


2. Remove the top trim panel fromthe liftgate to gain access tothe bulb.

3. Turn the back‐up bulb socketcounterclockwise to remove itfrom the taillamp assembly.

4. Pull the bulb straight out fromthe socket.

5. Press a new bulb into thesocket, insert it into the taillampassembly, and turn the bulbsocket clockwise until it clicks.

6. Reinstall the top trim panel intothe liftgate by locking it intoplace.

License Plate LampTo replace one of these bulbs:

1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgateon page 2‑12 for moreinformation.

Passenger Side Shown, DriverSide Similar

2. Push the left end of the lampassembly toward the right.

3. Turn the lamp assembly down toremove it from the liftgate.


Vehicle Care 10-43

A. Bulb Socket

B. Bulb

C. Lamp Assembly

4. Turn the bulb socket (A)counterclockwise to remove itfrom the lamp assembly (C).

5. Pull the bulb (B) straight out ofthe bulb socket.

6. Push the replacement bulbstraight into the bulb socket andturn the bulb socket clockwise toinstall it into the lamp assembly.

7. Turn the lamp assembly into theliftgate engaging the clip sidefirst.

8. Push on the lamp side oppositethe clip until the lamp assemblylocks into place.

Replacement Bulbs

Exterior LampBulb

Number

Back-Up Lamp 912

Base LevelHeadlampHigh-beam

H9

Exterior LampBulb

Number

Base LevelHeadlampLow-beam/DaytimeRunningLamp (DRL)

H11

Daytime RunningLamp (DRL) forUplevel System

W21/5W LL(T‐20)

License Plate Lamp W5W

Stoplamp/Taillamp/Turn Signal Rear

7440

Turn Signal Front(Amber)

7443NA

For replacement bulbs not listedhere, contact your dealer.


10-44 Vehicle Care

Electrical System

Electrical SystemOverloadThe vehicle has fuses and circuitbreakers to protect against anelectrical system overload.

When the current electrical load istoo heavy, the circuit breaker opensand closes, protecting the circuituntil the current load returns tonormal or the problem is fixed.This greatly reduces the chance ofcircuit overload and fire caused byelectrical problems.

Fuses and circuit breakers protectthe following in the vehicle:. Headlamp Wiring. Windshield Wiper Motor. Power Windows and Other

Power Accessories

Replace a bad fuse with a new oneof the identical size and rating.

If there is a problem on the roadand a fuse needs to be replaced,the same amperage fuse can beborrowed. Choose some feature ofthe vehicle that is not needed to useand replace it as soon as possible.

Headlamp Wiring

An electrical overload may causethe lamps to go on and off, or insome cases to remain off. Have theheadlamp wiring checked right awayif the lamps go on and off orremain off.

Windshield Wipers

If the wiper motor overheats due toheavy snow or ice, the windshieldwipers will stop until the motor coolsand will then restart.

Although the circuit is protectedfrom electrical overload, overloaddue to heavy snow or ice maycause wiper linkage damage.Always clear ice and heavy snowfrom the windshield before usingthe windshield wipers.

If the overload is caused by anelectrical problem and not snow orice, be sure to get it fixed.

Fuses and CircuitBreakersThe wiring circuits in the vehicle areprotected from short circuits by acombination of fuses and circuitbreakers. This greatly reduces thechance of damage caused byelectrical problems.

To check a fuse, look at thesilver-colored band inside the fuse.If the band is broken or melted,replace the fuse. Be sure to replacea bad fuse with a new one of theidentical size and rating.

Fuses of the same amperagecan be temporarily borrowed fromanother fuse location, if a fuse goesout. Replace the fuse as soon asyou can.


Vehicle Care 10-45

To identify and check fuses, circuitbreakers, and relays, see EngineCompartment Fuse Block onpage 10‑45 and Rear CompartmentFuse Block on page 10‑49.

Engine CompartmentFuse BlockTo remove the fuse block cover,press the clips on the cover and liftit straight up.

Notice: Spilling liquid on anyelectrical component on thevehicle may damage it. Alwayskeep the covers on any electricalcomponent.

Engine Compartment Fuse Block

The vehicle may not be equippedwith all of the fuses, relays, andfeatures shown.

J-CaseFuses

Usage

6 Wiper

12 Vacuum Pump

J-CaseFuses

Usage

24Antilock BrakeSystem Pump

25Rear ElectricalCenter 1


10-46 Vehicle Care

J-CaseFuses

Usage

26Rear ElectricalCenter 2

27 Not Used

41 Cooling Fan 2 (LF1)

42 Starter

43 Not Used

44 Not Used


59SecondaryAIR Pump

Mini Fuses Usage

1Engine ControlModule Battery

2TransmissionControl ModuleBattery

3Mass Air FlowSensor

4 Afterboil Pump

Mini Fuses Usage

5 Engine ControlModule Run Crank

7Post–CatalyticConverter O2Sensor

8Pre–CatalyticConverter O2Sensor

9Engine ControlModule Powertrain

10 Fuel Injectors–Even

11 Fuel Injectors-Odd

13 Washer

16

Instrument PanelCluster/MalfunctionIndicator Lamp/Ignition

17 Air Quality Sensor

18 Headlamp Washer

19TransmissionControl Module RunCrank

Mini Fuses Usage

20 Rear ElectricalCenter Run Crank

23 Heater Motor

30 Switch Back Light

32Battery Sense(Regulated VoltageControl)

33

Adaptive ForwardLighting/AdaptiveHeadlamp LevelingModule

34 Body ControlModule 7

35Electronic BrakeControl Module

46Low-BeamHeadlamp‐Right

47Low-BeamHeadlamp‐Left

50 Front Fog Lamps

51 Horn


Vehicle Care 10-47

Mini Fuses Usage

52 Fuel System ControlModule

53 Headlamp Level

54Sensing DiagnosticModule Ignition

55High-BeamHeadlamp-Right

56High-BeamHeadlamp-Left

57Ignition SteeringColumn Lock

65 Trailer RightStoplamp

66 Trailer Left Stoplamp

67 Spare

68 Spare

69 Spare

70 Spare

71 Spare

72 Spare

Mini Relays Usage

7 Powertrain



15 Run/Crank

16SecondaryAIR Pump

MicroRelays

Usage

2 Vacuum Pump

4 Wiper Control

5 Wiper Speed

10 Starter

12 Cool Fan 3 (LF1)

14 Low Beam/HID

U MicroRelays

Usage

8 Headlamp Washer

Instrument Panel FuseBlock

The instrument panel fuse blockis located in the center consolebetween the driver and passengerseats. To access the fuses, openthe fuse panel door from thepassenger side by pulling it out.

To reinstall the door, push the doorback into its original location.

The vehicle may not be equippedwith all of the fuses, relays andfeatures shown.


10-48 Vehicle Care

Instrument Panel Fuse Block

Mini Fuses Usage

DISPLY Display

S/ROOF Sun Roof

RVC MIRRRear VisionCamera Mirror

UHPUniversalHandsfree Phone

RDO Radio

APO ‐ IPAuxiliary PowerOutlet ‐ InstrumentPanel

APO ‐ CNSLAuxiliary PowerOutlet ‐ FloorConsole

BCM 3Body ControlModule 3



ONSTAROnStar® System(If Equipped)


Vehicle Care 10-49

Mini Fuses Usage

RAIN SNSR Rain Sensor


ESCLElectronic SteeringColumn Lock

AIRBAGSensing andDiagnostic Module

DLCData LinkConnection

IPCInstrument PanelCluster

SPARE Not Used



Mini Fuses Usage

AMP/RDO Amplifier/Radio

HVACHeating Ventilation& Air Conditioning

J—CaseFuses

Usage


FRT BLWR Front Blower

Relays Usage

LOGIC RLY Logistics Relay

RAP/ACCY RLY

RetainedAccessory Power/Accessory Relay

Rear Compartment FuseBlock

The rear compartment fuse block islocated in the cargo area, on thedriver side of the vehicle behind thelower trim panel. To open, turn thelatch with a flat bladed tool and pullthe trim panel from the edges to foldit down.

The vehicle may not be equippedwith all of the fuses, relays, andfeatures shown.


10-50 Vehicle Care

Rear Compartment Fuse Block

Fuses Usage

SPAREFUSES

Spare Fuses

AOS MDLAutomatic OccupantSensing Module

SPARE Not Used

SPARE Not Used

SPARE Not Used

PASS DRWDO SW

Passenger DoorWindow Switch

DRVPWR SEAT

Driver Power Seat

PASS DRPWR SEAT

Passenger/DriverPower Seats

MDL TRLR Trailer Module

RPA MDLRear Parking AssistModule

RDM Rear Drive Module

PRKLPS TRLR

Trailer Park Lamps

FUELPUMP

Fuel Pump

Fuses Usage

* SEC Security

INFOTMNT Infotainment

* TRLR EXP Trailer Export

WPR REAR Rear Wiper

MIRWDO MDL

Mirror WindowModule

VICSVehicle InformationCommunicationsSystem (Export)

CNSTRVENT

Canister Vent

LGMLOGIC

Lift Gate ModuleLogic

CAMERA Rear Vision Camera

FRTVENT SEAT

Front VentilatedSeats

TRLR MDL Trailer Module

SADS MDLSemi ActiveDamping SystemModule


Vehicle Care 10-51

Fuses Usage

RRHTD SEAT

Rear Heated Seats

FRTHTD SEAT

Front Heated Seats

THEFTHORN

Theft Horn

* LGATE Liftgate

SHUNT Shunt

REARDEFOG

Rear Defog

* BCMTHEFT

Body ControlModule Theft

* TRLR 2 Trailer 2

UGDOUniversal GarageDoor Opener

RT WDO Right Window

Fuses Usage

PRKBRK MDL

Park Brake Module

SPARE Not Used

LT WDO Left Window

IGN/THEFT 1

Ignition/Theft 1

LGATEMDL

Liftgate Module

IGN/THEFT 2

Ignition/Theft 2

SPARE Not Used

HTD MIR Heated Mirror

AUX PWRAuxiliary PowerOutlet

Relays Usage

SPARE Not Used

* FUELPUMP

Fuel Pump

WPRCONTRL Wiper Control

* RUN RLY Run Relay

LOGICLogistic Relay(Export)

DEFOGREAR

Rear WindowDefogger

*‐Denotes up‐level content.


10-52 Vehicle Care

Wheels and Tires

TiresEvery new Saab vehicle hashigh-quality tires made by aleading tire manufacturer.See the warranty manual forinformation regarding the tirewarranty and where to getservice. For additionalinformation refer to thetire manufacturer.

{ WARNING

. Poorly maintained andimproperly used tires aredangerous.

. Overloading the tires cancause overheating as a resultof too much flexing. Therecould be a blowout and aserious crash. See VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑12.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Underinflated tires pose thesame danger as overloadedtires. The resulting crashcould cause serious injury.Check all tires frequently tomaintain the recommendedpressure. Tire pressureshould be checked when thetires are cold.

. Overinflated tires are morelikely to be cut, punctured,or broken by a suddenimpact — such as whenhitting a pothole. Keep tiresat the recommendedpressure.

. Worn or old tires can cause acrash. If the tread is badlyworn, replace them.

. Replace any tires that havebeen damaged by impactswith potholes, curbs, etc.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Improperly repaired tires cancause a crash. Only thedealer or an authorized tireservice center should repair,replace, dismount, andmount the tires.

. Do not spin the tires inexcess of 55 km/h (35 mph)on slippery surfaces suchas snow, mud, ice, etc.Excessive spinning maycause the tires to explode.

See Tire Pressure forHigh-Speed Operation onpage 10‑61 for inflationpressure adjustment forhigh-speed driving.


Vehicle Care 10-53

Tire Sidewall LabelingUseful information about a tire ismolded into its sidewall. Theexamples show a typicalpassenger vehicle tire and acompact spare tire sidewall.

Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire Example

(A) Tire Size: The tire size is acombination of letters andnumbers used to define aparticular tire's width, height,aspect ratio, construction type,

and service description. See the“Tire Size” illustration later in thissection for more detail.

(B) TPC Spec (TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification): Originalequipment tires designed tospecific tire performance criteriahave a TPC specification codemolded onto the sidewall. TPCspecifications meet or exceed allfederal safety guidelines.

(C) DOT (Department ofTransportation): TheDepartment of Transportation(DOT) code indicates thatthe tire is in compliancewith the U.S. Department ofTransportation Motor VehicleSafety Standards.

(D) Tire Identification Number(TIN): The letters and numbersfollowing the DOT (Departmentof Transportation) code arethe Tire Identification Number(TIN). The TIN shows themanufacturer and plant code,tire size, and date the tire wasmanufactured. The TIN ismolded onto both sides of thetire, although only one side mayhave the date of manufacture.

(E) Tire Ply Material: The typeof cord and number of plies inthe sidewall and under the tread.

(F) Uniform Tire QualityGrading (UTQG): Tiremanufacturers are required tograde tires based on threeperformance factors: treadwear,traction, and temperatureresistance. For more informationsee Uniform Tire QualityGrading on page 10‑72.


10-54 Vehicle Care

(G) Maximum Cold InflationLoad Limit: Maximum loadthat can be carried and themaximum pressure needed tosupport that load.

Compact Spare Tire Example

(A) Tire Ply Material: The typeof cord and number of plies inthe sidewall and under the tread.

(B) Temporary Use Only:The compact spare tire ortemporary use tire has a treadlife of approximately 5 000 km(3,000 mi) and should not bedriven at speeds over 105 km/h(65 mph). The compact sparetire is for emergency use whena regular road tire has lost airand gone flat. If the vehiclehas a compact spare tire,see Compact Spare Tire onpage 10‑92 and If a Tire GoesFlat on page 10‑75.

(C) Tire Identification Number(TIN): The letters and numbersfollowing the DOT (Departmentof Transportation) code are theTire Identification Number (TIN).

The TIN shows themanufacturer and plantcode, tire size, and date thetire was manufactured. The TINis molded onto both sides of thetire, although only one side mayhave the date of manufacture.

(D) Maximum Cold InflationLoad Limit: Maximum loadthat can be carried and themaximum pressure needed tosupport that load.

(E) Tire Inflation: Thetemporary use tire or compactspare tire should be inflated to420 kPa (60 psi). For moreinformation on tire pressureand inflation see Tire Pressureon page 10‑59.


Vehicle Care 10-55

(F) Tire Size: A combination ofletters and numbers define atire's width, height, aspect ratio,construction type, and servicedescription. The letter T as thefirst character in the tire sizemeans the tire is for temporaryuse only.

(G) TPC Spec (TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification): Originalequipment tires designed tospecific tire performance criteriahave a TPC specification codemolded onto the sidewall. TPCspecifications meet or exceedall federal safety guidelines.

Tire Designations

Tire Size

The following is an exampleof a typical passenger vehicletire size.

(A) Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire:The United States version of ametric tire sizing system. Theletter P as the first character inthe tire size means a passengervehicle tire engineered tostandards set by the U.S. Tireand Rim Association.

(B) Tire Width: The three‐digitnumber indicates the tire sectionwidth in millimeters fromsidewall to sidewall.

(C) Aspect Ratio: A two‐digitnumber that indicates the tireheight‐to‐width measurements.For example, if the tire sizeaspect ratio is 60, as shown initem C of the illustration, it wouldmean that the tire's sidewall is60 percent as high as it is wide.

(D) Construction Code: Aletter code is used to indicatethe type of ply construction inthe tire. The letter R meansradial ply construction; theletter D means diagonal or biasply construction; and the letter Bmeans belted‐bias plyconstruction.


10-56 Vehicle Care

(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter ofthe wheel in inches.

(F) Service Description: Thesecharacters represent the loadindex and speed rating of thetire. The load index representsthe load carrying capacity a tireis certified to carry. The speedrating is the maximum speed atire is certified to carry a load.

Tire Terminology andDefinitionsAir Pressure: The amountof air inside the tire pressingoutward on each square inchof the tire. Air pressure isexpressed in kPa (kilopascal)or psi (pounds per square inch).

Accessory Weight: Thecombined weight of optionalaccessories. Some examplesof optional accessories areautomatic transmission, powersteering, power brakes, powerwindows, power seats, and airconditioning.

Aspect Ratio: The relationshipof a tire's height to its width.

Belt: A rubber coated layer ofcords that is located betweenthe plies and the tread. Cordsmay be made from steel or otherreinforcing materials.

Bead: The tire bead containssteel wires wrapped by steelcords that hold the tire ontothe rim.

Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tirein which the plies are laid atalternate angles less than90 degrees to the centerlineof the tread.

Cold Tire Pressure: Theamount of air pressure in a tire,measured in kPa (kilopascal)or psi (pounds per square inch)before a tire has built up heatfrom driving. See Tire Pressureon page 10‑59.

Curb Weight: The weight of amotor vehicle with standard andoptional equipment including themaximum capacity of fuel, oil,and coolant, but withoutpassengers and cargo.


Vehicle Care 10-57

DOT Markings: A codemolded into the sidewall ofa tire signifying that the tireis in compliance with the U.S.Department of Transportation(DOT) Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards. The DOT codeincludes the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN), an alphanumericdesignator which can alsoidentify the tire manufacturer,production plant, brand, anddate of production.

GVWR: Gross Vehicle WeightRating. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9‑12.

GAWR FRT: Gross Axle WeightRating for the front axle. SeeVehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑12.

GAWR RR: Gross Axle WeightRating for the rear axle. SeeVehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑12.

Intended Outboard Sidewall:The side of an asymmetrical tire,that must always face outwardwhen mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa): The metricunit for air pressure.

Light Truck (LT‐Metric) Tire:A tire used on light duty trucksand some multipurposepassenger vehicles.

Load Index: An assignednumber ranging from 1 to 279that corresponds to the loadcarrying capacity of a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure:The maximum air pressure towhich a cold tire can be inflated.The maximum air pressure ismolded onto the sidewall.

Maximum Load Rating:The load rating for a tire at themaximum permissible inflationpressure for that tire.

Maximum Loaded VehicleWeight: The sum of curbweight, accessory weight,vehicle capacity weight, andproduction options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight: Thenumber of occupants a vehicleis designed to seat multiplied by68 kg (150 lbs). See VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑12.

Occupant Distribution:Designated seating positions.

Outward Facing Sidewall: Theside of an asymmetrical tire thathas a particular side that facesoutward when mounted on avehicle. The side of the tirethat contains a whitewall,bears white lettering, or bearsmanufacturer, brand, and/ormodel name molding that ishigher or deeper than the samemoldings on the other sidewallof the tire.


10-58 Vehicle Care

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire:A tire used on passenger carsand some light duty trucks andmultipurpose vehicles.

Recommended InflationPressure: Vehiclemanufacturer's recommendedtire inflation pressure as shownon the tire placard. See TirePressure on page 10‑59andVehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑12.

Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatictire in which the ply cords thatextend to the beads are laid at90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Rim: A metal support for a tireand upon which the tire beadsare seated.

Sidewall: The portion of a tirebetween the tread and the bead.

Speed Rating: Analphanumeric code assignedto a tire indicating the maximumspeed at which a tire canoperate.

Traction: The friction betweenthe tire and the road surface.The amount of grip provided.

Tread: The portion of a tirethat comes into contact withthe road.

Treadwear Indicators: Narrowbands, sometimes called wearbars, that show across the treadof a tire when only 1.6 mm(1/16 in) of tread remains.See When It Is Time for NewTires on page 10‑68.

UTQGS (Uniform TireQuality Grading Standards):A tire information systemthat provides consumers withratings for a tire's traction,temperature, and treadwear.Ratings are determined bytire manufacturers usinggovernment testing procedures.The ratings are molded intothe sidewall of the tire. SeeUniform Tire QualityGrading on page 10‑72.

Vehicle Capacity Weight:The number of designatedseating positions multiplied by68 kg (150 lbs) plus the ratedcargo load. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑12.


Vehicle Care 10-59

Vehicle Maximum Load on theTire: Load on an individual tiredue to curb weight, accessoryweight, occupant weight, andcargo weight.

Vehicle Placard: A labelpermanently attached to avehicle showing the vehiclecapacity weight and theoriginal equipment tire sizeand recommended inflationpressure. See “Tire and LoadingInformation Label” under VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑12.

Tire PressureTires need the correct amount ofair pressure to operateeffectively.

Notice: Neither tireunderinflation noroverinflation is good.Underinflated tires, or tiresthat do not have enough air,can result in:. Tire overloading andoverheating which couldlead to a blowout.

. Premature orirregular wear.

. Poor handling.

. Reduced fuel economy.

Overinflated tires, or tires thathave too much air, canresult in:. Unusual wear.. Poor handling.. Rough ride.. Needless damage fromroad hazards.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label on thevehicle indicates the originalequipment tires and the correctcold tire inflation pressures.The recommended pressureis the minimum air pressureneeded to support the vehicle'smaximum load carrying capacity.


10-60 Vehicle Care

For additional informationregarding how much weightthe vehicle can carry, and anexample of the Tire and LoadingInformation label, see VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑12. Howthe vehicle is loaded affectsvehicle handling and ridecomfort. Never load the vehiclewith more weight than it wasdesigned to carry.

When to Check

Check the tires once a month ormore. Do not forget the compactspare tire, if the vehicle has one.The compact spare should be at420 kPa (60 psi). For additionalinformation regarding thecompact spare tire, seeCompact Spare Tire onpage 10‑92.

How to Check

Use a good quality pocket-typegauge to check tire pressure.Proper tire inflation cannot bedetermined by looking at the tire.Check the tire inflation pressurewhen the tires are cold, meaningthe vehicle has not been drivenfor at least three hours or nomore than 1.6 km (1 mi).

Remove the valve cap from thetire valve stem. Press the tiregauge firmly onto the valve toget a pressure measurement.

If the cold tire inflation pressurematches the recommendedpressure on the Tire andLoading Information label, nofurther adjustment is necessary.If the inflation pressure is low,add air until the recommendedpressure is reached. If theinflation pressure is high, presson the metal stem in the centerof the tire valve to release air.

Re‐check the tire pressure withthe tire gauge.

Return the valve caps on thevalve stems to prevent leaksand keep out dirt and moisture.


Vehicle Care 10-61

Tire Pressure forHigh-Speed Operation

{ WARNING

Driving at high speeds, 160 km/h(100mph) or higher, puts anadditional strain on tires.Sustained high-speed drivingcauses excessive heat buildupand can cause sudden tire failure.You could have a crash and youor others could be killed. Somehigh-speed rated tires requireinflation pressure adjustment forhigh-speed operation. Whenspeed limits and road conditionsare such that a vehicle can bedriven at high speeds, make surethe tires are rated for high-speedoperation, in excellent condition,and set to the correct cold tireinflation pressure for thevehicle load.

Vehicles with P235/65R18,P235/55R20, or 235/55R20 sizetires require inflation pressureadjustment when driving the vehicleat speeds of 160 km/h (100 mph) orhigher. Set the cold inflationpressure to the maximum inflationpressure shown on the tire sidewall,or 260 kPa (38 psi), whichever islower. Return the tires to therecommended cold tire inflationpressure when high-speed drivinghas ended. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9‑12 and Tire Pressure onpage 10‑59.

The maximum load and inflationpressure is molded on the tiresidewall, in small letters, nearthe rim flange. It will readsomething like this: Maximum load690 kg (1521 lbs) 300 kPa (44 psi)Max. Press.

Tire Pressure MonitorSystemThe Tire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS) uses radio and sensortechnology to check tire pressurelevels. The TPMS sensors monitorthe air pressure in your tires andtransmit tire pressure readings to areceiver located in the vehicle.

Each tire, including the spare(if provided), should be checkedmonthly when cold and inflated tothe inflation pressure recommendedby the vehicle manufacturer onthe vehicle placard or tire inflationpressure label. (If your vehicle hastires of a different size than the sizeindicated on the vehicle placard ortire inflation pressure label, youshould determine the proper tireinflation pressure for those tires.)


10-62 Vehicle Care

As an added safety feature, yourvehicle has been equipped with atire pressure monitoring system(TPMS) that illuminates a low tirepressure telltale when one ormore of your tires is significantlyunder‐inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tirepressure telltale illuminates, youshould stop and check your tiresas soon as possible, and inflatethem to the proper pressure. Drivingon a significantly under‐inflated tirecauses the tire to overheat and canlead to tire failure. Under‐inflationalso reduces fuel efficiency andtire tread life, and may affect thevehicle's handling and stoppingability.

Please note that the TPMS isnot a substitute for proper tiremaintenance, and it is the driver'sresponsibility to maintain correct tirepressure, even if under‐inflation hasnot reached the level to triggerillumination of the TPMS low tirepressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also beenequipped with a TPMS malfunctionindicator to indicate when thesystem is not operating properly.The TPMS malfunction indicator iscombined with the low tire pressuretelltale. When the system detects amalfunction, the telltale will flash forapproximately one minute and thenremain continuously illuminated.This sequence will continue uponsubsequent vehicle start‐ups aslong as the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicatoris illuminated, the system maynot be able to detect or signal lowtire pressure as intended. TPMSmalfunctions may occur for a varietyof reasons, including the installationof replacement or alternate tires orwheels on the vehicle that preventthe TPMS from functioning properly.

Always check the TPMS malfunctiontelltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement oralternate tires and wheels allowthe TPMS to continue to functionproperly.

See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation on page 10‑63 foradditional information.

Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) andIndustry Canada

See Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑12 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-210/220/310.


Vehicle Care 10-63

Tire Pressure MonitorOperationThis vehicle may have a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS).The TPMS is designed to warn thedriver when a low tire pressurecondition exists. TPMS sensors aremounted onto each tire and wheelassembly, excluding the spare tireand wheel assembly. The TPMSsensors monitor the air pressurein the tires and transmit the tirepressure readings to a receiverlocated in the vehicle.

When a low tire pressure conditionis detected, the TPMS illuminatesthe low tire pressure warning lightlocated on the instrument cluster.If the warning light comes on, stopas soon as possible and inflatethe tires to the recommendedpressure shown on the tire loadinginformation label. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑12.

A message to check the pressuredisplays in the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). The low tire pressurewarning light and the DIC warningmessage come on at each ignitioncycle until the tires are inflated tothe correct inflation pressure. Usingthe DIC, tire pressure levels can beviewed. For additional informationand details about the DIC operationand displays see Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5‑29.

The low tire pressure warning lightmay come on in cool weather whenthe vehicle is first started, and thenturn off as the vehicle is driven.This could be an early indicator thatthe air pressure is getting low andneeds to be inflated to the properpressure.


10-64 Vehicle Care

A Tire and Loading Informationlabel shows the size of the originalequipment tires and the correctinflation pressure for the tires whenthey are cold. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑12, for an exampleof the Tire and Loading Informationlabel and its location. Also see TirePressure on page 10‑59.

The TPMS can warn about alow tire pressure condition butit does not replace normal tiremaintenance. See Tire Inspectionon page 10‑67, Tire Rotation onpage 10‑67 and Tires onpage 10‑52.

Notice: Tire sealant materials arenot all the same. A non-approvedtire sealant could damage theTPMS sensors. TPMS sensordamage caused by using anincorrect tire sealant is notcovered by the vehiclewarranty. Always use only theSaab-approved tire sealantavailable through your dealeror included in the vehicle.

Factory-installed Tire Inflator Kitsuse a Saab approved liquid tiresealant. Using non-approved tiresealants could damage the TPMSsensors. See Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit on page 10‑77 forinformation regarding the inflator kitmaterials and instructions.

TPMS Malfunction Light andMessage

The TPMS will not function properlyif one or more of the TPMS sensorsare missing or inoperable. When thesystem detects a malfunction, thelow tire pressure warning lightflashes for about one minute andthen stays on for the remainder ofthe ignition cycle. A DIC warningmessage also displays. Themalfunction light and DIC warningmessage come on at each ignitioncycle until the problem is corrected.Some of the conditions that cancause these to come on are:. One of the road tires has been

replaced with the spare tire.The spare tire does not have aTPMS sensor. The malfunctionlight and the DIC messageshould go off after the roadtire is replaced and the sensormatching process is performedsuccessfully. See "TPMS SensorMatching Process" later in thissection.


Vehicle Care 10-65

. The TPMS sensor matchingprocess was not done ornot completed successfullyafter rotating the tires. Themalfunction light and the DICmessage should go off aftersuccessfully completing thesensor matching process. See"TPMS Sensor MatchingProcess" later in this section.

. One or more TPMS sensorsare missing or damaged. Themalfunction light and the DICmessage should go off when theTPMS sensors are installed andthe sensor matching process isperformed successfully. Seeyour dealer for service.

. Replacement tires or wheels donot match the original equipmenttires or wheels. Tires and wheelsother than those recommendedcould prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly. See BuyingNew Tires on page 10‑69.

. Operating electronic devices orbeing near facilities using radiowave frequencies similar to theTPMS could cause the TPMSsensors to malfunction.

If the TPMS is not functioningproperly, it cannot detect or signal alow tire condition. See your dealerfor service if the TPMS malfunctionlight and DIC message come onand stay on.

TPMS Sensor MatchingProcess

Each TPMS sensor has a uniqueidentification code. The identificationcode needs to be matched to anew tire/wheel position after rotatingthe vehicle’s tires or replacingone or more of the TPMS sensors.Also, the TPMS sensor matchingprocess should be performed afterreplacing a spare tire with a roadtire containing the TPMS sensor.The malfunction light and the DICmessage should go off at the nextignition cycle. The sensors arematched to the tire/wheel positions,using a TPMS relearn tool, in thefollowing order: driver side front tire,passenger side front tire, passengerside rear tire, and driver side rear.See your dealer for service or topurchase a relearn tool.


10-66 Vehicle Care

There are two minutes to matchthe first tire/wheel position, andfive minutes overall to match allfour tire/wheel positions. If it takeslonger, the matching process stopsand must be restarted.

The TPMS sensor matchingprocess is:

1. Set the parking brake.

2. Place the vehicle power mode inSTART. See Ignition Positionson page 9‑18.

3. Select the vehicle informationmenu using the menu button.

4. Select the tire pressure screenusing the up/down thumbwheel.

5. Press and hold SET/CLR tobegin the sensor matchingprocess.

6. Press SET/CLR to confirmselection. The horn sounds twiceto signal the receiver is inrelearn mode and TIRELEARNING ACTIVE messagedisplays on the DIC screen.

7. Start with the driver sidefront tire.

8. Place the relearn tool againstthe tire sidewall, near the valvestem. Then press the button toactivate the TPMS sensor.A horn chirp confirms that thesensor identification code hasbeen matched to this tire andwheel position.

9. Proceed to the passenger sidefront tire, and repeat theprocedure in Step 8.

10. Proceed to the passenger siderear tire, and repeat theprocedure in Step 8.

11. Proceed to the driver side reartire, and repeat the procedurein Step 8. The horn soundstwo times to indicate thesensor identification code hasbeen matched to the driverside rear tire, and the TPMSsensor matching process isno longer active. The TIRELEARNING ACTIVE messageon the DIC display screengoes off.

12. Press STOP to turn theignition off.

13. Set all four tires to therecommended air pressurelevel as indicated on the Tireand Loading Information label.


Vehicle Care 10-67

Tire InspectionWe recommend that the tires,including the spare tire, if thevehicle has one, be inspectedfor signs of wear or damage atleast once a month.

Replace the tire if:. The indicators at three or

more places around the tirecan be seen.

. There is cord or fabricshowing through the tire'srubber.

. The tread or sidewall iscracked, cut, or snaggeddeep enough to show cordor fabric.

. The tire has a bump, bulge,or split.

. The tire has a puncture, cut,or other damage that cannotbe repaired well because ofthe size or location of thedamage.

Tire RotationTires should be rotated every12 000 km (7,500 mi). SeeScheduled Maintenance onpage 11‑3.

Tires are rotated to achieve auniform wear for all tires. Thefirst rotation is the mostimportant.

Any time unusual wear isnoticed, rotate the tires assoon as possible and check thewheel alignment. Also check fordamaged tires or wheels. Alsocheck for damaged tires orwheels. See When It Is Time forNew Tires on page 10‑68 andWheel Replacement onpage 10‑74.

Use this rotation pattern whenrotating the tires.


10-68 Vehicle Care

Do not include the compactspare tire in the tire rotation.

Adjust the front and rear tiresto the recommended inflationpressure on the Tire andLoading Information label afterthe tires have been rotated. SeeTire Pressure on page 10‑59and Vehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑12.

Reset the Tire Pressure MonitorSystem. See Tire PressureMonitor Operation onpage 10‑63.

Make certain that all wheelnuts are properly tightened.See “Wheel Nut Torque” underCapacities and Specifications onpage 12‑2.

{ WARNING

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could comeoff and cause an accident. Whenchanging a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places where thewheel attaches to the vehicle. Inan emergency, a cloth or a papertowel can be used; however, usea scraper or wire brush later toremove all rust or dirt.

Lightly coat the center of thewheel hub with wheel bearinggrease after a wheel changeor tire rotation to preventcorrosion or rust build-up.Do not get grease on the flatwheel mounting surface or onthe wheel nuts or bolts.

When It Is Time for NewTiresFactors such as maintenance,temperatures, driving speeds,vehicle loading, and road conditionsaffect the wear rate of the tires.

Treadwear indicators are one way totell when it is time for new tires.Treadwear indicators appear whenthe tires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 in)or less of tread remaining. See TireInspection on page 10‑67 and TireRotation on page 10‑67 for moreinformation.


Vehicle Care 10-69

The rubber in tires ages over time.This also applies for the spare tire,if the vehicle has one, even if it isnever used. Multiple conditionsincluding temperatures, loadingconditions, and inflation pressuremaintenance affect how fast agingtakes place. Tires will typicallyneed to be replaced due to wearbefore they may need to bereplaced due to age. Consultthe tire manufacturer for moreinformation on when tiresshould be replaced.

Vehicle Storage

Tires age when stored normallymounted on a parked vehicle. Parka vehicle that will be stored for atleast a month in a cool, dry, cleanarea away from direct sunlight toslow aging. This area should befree of grease, gasoline, or othersubstances that can deterioraterubber.

Parking for an extended period cancause flat spots on the tires thatmay result in vibrations whiledriving. When storing a vehicle forat least a month, remove the tires orraise the vehicle to reduce theweight from the tires.

Buying New TiresThe original equipment tireshave been developed andmatched specifically for thisvehicle and were designed tomeet Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification (TPC Spec)system rating. Whenreplacement tires are needed,Saab strongly recommendsbuying tires with the same TPCSpec rating.

The TPC Spec systemconsiders over a dozencritical specifications thatimpact the overall performanceof the vehicle, including brakesystem performance, ride andhandling, traction control, andtire pressure monitoringperformance. The TPC Specnumber is molded onto the tire'ssidewall near the tire size. If thetires have an all‐season treaddesign, the TPC Spec numberwill be followed by MS for mudand snow. See Tire SidewallLabeling on page 10‑53 foradditional information.


10-70 Vehicle Care

Saab recommends replacing allthe tires at the same time.Uniform tread depth on all tireswill help to maintain theperformance of the vehicle.Braking and handlingperformance may be adverselyaffected if all the tires are notreplaced at the same time. SeeTire Inspection on page 10‑67and Tire Rotation on page 10‑67for information on proper tirerotation.

{ WARNING

Tires could explode duringimproper service. Attempting tomount or dismount a tire couldcause injury or death. Only yourdealer or authorized tire servicecenter should mount or dismountthe tires.

{ WARNING

Mixing tires of different sizes,brands, or types may causeloss of control of the vehicle,resulting in a crash or othervehicle damage. Use thecorrect size, brand, and typeof tires on all wheels.

{ WARNING

Using bias-ply tires on thevehicle may cause the wheelrim flanges to develop cracksafter many miles of driving.A tire and/or wheel could failsuddenly and cause a crash.Use only radial-ply tires withthe wheels on the vehicle.

If the vehicle tires must bereplaced with a tire that doesnot have a TPC Spec number,make sure they are the samesize, load range, speed rating,and construction (radial) as theoriginal tires.


Vehicle Care 10-71

Vehicles that have a tirepressure monitoring systemcould give an inaccuratelow‐pressure warning ifnon‐TPC Spec rated tires areinstalled. See Tire PressureMonitor System on page 10‑61.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label indicates theoriginal equipment tires on thevehicle. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9‑12 for the labellocation and more informationabout the Tire and LoadingInformation label.

Different Size Tires andWheelsIf wheels or tires are installed thatare a different size than the originalequipment wheels and tires, vehicleperformance, including its braking,ride and handling characteristics,stability, and resistance to rollovermay be affected. If the vehicle haselectronic systems such as antilockbrakes, rollover airbags, tractioncontrol, and electronic stabilitycontrol, the performance of thesesystems can also be affected.

{ WARNING

If different sized wheels are used,there may not be an acceptablelevel of performance and safetyif tires not recommended forthose wheels are selected. Thisincreases the chance of a crashand serious injury. Only use Saabspecific wheel and tire systemsdeveloped for the vehicle, andhave them properly installed by aSaab certified technician.

See Buying New Tires onpage 10‑69 and Accessories andModifications on page 10‑3 foradditional information.


10-72 Vehicle Care

Uniform Tire QualityGradingQuality grades can be foundwhere applicable on the tiresidewall between tread shoulderand maximum section width.For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AATemperature A

The following information relatesto the system developed by theUnited States National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA), which grades tiresby treadwear, traction, andtemperature performance. Thisapplies only to vehicles sold inthe United States. The gradesare molded on the sidewalls ofmost passenger car tires.

The Uniform Tire QualityGrading (UTQG) systemdoes not apply to deeptread, winter-type snow tires,space-saver, or temporary usespare tires, tires with nominalrim diameters of 10 to 12 inches(25 to 30 cm), or to somelimited-production tires.

While the tires available onSaab passenger cars and lighttrucks may vary with respect tothese grades, they must alsoconform to federal safetyrequirements and additionalTire Performance Criteria (TPC)standards.

All Passenger Car Tires MustConform to Federal SafetyRequirements In Addition ToThese Grades.

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is acomparative rating based onthe wear rate of the tire whentested under controlledconditions on a specifiedgovernment test course.For example, a tire graded150 would wear one and a half(1½) times as well on thegovernment course as a tiregraded 100. The relativeperformance of tires dependsupon the actual conditions oftheir use, however, and maydepart significantly from thenorm due to variations indriving habits, service practicesand differences in roadcharacteristics and climate.


Vehicle Care 10-73

Traction – AA, A, B, C

The traction grades, fromhighest to lowest, are AA, A, B,and C. Those grades representthe tire's ability to stop onwet pavement as measuredunder controlled conditionson specified governmenttest surfaces of asphalt andconcrete. A tire marked C mayhave poor traction performance.Warning: The traction gradeassigned to this tire is basedon straight-ahead brakingtraction tests, and does notinclude acceleration, cornering,hydroplaning, or peak tractioncharacteristics.

Temperature – A, B, C

The temperature gradesare A (the highest), B, and C,representing the tire's resistanceto the generation of heat andits ability to dissipate heatwhen tested under controlledconditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can causethe material of the tire todegenerate and reduce tirelife, and excessive temperaturecan lead to sudden tire failure.

The grade C corresponds to alevel of performance which allpassenger car tires must meetunder the Federal Motor SafetyStandard No. 109. Grades Band A represent higher levels ofperformance on the laboratorytest wheel than the minimumrequired by law. Warning: Thetemperature grade for this tireis established for a tire thatis properly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessiveloading, either separately or incombination, can cause heatbuildup and possible tire failure.


10-74 Vehicle Care

Wheel Alignment and TireBalanceThe tires and wheels were alignedand balanced at the factory toprovide the longest tire life and bestoverall performance. Adjustments towheel alignment and tire balancingwill not be necessary on a regularbasis. However, check thealignment if there is unusual tirewear or if the vehicle is pulling toone side or the other. If the vehiclevibrates when driving on a smoothroad, the tires and wheels mightneed to be rebalanced. See yourdealer for proper diagnosis.

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent,cracked, or badly rusted orcorroded. If wheel nuts keepcoming loose, the wheel, wheelbolts, and wheel nuts should bereplaced. If the wheel leaks air,replace it. Some aluminum wheelscan be repaired. See your dealer ifany of these conditions exist.

Your dealer will know the kind ofwheel that is needed.

Each new wheel should have thesame load-carrying capacity,diameter, width, offset, and bemounted the same way as theone it replaces.

Replace wheels, wheel bolts,wheel nuts, or Tire Pressure MonitorSystem (TPMS) sensors with neworiginal equipment parts.

{ WARNING

Using the wrong replacementwheels, wheel bolts, or wheelnuts can be dangerous. It couldaffect the braking and handling ofthe vehicle. Tires can lose air,and cause loss of control, causinga crash. Always use the correctwheel, wheel bolts, and wheelnuts for replacement.

Notice: The wrong wheel canalso cause problems withbearing life, brake cooling,speedometer or odometercalibration, headlamp aim,bumper height, vehicle groundclearance, and tire or tire chainclearance to the body andchassis.

See If a Tire Goes Flat onpage 10‑75 for more information.


Vehicle Care 10-75

Used Replacement Wheels

{ WARNING

Replacing a wheel with a usedone is dangerous. How it hasbeen used or how far it has beendriven may be unknown. It couldfail suddenly and cause a crash.When replacing wheels, use anew original equipment wheel.

Tire Chains

{ WARNING

Do not use tire chains. There isnot enough clearance. Tire chainsused on a vehicle without theproper amount of clearance cancause damage to the brakes,

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

suspension, or other vehicleparts. The area damaged by thetire chains could cause loss ofcontrol and a crash.

Use another type of tractiondevice only if its manufacturerrecommends it for the vehicle'stire size combination androad conditions. Follow thatmanufacturer's instructions. Toavoid vehicle damage, driveslow and readjust or remove thetraction device if it contacts thevehicle. Do not spin the wheels.If traction devices are used, installthem on the front tires.

If a Tire Goes FlatIt is unusual for a tire to blowout,especially if the tires are maintainedproperly. See Tires. If air goes out ofa tire, it is much more likely to leakout slowly. But if there is ever ablowout, here are a few tips aboutwhat to expect and what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tirecreates a drag that pulls the vehicletoward that side. Take your foot offthe accelerator pedal and grip thesteering wheel firmly. Steer tomaintain lane position, and thengently brake to a stop, well off theroad, if possible.


10-76 Vehicle Care

A rear blowout, particularly on acurve, acts much like a skid andmay require the same correction asused in a skid. Stop pressing theaccelerator pedal and steer tostraighten the vehicle. It may bevery bumpy and noisy. Gentlybrake to a stop, well off the road,if possible.

{ WARNING

Driving on a flat tire will causepermanent damage to the tire.Re-inflating a tire after it hasbeen driven on while severelyunderinflated or flat may cause ablowout and a serious crash.Never attempt to re-inflate a tirethat has been driven on whileseverely underinflated or flat.Have your dealer or an authorizedtire service center repair orreplace the flat tire as soon aspossible.

{ WARNING

Lifting a vehicle and gettingunder it to do maintenance orrepairs is dangerous without theappropriate safety equipment andtraining. If a jack is provided withthe vehicle, it is designed only forchanging a flat tire. If it is used foranything else, you or others couldbe badly injured or killed if thevehicle slips off the jack. If a jackis provided with the vehicle, onlyuse it for changing a flat tire.

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tireand wheel damage by driving slowlyto a level place, well off the road,if possible. Turn on the hazardwarning flashers. See HazardWarning Flashers on page 6‑5.

{ WARNING

Changing a tire can bedangerous. The vehicle canslip off the jack and roll overor fall causing injury or death.Find a level place to change thetire. To help prevent the vehiclefrom moving:

1. Set the parking brake firmly.

2. Put an automatictransmission in P (Park)or a manual transmissionin 1 (First) or R (Reverse).

3. Turn off the engine and donot restart while the vehicleis raised.

4. Do not allow passengers toremain in the vehicle.

5. Place wheel blocks onboth sides of the tire at theopposite corner of the tirebeing changed.


Vehicle Care 10-77

This vehicle may come with a jackand spare tire or a tire sealant andcompressor kit. To use the jackingequipment to change a spare tiresafely, follow the instructionsbelow. Then see Tire Changing onpage 10‑85. To use the tire sealantand compressor kit, see TireSealant and Compressor Kit onpage 10‑77.

When the vehicle has a flat tire (B),use the following example as aguide to assist you in the placementof wheel blocks (A).

A. Wheel Block

B. Flat Tire

The following information explainshow to repair or change a tire.

Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit

{ WARNING

Idling a vehicle in an enclosedarea with poor ventilation isdangerous. Engine exhaust mayenter the vehicle. Engine exhaustcontains Carbon Monoxide (CO)which cannot be seen or smelled.It can cause unconsciousnessand even death. Never run theengine in an enclosed area thathas no fresh air ventilation. Formore information, see EngineExhaust on page 9‑24.


10-78 Vehicle Care

{ WARNING

Overinflating a tire could causethe tire to rupture and you orothers could be injured. Besure to read and follow the tiresealant and compressor kitinstructions and inflate the tire toits recommended pressure. Donot exceed the recommendedpressure.

{ WARNING

Storing the tire sealant andcompressor kit or otherequipment in the passengercompartment of the vehicle couldcause injury. In a sudden stop orcollision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store the tiresealant and compressor kitin its original location.

If this vehicle has a tire sealant andcompressor kit, there may not be aspare tire, tire changing equipment,and on some vehicles there may notbe a place to store a tire.

The tire sealant and compressorcan be used to temporarily sealpunctures up to 6 mm (¼ in) in thetread area of the tire. It can also beused to inflate an underinflated tire.

If the tire has been separated fromthe wheel, has damaged sidewalls,or has a large puncture, the tire istoo severely damaged for the tiresealant and compressor kit to beeffective. See Roadside AssistanceProgram on page 13‑4.

Read and follow all of the tiresealant and compressor kitinstructions.

The kit includes:


Vehicle Care 10-79

A. Selector Switch(Sealant/Air or Air Only)

B. On/Off Button

C. Pressure Gauge

D. Pressure Deflation Button(If equipped)

E. Tire Sealant Canister

F. Sealant/Air Hose (Clear)

G. Air Only Hose (Black)

H. Power Plug

Tire Sealant

Read and follow the safe handlinginstructions on the label adhered tothe sealant canister.

Check the tire sealant expirationdate on the sealant canister. Thesealant canister should be replacedbefore its expiration date.

Replacement sealant canisters areavailable at your local dealer. See“Removal and Installation of theSealant Canister” following.

There is only enough sealant to sealone tire. After usage, the sealantcanister and sealant/air hoseassembly must be replaced. See“Removal and Installation of theSealant Canister” following.

Using the Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit to TemporarilySeal and Inflate aPunctured Tire

Follow the directions closely forcorrect sealant usage.

When using the tire sealant andcompressor kit during coldtemperatures, warm the kit in a


10-80 Vehicle Care

heated environment for five minutes.This will help to inflate the tirefaster.

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tireand wheel damage by driving slowlyto a level place. Turn on the hazardwarning flashers. See HazardWarning Flashers on page 6‑5.

See If a Tire Goes Flat onpage 10‑75 for other importantsafety warnings.

Do not remove any objects thathave penetrated the tire.

1. Remove the tire sealant andcompressor kit from its storagelocation. See Storing the TireSealant and Compressor Kit onpage 10‑85.

2. Unwrap the sealant/air hose (F)and the power plug (H).

3. Place the kit on the ground.

Make sure the tire valve stem ispositioned close to the groundso the hose will reach it.

4. Remove the valve stem capfrom the flat tire by turning itcounterclockwise.

5. Attach the sealant/air hose (F)onto the tire valve stem. Turn itclockwise until it is tight.

6. Plug the power plug (H) into theaccessory power outlet in thevehicle. Unplug all items fromother accessory power outlets.See Power Outlets on page 5‑8.

If the vehicle has an accessorypower outlet, do not use thecigarette lighter.

If the vehicle only has a cigarettelighter, use the cigarette lighter.

Do not pinch the power plugcord in the door or window.

7. Start the vehicle. The vehiclemust be running while using theair compressor.

8. Turn the selector switch (A)counterclockwise to the Sealant+ Air position.

9. Press the on/off button (B) toturn the tire sealant andcompressor kit on.

The compressor will injectsealant and air into the tire.

The pressure gauge (C) willinitially show a high pressurewhile the compressor pushes thesealant into the tire. Once thesealant is completely dispersedinto the tire, the pressure willquickly drop and start to riseagain as the tire inflates withair only.


Vehicle Care 10-81

10. Inflate the tire to therecommended inflationpressure using the pressuregauge (C). The recommendedinflation pressure can be foundon the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See TirePressure on page 10‑59.

The pressure gauge (C) mayread higher than the actual tirepressure while the compressoris on. Turn the compressor offto get an accurate pressurereading. The compressor maybe turned on/off until thecorrect pressure is reached.

Notice: If the recommendedpressure cannot be reached afterapproximately 25 minutes, thevehicle should not be drivenfarther. The tire is too severelydamaged and the tire sealant andcompressor kit cannot inflate thetire. Remove the power plug from

the accessory power outlet andunscrew the inflating hose fromthe tire valve. See RoadsideAssistance Program onpage 13‑4.

11. Press the on/off button (B) toturn the tire sealant andcompressor kit off.

The tire is not sealed andwill continue to leak air untilthe vehicle is driven and thesealant is distributed in the tire;therefore, Steps 12 through18 must be done immediatelyafter Step 11.

Be careful while handling thetire sealant and compressor kitas it could be warm afterusage.

12. Unplug the power plug (H) fromthe accessory power outlet inthe vehicle.

13. Turn the sealant/air hose (F)counterclockwise to remove itfrom the tire valve stem.

14. Replace the tire valvestem cap.

15. Replace the sealant/airhose (F), and the power plug(H) back in their originallocation.

16. If the flat tire was able toinflate to the recommendedinflation pressure, remove themaximum speed label from thesealant canister (E) and placeit in a highly visible location.Do not exceed the speed onthis label until the damaged tireis repaired or replaced.


10-82 Vehicle Care

17. Return the equipment to itsoriginal storage location in thevehicle.

18. Immediately drive the vehicle8 km (5 mi) to distribute thesealant in the tire.

19. Stop at a safe location andcheck the tire pressure. Referto Steps 1 through 11 under“Using the Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit without Sealantto Inflate a Tire (NotPunctured).”

If the tire pressure has fallenmore than 68 kPa (10 psi)below the recommendedinflation pressure, stop drivingthe vehicle. The tire is tooseverely damaged and the tiresealant cannot seal the tire.See Roadside AssistanceProgram on page 13‑4.

If the tire pressure has notdropped more than 68 kPa(10 psi) from the recommendedinflation pressure, inflate thetire to the recommendedinflation pressure.

20. Wipe off any sealant from thewheel, tire, and vehicle.

21. Dispose of the used sealantcanister (E) and sealant/airhose (F) assembly at a localdealer or in accordance withlocal state codes and practices.

22. Replace it with a new canisteravailable from your dealer.

23. After temporarily sealing a tireusing the tire sealant andcompressor kit, take thevehicle to an authorized dealerwithin a 161 km (100 mi) ofdriving to have the tire repairedor replaced.

Using the Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit withoutSealant to Inflate a Tire(Not Punctured)

To use the air compressor to inflatea tire with air only and not sealant:


Vehicle Care 10-83

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tireand wheel damage by driving slowlyto a level place. Turn on the hazardwarning flashers. See HazardWarning Flashers on page 6‑5.

See If a Tire Goes Flat onpage 10‑75 for other importantsafety warnings.

1. Remove the tire sealant andcompressor kit from its storagelocation. See Storing the TireSealant and Compressor Kit onpage 10‑85.

2. Unwrap the air only hose (G)and the power plug (H).

3. Place the kit on the ground.

Make sure the tire valve stem ispositioned close to the groundso the hose will reach it.

4. Remove the tire valve stem capfrom the flat tire by turning itcounterclockwise.

5. Attach the air only hose (G) ontothe tire valve stem by turning itclockwise until it is tight.

6. Plug the power plug (H) into theaccessory power outlet in thevehicle. Unplug all items fromother accessory power outlets.See Power Outlets on page 5‑8.

If the vehicle has an accessorypower outlet, do not use thecigarette lighter.

If the vehicle only has a cigarettelighter, use the cigarette lighter.

Do not pinch the power plugcord in the door or window.

7. Start the vehicle. The vehiclemust be running while using theair compressor.

8. Turn the selector switch (A)clockwise to the Air Onlyposition.

9. Press the on/off (B) button toturn the compressor on.

The compressor will inflate thetire with air only.


10-84 Vehicle Care

10. Inflate the tire to therecommended inflationpressure using the pressuregauge (C). The recommendedinflation pressure can befound on the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See TirePressure on page 10‑59.

The pressure gauge (C) mayread higher than the actual tirepressure while the compressoris on. Turn the compressor offto get an accurate reading.The compressor may be turnedon/off until the correct pressureis reached.

If you inflate the tire higherthan the recommendedpressure you can adjustthe excess pressure bypressing the pressure deflationbutton (D), if equipped, untilthe proper pressure reading isreached. This option is onlyfunctional when using the aironly hose (G).

11. Press the on/off button (B) toturn the tire sealant andcompressor kit off.

Be careful while handling thetire sealant and compressorkit as it could be warm afterusage.

12. Unplug the power plug (H) fromthe accessory power outlet inthe vehicle.

13. Disconnect the air only hose(G) from the tire valve stem byturning it counterclockwise, andreplace the tire valve stem cap.

14. Replace the air only hose (G)and the power plug (H) andcord back in their originallocations.

15. Place the equipment in theoriginal storage location in thevehicle.

The tire sealant and compressor kithas an accessory adapter located ina compartment on the bottom of itshousing that may be used to inflateair mattresses, balls, etc.


Vehicle Care 10-85

Removal and Installation of theSealant Canister

To remove the sealant canister:

1. Unwrap the sealant hose.

2. Press the canister releasebutton.

3. Pull up and remove the canister.

4. Replace with a new canisterwhich is available from yourdealer.

5. Push the new canister intoplace.

Storing the Tire Sealantand Compressor Kit

This vehicle may have a tiresealant and compressor kit inplace of a jack or spare tire. It islocated in a foam container in therear compartment storage area.If the vehicle has a cargo cover,see Cargo Management System onpage 4‑5 for instructions on how toaccess the tire sealant andcompressor kit.

Tire Changing

Removing the Spare Tire andTools

To access the spare tire and tools:


2. Lift the handle and pull up on thefloor.

The prop rod locks into placewhen open.


10-86 Vehicle Care

3. Remove the spare tire cover. 4. Remove the nut retaining thespare tire.

5. Remove the compact spare tire.See Compact Spare Tire onpage 10‑92 for more information.

6. Remove the wing nut (D).

7. Remove the extension (A),jack (B) and wheel wrench (C)and place them near the tirebeing changed.


Vehicle Care 10-87

Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare Tire

Take off the wheel cover or centercap, if the vehicle has one, to reachthe wheel bolts.

1. Do a safety check beforeproceeding. See If a Tire GoesFlat on page 10‑75 for moreinformation.

2. Turn the wheel wrenchcounterclockwise to loosen andremove the wheel nut caps.

Do not try to remove plastic capsfrom the cover or center cap.

3. Pull the cover or center capaway from the wheel. Store thewheel cover in the cargo areauntil you have the flat tirerepaired or replaced.

4. Turn the wheel wrenchcounterclockwise to loosen allthe wheel nuts, but do notremove them yet.

5. Place the jack near the flat tire.

Notice: Make sure that the jacklift head is in the correct positionor you may damage your vehicle.The repairs would not be coveredby your warranty.

6. Position the jack lift head at thejack location nearest the flat tire.

The jacking location is indicatedby a V-shaped notch in theplastic molding. The jackmust not be used in any otherposition.


10-88 Vehicle Care

7. Insert the hooked end of theextension handle through thejack and the flat end through thewheel wrench.

{ WARNING

Getting under a vehicle when itis jacked up is dangerous. If thevehicle slips off the jack, youcould be badly injured or killed.Never get under a vehicle whenit is supported only by a jack.

{ WARNING

Raising the vehicle with thejack improperly positioned candamage the vehicle and evenmake the vehicle fall. To helpavoid personal injury and vehicledamage, be sure to fit the jack lifthead into the proper locationbefore raising the vehicle.

{ WARNING

Lifting a vehicle and gettingunder it to do maintenance orrepairs is dangerous without theappropriate safety equipment andtraining. If a jack is provided withthe vehicle, it is designed only forchanging a flat tire. If it is used foranything else, you or others couldbe badly injured or killed if thevehicle slips off the jack. If a jackis provided with the vehicle, onlyuse it for changing a flat tire.

8. Turn the extension with thewheel wrench clockwise to raisethe jack lift head until the jackjust fits under the vehicle.

9. Raise the vehicle by turning thewheel wrench clockwise until theslots in the jack head fit into themetal flange located behind thetriangle on the plastic moulding.


Vehicle Care 10-89

10. Remove all of the wheel nuts.

11. Remove the flat tire.

{ WARNING

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could comeoff and cause an accident. Whenchanging a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places where thewheel attaches to the vehicle. Inan emergency, a cloth or a papertowel can be used; however, usea scraper or wire brush later toremove all rust or dirt.

12. Remove any rust or dirt fromthe wheel bolts, mountingsurfaces, and spare wheel.

13. Place the compact spare tireon the wheel-mounting surface.

{ WARNING

Never use oil or grease on boltsor nuts because the nuts mightcome loose. The vehicle's wheelcould fall off, causing a crash.


10-90 Vehicle Care

14. Reinstall the wheel nuts.Tighten each nut by hand untilthe wheel is held againstthe hub.

15. Lower the vehicle by turningthe jack handlecounterclockwise.

{ WARNING

Wheel nuts that are improperly orincorrectly tightened can causethe wheels to become loose orcome off. The wheel nuts shouldbe tightened with a torque wrenchto the proper torque specificationafter replacing. Follow the torquespecification supplied by theaftermarket manufacturer whenusing accessory locking wheelnuts. See Capacities andSpecifications on page 12‑2 fororiginal equipment wheel nuttorque specifications.

Notice: Improperly tightenedwheel nuts can lead to brakepulsation and rotor damage. Toavoid expensive brake repairs,evenly tighten the wheel nuts inthe proper sequence and to theproper torque specification. SeeCapacities and Specifications onpage 12‑2 for the wheel nuttorque specification.

16. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly ina crisscross sequence, asshown.

17. Lower the jack all the way andremove the jack from under thevehicle.

18. Tighten the wheel nuts firmlywith the wheel wrench.

When reinstalling the wheel coveror center cap on the full-size tire,tighten all five plastic caps handsnug with the aid of the wheelwrench and tighten them with thewheel wrench an additional one‐quarter of a turn.

Notice: Wheel covers will not fiton the vehicle's compact spare.If you try to put a wheel cover onthe compact spare, the cover orthe spare could be damaged.


Vehicle Care 10-91

Storing a Flat or Spare Tireand Tools

{ WARNING

Storing a jack, a tire, or otherequipment in the passengercompartment of the vehicle couldcause injury. In a sudden stop orcollision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store all these inthe proper place.

To store the flat or spare tire andtools:

1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgateon page 2‑12 for moreinformation.

2. Put back all tools as they werestored in the rear storagecompartment and put thecompartment cover back on.For more information, see“Storing the Compact Spare Tireand Tools” next in this section.

3. Install the cargo cover. Formore information, see CargoManagement System onpage 4‑5.

4. Place the tire, lying flat, in therear storage compartment.

5. Attach the strap to the cargotie-down in the rear of thevehicle.

6. Route the strap through thewheel, as shown.

7. Attach the strap to the othercargo tie-down in the rear ofthe vehicle.

8. Tighten the strap.

The compact spare is for temporaryuse only. Replace the compactspare tire with a full-size tire assoon as you can.


10-92 Vehicle Care

Compact Spare Tire

{ WARNING

Driving with more than onecompact spare tire at a timecould result in loss of brakingand handling. This could lead toa crash and you or others couldbe injured. Use only one compactspare tire at a time.

If this vehicle has a compact sparetire, it was fully inflated when thevehicle was new; however, it canlose air after a time. Check theinflation pressure regularly. Itshould be 420 kPa (60 psi).

After installing the compact spareon the vehicle, stop as soonas possible and make sure thespare tire is correctly inflated.The compact spare is made toperform well at speeds up to105 km/h (65 mph) for distances upto 5 000 km (3,000mi), so you canfinish your trip and have the full-size

tire repaired or replaced at yourconvenience. Of course, it is best toreplace the spare with a full-size tireas soon as possible. The spare tirewill last longer and be in goodshape in case it is needed again.

Notice: When the compactspare is installed, do not takethe vehicle through an automaticcar wash with guide rails. Thecompact spare can get caught onthe rails which can damage thetire, wheel and other parts of thevehicle.

Do not use the compact spare onother vehicles.

Do not mix the compact spare tireor wheel with other wheels or tires.They will not fit. Keep the spare tireand its wheel together.

Notice: Tire chains will not fitthe compact spare. Using themcan damage the vehicle and candamage the chains too. Do notuse tire chains on the compactspare.

Jump StartingFor more information about thevehicle battery, see Battery onpage 10‑30.

If the vehicle battery has rundown, you may want to use anothervehicle and some jumper cables tostart your vehicle. Be sure to usethe following steps to do it safely.

{ WARNING

Batteries can hurt you. They canbe dangerous because:

. They contain acid that canburn you.

. They contain gas that canexplode or ignite.

. They contain enoughelectricity to burn you.

If you do not follow these stepsexactly, some or all of thesethings can hurt you.


Vehicle Care 10-93

Notice: Ignoring these stepscould result in costly damage tothe vehicle that would not becovered by the warranty.

Trying to start the vehicle bypushing or pulling it will notwork, and it could damage thevehicle.

1. Check the other vehicle. It musthave a 12-volt battery with anegative ground system.

Notice: Only use a vehiclethat has a 12-volt systemwith a negative ground for jumpstarting. If the other vehicle doesnot have a 12-volt system with anegative ground, both vehiclescan be damaged.

2. Get the vehicles close enoughso the jumper cables can reach,but be sure the vehicles arenot touching each other. If theyare, it could cause a groundconnection you do not want.You would not be able to startyour vehicle, and the badgrounding could damage theelectrical systems.

To avoid the possibility of thevehicles rolling, set the parkingbrake firmly on both vehiclesinvolved in the jump startprocedure. Put the transmissionin P (Park) before setting theparking brake.

Notice: If the radio or otheraccessories are left on duringthe jump starting procedure, theycould be damaged. The repairswould not be covered by thewarranty. Always turn off theradio and other accessorieswhen jump starting the vehicle.

3. Turn off the ignition on bothvehicles. Unplug unnecessaryaccessories plugged into thecigarette lighter or the accessorypower outlet. Turn off the radioand all lamps that are notneeded. This will avoid sparks,helping save both batteries andthe radio.

4. Open the hood on theother vehicle and locate thepositive (+) and negative (−)terminal locations on thatvehicle.

Open the hood on your vehicleand find the remote positive (+)and remote negative (−) jumpstarting terminals.


10-94 Vehicle Care

Your vehicle is equipped with aremote positive (+) terminal (A)and a remote negative (−)terminal (B). The remotepositive (+) terminal is located inthe engine compartment on thedriver side of the vehicle, abovethe rear of the battery. Theremote negative (−) terminalis a stud located in the enginecompartment on the driver sideof the vehicle, on the front tiebar. See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 10‑6 for moreinformation on location.

To uncover the remotepositive (+) terminal, lift open theaccess panel on the batterycover indicated by the (+) sign.

{ WARNING

An electric fan can start up evenwhen the engine is not runningand can injure you. Keep hands,clothing and tools away from anyunderhood electric fan.

{ WARNING

Using an open flame near abattery can cause battery gas toexplode. People have been hurtdoing this, and some have beenblinded. Use a flashlight if youneed more light.

Be sure the battery has enoughwater. You do not need to addwater to the battery installed in

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

your new vehicle. But if a batteryhas filler caps, be sure the rightamount of fluid is there. If it is low,add water to take care of thatfirst. If you do not, explosive gascould be present.

Battery fluid contains acid thatcan burn you. Do not get it onyou. If you accidentally get it inyour eyes or on your skin, flushthe place with water and getmedical help immediately.

{ WARNING

Fans or other moving engineparts can injure you badly. Keepyour hands away from movingparts once the engine is running.


Vehicle Care 10-95

5. Check that the jumper cablesdo not have loose or missinginsulation. If they do, you couldget a shock. The vehicles couldalso be damaged.

Before you connect the cables,here are some basic things youshould know. Positive (+) will goto positive (+) or to a remotepositive (+) terminal if the vehiclehas one. Negative (−) will go to aheavy, unpainted metal enginepart or to a remote negative (−)terminal if the vehicle has one.

Do not connect positive (+) tonegative (−) or you will get ashort that would damage thebattery and maybe other parts.Do not connect the negative (−)cable to the negative (−) terminalon the dead battery because thiscan cause sparks.

6. Connect the red positive (+)cable to the positive (+) terminalon the vehicle with the deadbattery. Use a remotepositive (+) terminal if thevehicle has one.

7. Do not let the other endtouch metal. Connect it tothe positive (+) terminal of thegood battery. Use a remotepositive (+) terminal if thevehicle has one.

8. Now connect the blacknegative (−) cable to thenegative (−) terminal of thegood battery. Use a remotenegative (−) terminal if thevehicle has one.

Do not let the other end touchanything until the next step. Theother end of the negative (−)cable does not go to the deadbattery. It goes to a heavy,unpainted metal engine part orto a remote negative (−) terminalon the vehicle with the deadbattery.

9. Connect the other end of thenegative (−) cable away fromthe dead battery, but not nearengine parts that move. Theelectrical connection is just asgood there, and the chance ofsparks getting back to thebattery is much less.

Your vehicle has a remote (−)terminal for this purpose.

10. Now start the vehicle withthe good battery and run theengine for a while.

11. Try to start the vehicle thathad the dead battery. If it willnot start after a few tries, itprobably needs service.


10-96 Vehicle Care

Notice: If the jumper cables areconnected or removed in thewrong order, electrical shortingmay occur and damage thevehicle. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always connect and remove thejumper cables in the correctorder, making sure that thecables do not touch each other orother metal.

Jumper Cable Removal

A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal EnginePart or Remote Negative (−)Terminal

B. Good Battery or RemotePositive (+) and RemoteNegative (−) Terminals

C. Dead Battery or RemotePositive (+) Terminal

To disconnect the jumper cablesfrom both vehicles, do the following:

1. Disconnect the blacknegative (−) cable from thevehicle that had the deadbattery.

2. Disconnect the blacknegative (−) cable from thevehicle with the good battery.

3. Disconnect the red positive (+)cable from the vehicle with thegood battery.

4. Disconnect the red positive (+)cable from the other vehicle.

5. Close the access panel on thebattery cover, if applicable.


Vehicle Care 10-97

Towing

Towing the VehicleNotice: To avoid damage,the disabled vehicle shouldbe towed with all four wheelsoff the ground. Care must betaken with vehicles that havelow ground clearance and/orspecial equipment. Alwaysflatbed on a car carrier.

Consult your dealer or aprofessional towing service ifthe disabled vehicle must betowed. See Roadside AssistanceProgram on page 13‑4.

To tow the vehicle behind anothervehicle for recreational purposes,such as behind a motorhome, see“Recreational Vehicle Towing” inthis section.

Recreational VehicleTowingRecreational vehicle towing meanstowing the vehicle behind anothervehicle – such as a motorhome.The two most common types ofrecreational vehicle towing areknown as dinghy towing and dollytowing. Dinghy towing is towing thevehicle with all four wheels on theground. Dolly towing is towing thevehicle with two wheels on theground and two wheels up on adevice known as a dolly.

Here are some important things toconsider before recreational vehicletowing:. What is the towing capacity

of the towing vehicle? Besure to read the towvehicle manufacturer'srecommendations.

. What is the distance that will betravelled? Some vehicles haverestrictions on how far and howlong they can tow.

. Is the proper towing equipmentgoing to be used? See yourdealer or trailering professionalfor additional advice andequipment recommendations.

. Is the vehicle ready to betowed? Just as preparing thevehicle for a long trip, make surethe vehicle is prepared to betowed.


10-98 Vehicle Care

Dinghy Towing

Front-wheel‐drive andall-wheel-drive vehicles may bedinghy towed from the front. Thesevehicles can also be towed byplacing them on a platform trailerwith all four wheels off of theground. For other towing options,see “Dolly Towing” following in thissection.

Vehicles with a 2.8 L V 6 engine canbe dinghy towed only for serviceand are restricted to a maximumdistance of 100 km (60 miles) andnot to exceed 80 km/h (50 mph).

Vehicles with the 3.0 L V 6 enginecan be dinghy towed withoutdistance restrictions.

Notice: If 105 km/h (65mph)is exceeded while towing thevehicle, it could be damaged.Never exceed 105 km/h (65mph)while towing the vehicle.

For vehicles being dinghy towed,the vehicle should be run at thebeginning of each day and at eachRV fuel stop for about five minutes.This will ensure proper lubrication oftransmission components.

To tow the vehicle from the frontwith all four wheels on the ground:

1. Position the vehicle that will betowed and secure it to thetowing vehicle.

2. Remove the shift lever boot bypulling up on the rear of the trimplate.


Vehicle Care 10-99

3. Use a small screw driver or toolto press and hold the manualrelease button on the front right.

4. Put the vehicle in N (Neutral).

Notice: If the vehicle istowed without performingeach of the steps listed under“Dinghy Towing,” the automatictransmission could be damaged.Be sure to follow all steps of thedinghy towing procedure prior toand after towing the vehicle.

Once the destination has beenreached:

1. Shift the vehicle to P (Park).

2. Reinstall the shift lever boot byinserting the front edge andpressing the rear of the trimplate until it snaps into place.

3. Start the engine and let it idle formore than three minutes beforedriving the vehicle.

Notice: Too much or toolittle fluid can damage thetransmission. Be sure that thetransmission fluid is at the properlevel before towing with all fourwheels on the ground.

Notice: Do not tow a vehiclewith the front drive wheels on theground if one of the front tires isa compact spare tire. Towing withtwo different tire sizes on thefront of the vehicle can causesevere damage to thetransmission.

Dolly Towing(All-Wheel‐Drive Vehicles)

All-wheel‐drive vehicles should notbe towed with two wheels on theground. To properly tow thesevehicles, they should be placed ona platform trailer with all four wheelsoff of the ground or dinghy towedfrom the front. See Dinghy Towingearlier in this section.


10-100 Vehicle Care

Dolly Towing(Front-Wheel‐Drive Vehicles)

To tow the vehicle from the frontwith the rear wheels on the ground,do the following:

1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.

2. Move the shift lever to P (Park).See Shifting Into Park onpage 9‑23.

3. Set the parking brake.

4. Secure the vehicle to the dolly.

5. Follow the dolly manufacturer'sinstructions for preparing thevehicle and dolly for towing.

6. Release the parking brake.

Towing the Vehicle fromthe Rear

Notice: Towing the vehicle fromthe rear could damage it. Also,repairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Never havethe vehicle towed from the rear.


Vehicle Care 10-101

Appearance Care

Exterior Care

Cleaning ExteriorLamps/Lenses

Use only lukewarm or cold water, asoft cloth, and a car washing soapto clean exterior lamps and lenses.Follow instructions under “Washingthe Vehicle” later in this section.

Finish Care

Occasional waxing or mild polishingof the vehicle by hand may benecessary to remove residue fromthe paint finish. Approved cleaningproducts can be obtained from yourdealer.

If the vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish, theclearcoat gives more depth andgloss to the colored basecoat.

Always use waxes and polishes thatare non-abrasive and made for abasecoat/clearcoat paint finish.

Notice: Machine compoundingor aggressive polishing on abasecoat/clearcoat paint finishmay damage it. Use onlynon-abrasive waxes and polishesthat are made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish on thevehicle.

Foreign materials such as calciumchloride and other salts, ice meltingagents, road oil and tar, tree sap,bird droppings, chemicals fromindustrial chimneys, etc., candamage the vehicle's finish if theyremain on painted surfaces. Washthe vehicle as soon as possible.If necessary, use non-abrasivecleaners that are marked safe forpainted surfaces to remove foreignmatter.

Exterior painted surfaces aresubject to aging, weather, andchemical fallout that can take theirtoll over a period of years. To keepthe paint finish looking new, keepthe vehicle garaged or coveredwhenever possible.

Protecting Exterior Bright MetalParts

Bright metal parts should becleaned regularly to keep theirluster. Wash with water or usechrome polish on chrome orstainless steel trim, if necessary.

Use special care with aluminumtrim. To avoid damaging protectivetrim, never use auto or chromepolish, steam, or caustic soapto clean aluminum. A coating ofwax, rubbed to high polish, isrecommended for all brightmetal parts.


10-102 Vehicle Care

Washing the Vehicle

To preserve the vehicle's finish,keep it clean by washing it often.

Do not wash the vehicle indirect sunlight and use a carwashing soap.

Notice: Do not use cleaningagents that are petroleum basedor that contain acid or abrasives,as they can damage the paint,metal, or plastic on the vehicle.Approved cleaning productscan be obtained from yourdealer. Follow all manufacturerdirections regarding correctproduct usage, necessary safetyprecautions, and appropriatedisposal of any vehicle careproduct. Certain cleaners containchemicals that can damage theemblems or nameplates on thevehicle. Check the cleaningproduct label. If it states that it

should not be used on plasticparts, do not use it on the vehicleor damage may occur and itwould not be covered by thewarranty.

Rinse the vehicle well, beforewashing and after, to remove allcleaning agents completely. If theyare allowed to dry on the surface,they could stain.

Dry the finish with a soft, cleanchamois or an all-cotton towel toavoid surface scratches and waterspotting.

High pressure car washes couldcause water to enter the vehicle.Avoid using high pressure washescloser than 30 cm (12 in) to thesurface of the vehicle. Use of powerwashers exceeding 8,274 kPa(1,200 psi) can result in damage orremoval of paint and decals.

Notice: Conveyor systems onsome automatic car washes coulddamage the vehicle. There maynot be enough clearance for theundercarriage. Check with the carwash manager before using theautomatic car wash.

Weatherstrips

Silicone grease on weatherstripswill make them last longer, sealbetter, and not stick or squeak.Apply silicone grease with a cleancloth. During very cold, dampweather frequent application maybe required. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 11‑4.


Vehicle Care 10-103

Wheels and Trim—Aluminum

The vehicle may have aluminumwheels.

Keep the wheels clean using asoft, clean cloth with mild soap andwater. Rinse with clean water. Afterrinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft,clean towel. A wax may then beapplied.

Notice: Trim may be damaged ifthe vehicle is not washed afterdriving on roads that have beensprayed with magnesium,calcium, or sodium chloride.These chlorides are used onroads for conditions such asice and dust. Always wash thevehicle with soap and waterafter exposure.

Notice: Do not use strong soaps,chemicals, abrasive polishes,cleaners, brushes, or cleanersthat contain acid on aluminum,because the surface could bedamaged. The repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Use only approvedcleaners on aluminum wheels.

Notice: Never drive a vehiclethrough an automatic car washthat uses silicone carbide tirecleaning brushes, as this couldcause damage. The repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty.

Windshield and Wiper Blades

Clean the outside of the windshieldwith glass cleaner.

Clean the rubber blades using alint‐free cloth or paper towel soakedwith windshield washer fluidor a mild detergent. Wash thewindshield thoroughly whencleaning the blades. Bugs, roadgrime, sap, and a buildup of vehiclewash/wax treatments may causewiper streaking. Replace the wiperblades if they are worn or damaged.

Wipers can be damaged by:. Extreme dusty conditions. Sand and salt. Heat and sun. Snow and ice, without proper

removal


10-104 Vehicle Care

Tires

Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner toclean the tires.

Notice: Using petroleum-basedtire dressing products on thevehicle may damage the paintfinish and/or tires. When applyinga tire dressing, always wipe offany overspray from all paintedsurfaces on the vehicle.

Sheet Metal Damage

If the vehicle is damaged andrequires sheet metal repair orreplacement, make sure the bodyrepair shop applies anti-corrosionmaterial to parts repaired orreplaced to restore corrosionprotection.

Original manufacturer replacementparts will provide the corrosionprotection while maintaining thevehicle warranty.

Finish Damage

Any stone chips, fractures, or deepscratches in the finish should berepaired right away. Bare metal willcorrode quickly and may developinto major repair expense.

Minor chips and scratches can berepaired with touch-up materialsavailable from your dealer. Largerareas of finish damage can becorrected in your dealer's body andpaint shop.

Underbody Maintenance

Chemicals used for ice and snowremoval and dust control can collecton the underbody. If these are notremoved, corrosion and rust candevelop on the underbody partssuch as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,and exhaust system even thoughthey have corrosion protection.

At least every spring, flush thesematerials from the underbody withplain water. Clean any areas wheremud and debris can collect. Dirtpacked in close areas of the frameshould be loosened before beingflushed. Your dealer or anunderbody car washing systemcan do this.

Chemical Paint Spotting

Some weather and atmosphericconditions can create a chemicalfallout. Airborne pollutants can fallupon and attack painted surfaces onthe vehicle. This damage can taketwo forms: blotchy, ring-shapeddiscolorations, and small, irregulardark spots etched into the paintsurface.


Vehicle Care 10-105

Interior CareThe interior will continue to lookits best if it is cleaned often. Dustand dirt can accumulate on theupholstery and cause damage tothe carpet, fabric, leather, andplastic surfaces. Stains should beremoved quickly as extreme heatcould cause them to set rapidly.

Lighter colored interiors mayrequire more frequent cleaning.Newspapers and garments that cantransfer color to home furnishingscan also transfer color to theinterior.

Remove dust from small buttonsand knobs with a small brush withsoft bristles.

Your dealer has products forcleaning the interior. When cleaningthe interior, only use cleanersspecifically designed for thesurfaces that are being cleaned.Permanent damage can resultfrom using cleaners on surfaces forwhich they were not intended. Applythe cleaner directly to the cleaningcloth to prevent over-spray. Removeany accidental over-spray fromother surfaces immediately.

Notice: Using abrasive cleanerswhen cleaning glass surfaces onthe vehicle, could scratch theglass and/or cause damage tothe rear window defogger. Whencleaning the glass on the vehicle,use only a soft cloth and glasscleaner.

Cleaners can contain solvents thatcan become concentrated in theinterior. Before using cleaners,read and adhere to all safetyinstructions on the label. Whilecleaning the interior, maintainadequate ventilation by openingthe doors and windows.

Do not clean the interior using thefollowing cleaners or techniques:. Never use a knife or any other

sharp object to remove a soilfrom any interior surface.

. Never use a stiff brush. It cancause damage.

. Never apply heavy pressure orrub aggressively with a cleaningcloth. Use of heavy pressure candamage the interior and doesnot improve the effectiveness ofsoil removal.


10-106 Vehicle Care

. Avoid laundry detergentsor dishwashing soaps withdegreasers. Using too muchsoap will leave a residue thatleaves streaks and attracts dirt.For liquid cleaners, about20 drops per 3.78 L (1 gal) ofwater is a good guide. Use onlymild, neutral-pH soaps.

. Do not heavily saturate theupholstery while cleaning.

. Cleaners that contain solventscan damage the interior.

Fabric/Carpet

Use a vacuum cleaner with a softbrush attachment to remove dustand loose dirt. A canister vacuumwith rotating brushes in the nozzlemay only be used on floor carpetand carpeted floor mats. For soils,always try to remove them first withplain water or club soda. Beforecleaning, gently remove as much ofthe soil as possible using one of thefollowing techniques:. For liquids: gently blot the

remaining soil with a papertowel. Allow the soil to absorbinto the paper towel until nomore can be removed.

. For solid dry soils: remove asmuch as possible and thenvacuum.

To clean:

1. Saturate a lint-free, clean whitecloth with water or club soda.

2. Remove excess moisture.

3. Start on the outside edge of thesoil and gently rub toward thecenter. Continue cleaning, usinga clean area of the cloth eachtime it becomes soiled.

4. Continue to gently rub thesoiled area.

5. If the soil is not completelyremoved, use a mild soapsolution and repeat the cleaningprocess with plain water.


Vehicle Care 10-107

If any of the soil remains, acommercial fabric cleaner or spotlifter may be necessary. Test a smallhidden area for colorfastness beforeusing a commercial upholsterycleaner or spot lifter. If the locallycleaned area gives any impressionthat a ring formation may result,clean the entire surface.

A paper towel can be used to blotexcess moisture from the fabric orcarpet after the cleaning process.

Leather

Leather, and lighter colored leatherin particular, will need more frequentcleaning to prevent the buildup ofdust, dirt, and colors transferredfrom other items so that these donot become permanent stains.

To remove dust, a soft clothdampened with water can be used.If a more thorough cleaning isnecessary, a soft cloth dampenedwith a mild soap solution can beused. Your dealer has approvedleather cleaner available thatprovides superior cleaningperformance when used regularlyon finished automotive leathers.Allow the leather to dry naturally.

Do not use heat, steam, spot liftersor spot removers, or shoe polishon leather. Many commercial leathercleaners and coatings that are soldto preserve and protect leathermay permanently change theappearance and feel of the leatherand are not recommended. Do notuse silicone or wax-based products,or those containing organic solventsto clean the interior because theycan alter the appearance byincreasing the gloss in anon-uniform manner.


10-108 Vehicle Care

Instrument Panel, Vinyl, andOther Plastic Surfaces

To remove dust, a soft clothdampened with water can beused. If a more thorough cleaningis necessary, a clean soft clothdampened with a mild soap solutioncan be used to gently remove dustand dirt. Never use spot lifters orremovers on plastic surfaces.Many commercial cleaners andcoatings that are sold to preserveand protect soft plastic surfacesmay permanently change theappearance and feel of the interiorand are not recommended. Do notuse silicone or wax-based products,or those containing organic solventsto clean the interior because theycan alter the appearance byincreasing the gloss in anon-uniform manner.

Some commercial products mayincrease gloss on the instrumentpanel. The increase in gloss maycause annoying reflections in thewindshield and even make it difficultto see through the windshield undercertain conditions.

Care of Safety Belts

Keep belts clean and dry.

{ WARNING

Do not bleach or dye safety belts.It may severely weaken them. Ina crash, they might not be able toprovide adequate protection.Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.

Floor Mats

{ WARNING

If a floor mat is the wrong size oris not properly installed, it caninterfere with the acceleratorpedal and/or brake pedal.Interference with the pedals cancause unintended accelerationand/or increased stoppingdistance which can cause a crashand injury. Make sure the floormat does not interfere with theaccelerator or brake pedal.


Vehicle Care 10-109

Use the following guidelines forproper floor mat usage.. The original equipment floor

mats were designed for yourvehicle. If the floor mats needreplacing, it is recommendedthat certified floor mats bepurchased. Non-certified floormats may not fit properly andmay interfere with theaccelerator or brake pedal.Always check that the floor matsdo not interfere with the pedals.

. Use the floor mat with thecorrect side up. Do not turnit over.

. Do not place anything on top ofthe driver side floor mat.

. Use only a single floor mat onthe driver side.

. Do not place one floor mat ontop of another.

Removing and Replacing theFloor Mats

The driver side floor mat is held inplace by two button-type retainers.The passenger side floor mat is heldin place by one button-type retainer.

1. Pull up on the rear of the floormat to unlock each retainer andremove.

2. Reinstall by lining up the floormat retainer openings over thecarpet retainers and snappinginto position.

3. Make sure the floor mat isproperly secured and verify thatit does not interfere with theaccelerator or brake pedal.


10-110 Vehicle Care

2 NOTES


Service and Maintenance 11-1

Service andMaintenance

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Scheduled MaintenanceScheduled Maintenance . . . . . 11-3

Recommended Fluids,Lubricants, and PartsRecommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4

Maintenance ReplacementParts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6

Maintenance RecordsMaintenance Records . . . . . . . . 11-7

General InformationNotice: Maintenanceintervals, checks, inspections,recommended fluids, andlubricants are necessary to keepthis vehicle in good workingcondition. Damage caused byfailure to follow scheduledmaintenance might not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

As the vehicle owner, you areresponsible for the scheduledmaintenance in this section. Werecommend having your dealerperform these services. Propervehicle maintenance helps tokeep the vehicle in good workingcondition, improves fuel economy,and reduces vehicle emissions forbetter air quality.

Because of all the different wayspeople use vehicles, maintenanceneeds vary. The vehicle might needmore frequent checks and services.Please read the information underScheduled Maintenance. To keepthe vehicle in good condition, seeyour dealer.

The maintenance schedule is forvehicles that:. Carry passengers and cargo

within recommended limits onthe Tire and Loading Informationlabel. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9‑12.

. Are driven on reasonable roadsurfaces within legal drivinglimits.

. Use the recommended fuel.See Recommended Fuel onpage 9‑48.


11-2 Service and Maintenance

{ WARNING

Performing maintenance workcan be dangerous. Some jobscan cause serious injury. Performmaintenance work only if youhave the required know-how andthe proper tools and equipment.If in doubt, see your dealer tohave a qualified technician do thework. See Doing Your OwnService Work on page 10‑4.

At your dealer, you can be certainthat you will receive the highestlevel of service available. Yourdealer has specially trainedservice technicians, uses genuinereplacement parts, as well as,up‐to‐date tools and equipment toensure fast and accuratediagnostics.

The proper replacement parts,fluids, and lubricants to use arelisted in Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑4 andMaintenance Replacement Parts onpage 11‑6. We recommend the useof genuine parts from your dealer.

Rotation of New Tires

To maintain ride, handling, andperformance of the vehicle, it isimportant that the first rotationservice for new tires be performed.Tires should be rotated every12 000 km/7,500 mi. See TireRotation on page 10‑67.



ScheduledMaintenanceWhen the Change Engine OilSoon Message Displays

Change engine oil and filter. SeeEngine Oil on page 10‑10. AnEmission Control Service.

When the CHANGE ENGINE OILSOON message displays, service isrequired for the vehicle as soon aspossible, within the next 1 000 km/600 miles. If driving under the bestconditions, the engine oil life systemmight not indicate the need forvehicle service for more than a year.

The engine oil and filter must bechanged at least once a year andthe oil life system must be reset.Your dealer has trained servicetechnicians who will perform thiswork and reset the system. If theengine oil life system is resetaccidentally, service the vehiclewithin 5 000 km/3,000 miles sincethe last service. Reset the oil lifesystem whenever the oil is changed.See Engine Oil Life System onpage 10‑14.

Warranty and Service Booklet

Please refer to the Saab Warrantyand Service Booklet for thecomplete scheduled maintenancechart and requirements.



Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Engine Oil

The engine requires engine oil approved to the dexos specification. Oilsmeeting this specification can be identified with the dexos certificationmark. Look for and use only an engine oil that displays the dexoscertification mark of the proper viscosity grade. See Engine Oil onpage 10‑10.

Engine Coolant50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL Coolant.See Engine Coolant on page 10‑20.

Hydraulic Brake System DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (Part No. 88863461).

Windshield Washer Optikleen® Washer Solvent.

Hydraulic Power Steering System DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.

Automatic Transmission(3.0L V6 Engine)

DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.

Automatic Transmission(2.8L V6 Engine)

AW‐1 Automatic Transmission Fluid (Part No.119256039).

Chassis LubricationChassis Lubricant (Part No. 12377985) or lubricant meeting requirementsof NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.

Key Lock Cylinders Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (Part No. 12346241).



Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Hood Latch Assembly, SecondaryLatch, Pivots, Spring Anchor, and

Release Pawl

Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (Part No. 12346293) or lubricant meetingrequirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.

Hood, Door, and Folding Seat Hinges Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (Part No. 12346241).

Power Liftgate Actuator Ball Joint Multi-Purpose Lubricant (Part No. 89021668).

Weatherstrip ConditioningWeatherstrip Lubricant (Part No. 3634770) or Dielectric Silicone Grease(Part No. 12345579).



Maintenance Replacement PartsReplacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.

Part Part Number

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 20897358

Engine Oil Filter

2.8L V6 Engine 12593333

3.0L V6 Engine 89017524

Passenger Compartment Air Filter Element 13271191

Spark Plugs

2.8L V6 Engine 12622561

3.0L V6 Engine 12622561

Wiper Blades

Driver Side – 65.0 cm (25.6 in) 25979378

Passenger Side – 42.5 cm (16.7 in) 25979379

Rear – 30.0 cm (11.8 in) 20825882



Maintenance RecordsAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and thetype of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.

Maintenance Record

DateOdometerReading

Serviced By Services Performed



Maintenance Record (cont.)

Date OdometerReading



Technical Data 12-1

Technical Data

Vehicle IdentificationVehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Service Parts IdentificationLabel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Vehicle DataCapacities andSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . 12-4

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN)

This legal identifier is in the frontcorner of the instrument panel, onthe left side of the vehicle. It can beseen through the windshield fromoutside. The VIN also appears onthe Vehicle Certification and ServiceParts labels and certificates of titleand registration.

Engine Identification

The eighth character in the VIN isthe engine code. This codeidentifies the vehicle's engine,specifications, and replacementparts. See “Engine Specifications”under Capacities and Specificationson page 12‑2 for the vehicle'sengine code.

Service PartsIdentification LabelThis label, on the inside of the rearside cargo management cover, hasthe following information:. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN).. Model designation.. Paint information.. Production options and special

equipment.

Do not remove this label from thevehicle.


12-2 Technical Data

Vehicle Data

Capacities and Specifications

ApplicationCapacities

Metric English

Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134aFor the air conditioning system refrigerant chargeamount, see the refrigerant label located under the

hood. See your dealer for more information.

Engine Cooling System

2.8L V6 Engine 12.8 L 13.5 qt

3.0L V6 Engine 11.7 L 12.3 qt

Engine Oil with Filter

2.8L V6 Engine 5.7 L 6.0 qt

3.0L V6 Engine 5.7 L 6.0 qt

Fuel Tank 79.5 L 21.0 gal

Transmission Fluid

2.8L V6 6–Speed Automatic (Transmission Requires NoFluid Replacement)

— —

3.0L V6 6–Speed Automatic* (Drain and Refill) 9.0 L 9.5 qt


Technical Data 12-3

ApplicationCapacities

Metric English

Wheel Nut Torque 150Y 110 ft lb

*See Automatic Transmission Fluid on page 10‑16 for information on checking fluid level.

All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in thismanual. Recheck fluid level after filling.

Engine Specifications

Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap

2.8L V6 (LAU) 6 Automatic 1.10 mm (0.043 in)

3.0L V6 (LF1) Y Automatic 1.10 mm (0.043 in)


12-4 Technical Data

Engine Drive Belt Routing

2.8L, 3.0L V6 Engines


Customer Information 13-1

CustomerInformation

Customer InformationCustomer SatisfactionProcedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

Customer AssistanceOffices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3

Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) Users . . . . . 13-4

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4

Scheduling ServiceAppointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6

Courtesy TransportationProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7

Collision Damage Repair . . . . 13-7

Reporting Safety DefectsReporting Safety Defects tothe United StatesGovernment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9

Reporting Safety Defects tothe CanadianGovernment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10

Reporting Safety Defectsto Saab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10

Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacyVehicle Data Recording andPrivacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11

Event Data Recorders . . . . . . 13-11OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12Navigation System . . . . . . . . . 13-12Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-12

Radio FrequencyStatement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12

Customer Information

Customer SatisfactionProcedureYour satisfaction and goodwill areimportant to your dealer and toSaab. Normally, any concernswith the sales transaction or theoperation of the vehicle will beresolved by your dealer sales orservice departments. Sometimes,however, despite the best intentionsof all concerned, misunderstandingscan occur. If your concern has notbeen resolved to your satisfaction,the following steps should be taken:

STEP ONE: Discuss your concernwith a member of dealershipmanagement. Normally, concernscan be quickly resolved at that level.If the matter has already beenreviewed with the sales, service,or parts manager, contact the ownerof your dealership or the generalmanager.


13-2 Customer Information

STEP TWO: If after contacting amember of dealership management,it appears your concern cannot beresolved by your dealership withoutfurther help, in the U.S., call1-800-955-9007. In Canada, contactSaab Customer Assistance Centreat 1-877-919-SAAB.

We encourage you to call thetoll-free number in order to give theinquiry prompt attention. Have thefollowing information available togive the Customer Assistancerepresentative:. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN). This is availablefrom the vehicle registration ortitle, or the plate at the top left ofthe instrument panel and visiblethrough the windshield.

. Dealership name and location.

. Vehicle delivery date andpresent mileage.

When contacting Saab, rememberthat your concern will likely beresolved at a dealer facility. That iswhy we suggest following Step Onefirst.

STEP THREE — U.S. Owners:Both Saab and your dealer arecommitted to making sure you arecompletely satisfied with the newvehicle. However, if you continue toremain unsatisfied after followingthe procedure outlined in Steps Oneand Two, you can file with the BetterBusiness Bureau (BBB) Auto Line®

Program to enforce your rights.

The BBB Auto Line Program is anout-of-court program administeredby the Council of Better BusinessBureaus to settle automotivedisputes regarding vehicle repairs orthe interpretation of the New VehicleLimited Warranty. Although you maybe required to resort to this informaldispute resolution program prior tofiling a court action, use of theprogram is free of charge and yourcase will generally be heard within

40 days. If you do not agree with thedecision given in your case, youmay reject it and proceed with anyother venue for relief availableto you.

You may contact the BBB AutoLine Program using the toll-freetelephone number or write them atthe following address:

BBB Auto Line ProgramCouncil of Better BusinessBureaus, Inc.4200 Wilson BoulevardSuite 800Arlington, VA 22203-1838

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100www.dr.bbb.org/goauto

This program is available in all50 states and the District ofColumbia. Eligibility is limited byvehicle age, mileage, and otherfactors. Saab reserves the right tochange eligibility limitations and/ordiscontinue its participation in thisprogram.



STEP THREE — CanadianOwners: In the event that you donot feel your concerns have beenaddressed after following theprocedure outlined in Steps Oneand Two, Saab wants you to beaware of its participation in ano-charge Mediation/ArbitrationProgram. Saab has committed tobinding arbitration of owner disputesinvolving factory-related vehicleservice claims. The programprovides for the review of the factsinvolved by an impartial third partyarbiter, and may include an informalhearing before the arbiter. Theprogram is designed so that theentire dispute settlement process,from the time you file your complaintto the final decision, should becompleted in approximately70 days. We believe our impartialprogram offers advantages overcourts in most jurisdictions becauseit is informal, quick, and free ofcharge.

For further information concerningeligibility in the Canadian MotorVehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or callSaab Customer Assistance Centre,1‐877‐919‐SAAB, or write to:

Mediation/Arbitration ProgramIFS Vehicle Distributors ULC2400 South Service Road WestOakville, Ontario L6L 5M9

The inquiry should be accompaniedby the Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN).

Customer AssistanceOfficesSaab encourages customers to callthe toll-free number for assistance.However, if a customer wishes towrite or e-mail Saab, refer to theaddresses below.

United States

Saab Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33166Detroit, MI 48232-5166www.saabusa.com

1-800-955-9007Roadside Assistance:1-800-852-9001

Canada

IFS Vehicle Distributors ULC2400 South Service Road WestOakville, Ontario L6L [email protected]

1-877-919-SAABRoadside Assistance:1-800-567-4555

Overseas

Please contact the local SaabBusiness Unit.



Customer Assistance forText Telephone (TTY)UsersTo assist customers who are deaf,hard of hearing, or speech-impairedand who use Text Telephones(TTYs), Saab has TTY equipmentavailable at its Customer AssistanceCenter. Any TTY user cancommunicate with Saab by dialing:1-866-612-0380. TTY users inCanada can dial 1-877-919-SAAB.

Roadside AssistanceProgramFor U.S.‐purchased vehicles,call 1‐800‐852-9001.

For Canadian‐purchased vehicles,call 1‐800‐567-4555.

Service is available 24 hours a day,365 days a year.

Calling for Assistance

When calling Roadside Assistance,have the following informationready:. Your name, home address, and

home telephone number.. Telephone number of your

location.. Location of the vehicle.. Model, year, color, and license

plate number of the vehicle.. Odometer reading, Vehicle

Identification Number (VIN), anddelivery date of the vehicle.

. Description of the problem.

Coverage

Services are provided up to 4 years/80 000 km (50,000 mi), whichevercomes first.

In the U.S., anyone driving thevehicle is covered. In Canada, aperson driving the vehicle withoutpermission from the owner is notcovered.

Roadside Assistance is not a part ofthe New Vehicle Limited Warranty.Saab reserves the right to makeany changes or discontinue theRoadside Assistance program atany time without notification.

Saab reserves the right to limitservices or payment to an owner ordriver if they decide the claims aremade too often, or the same type ofclaim is made many times.

Services Provided. Emergency Fuel Delivery:

Delivery of enough fuel for thevehicle to get to the nearestservice station.

. Lock‐Out Service: Service tounlock the vehicle if you arelocked out. A remote unlockmay be available if you haveOnStar®. For security reasons,the driver must presentidentification before thisservice is given.



. Emergency Tow From a PublicRoad or Highway: Tow to thenearest Saab dealer for warrantyservice, or if the vehicle was in acrash and cannot be driven.Assistance is also given whenthe vehicle is stuck in sand,mud, or snow.

. Flat Tire Change: Service tochange a flat tire with the sparetire. The spare tire, if equipped,must be in good condition andproperly inflated. It is the owner'sresponsibility for the repair orreplacement of the tire if it isnot covered by the warranty.

. Battery Jump Start: Service tojump start a dead battery.

. Trip Routing Service: Detailedmaps of North America areprovided when requested eitherwith the most direct route or themost scenic route. Additionaltravel information is alsoavailable. Allow three weeksfor delivery.

. Trip Interruption Benefits andAssistance: If your trip isinterrupted due to a warrantyfailure, incidental expensesmay be reimbursed during the4 years/80 000 km (50,000 mi)Powertrain warranty period.Items considered are hotel,meals, and rental car.

Services Not Included inRoadside Assistance. Impound towing caused by

violation of any laws.. Legal fines.. Mounting, dismounting,

or changing of snow tires,chains, or other traction devices.

. Towing or services for vehiclesdriven on a non-public road orhighway.

Services Specific toCanadian‐Purchased Vehicles. Fuel delivery: Reimbursement

is approximately $5 Canadian.Propane and other fuels are notprovided through this service.

. Lock-Out Service: Vehicleregistration is required.



. Trip Routing Service: Detailedmaps of North America areprovided when requested eitherwith the most direct route or themost scenic route. There is a sixrequest limit per year. Additionaltravel information is alsoavailable. Allow three weeksfor delivery.

. Trip Interruption Benefits andAssistance: Must be over250♦kilometres from where yourtrip was started to qualify. Saabrequires pre-authorization,original detailed receipts, and acopy of the repair orders. Onceauthorization has been received,the Roadside Assistance advisorwill help you make arrangementsand explain how to receivepayment.

. Alternative Service: Ifassistance cannot be providedright away, the RoadsideAssistance advisor may giveyou permission to get localemergency road service. Youwill receive payment, up to $100,after sending the original receiptto Roadside Assistance.Mechanical failures may becovered, however any cost forparts and labor for repairs notcovered by the warranty are theowner responsibility.

Scheduling ServiceAppointmentsWhen the vehicle requires warrantyservice, contact your dealer andrequest an appointment. Byscheduling a service appointmentand advising the service consultantof your transportation needs, yourdealer can help minimize yourinconvenience.

If the vehicle cannot be scheduledinto the service departmentimmediately, keep driving it untilit can be scheduled for service,unless, of course, the problem issafety related. If it is, please callyour dealership, let them know this,and ask for instructions.

If your dealer requests you to bringthe vehicle for service, you areurged to do so as early in the workday as possible to allow for thesame-day repair.



Courtesy TransportationProgramDuring the warranty coverageperiod, alternate transportationand/or reimbursement of certaintransportation expenses will beavailable under the CourtesyTransportation Program if yourvehicle requires warranty repairs.Several transportation options areavailable. See your dealer for moreinformation. Courtesy transportationis not part of, or included in, thecoverage provided by IFS VehicleDistributors ULC Saab warranty.IFS Vehicle Distributors ULCreserves the right to make anychanges or discontinue theCourtesy Transportation Programat any time without notification.

Collision Damage RepairIf the vehicle is involved in acollision and it is damaged,have the damage repaired by aqualified technician using the properequipment and quality replacementparts. Poorly performed collisionrepairs diminish the vehicle resalevalue, and safety performance canbe compromised in subsequentcollisions.

Collision Parts

Genuine Saab Collision parts arenew parts made with the samematerials and construction methodsas the parts with which the vehiclewas originally built. Genuine SaabCollision parts are the best choice toensure that the vehicle's designedappearance, durability, and safetyare preserved. The use of GenuineSaab parts can help maintain theSaab New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Recycled original equipment partsmay also be used for repair. Theseparts are typically removed from

vehicles that were total losses inprior crashes. In most cases, theparts being recycled are fromundamaged sections of the vehicle.A recycled original equipment Saabpart may be an acceptable choice tomaintain the vehicle's originallydesigned appearance and safetyperformance; however, the history ofthese parts is not known. Such partsare not covered by the Saab NewVehicle Limited Warranty, and anyrelated failures are not covered bythat warranty.

Aftermarket collision parts arealso available. These are made bycompanies other than Saab andmay not have been tested for thevehicle. As a result, these partsmay fit poorly, exhibit prematuredurability/corrosion problems,and may not perform properly insubsequent collisions. Aftermarketparts are not covered by the SaabNew Vehicle Limited Warranty, andany vehicle failure related to suchparts is not covered by thatwarranty.



Repair Facility

Saab also recommends that youchoose a collision repair facility thatmeets your needs before you everneed collision repairs. Your dealermay have a collision repair centerwith Saab-trained technicians andstate‐of‐the‐art equipment, or beable to recommend a collisionrepair center that has Saab-trainedtechnicians and comparableequipment.

Insuring the Vehicle

Protect your investment in the Saabvehicle with comprehensive andcollision insurance coverage. Thereare significant differences in thequality of coverage afforded byvarious insurance policy terms.Many insurance policies providereduced protection to the Saabvehicle by limiting compensationfor damage repairs by usingaftermarket collision parts. Someinsurance companies will notspecify aftermarket collision parts.

When purchasing insurance, werecommend that you ensure that thevehicle will be repaired with Saaboriginal equipment collision parts.If such insurance coverage isnot available from your currentinsurance carrier, consider switchingto another insurance carrier.

If the vehicle is leased, the leasingcompany may require you to haveinsurance that ensures repairs withGenuine Saab Original EquipmentManufacturer (OEM) parts orGenuine Manufacturer replacementparts. Read the lease carefully, asyou may be charged at the end ofthe lease for poor quality repairs.

If a Crash Occurs

If there has been an injury, callemergency services for help. Do notleave the scene of a crash until allmatters have been taken care of.Move the vehicle only if its positionputs you in danger, or you areinstructed to move it by a policeofficer.

Give only the necessary informationto police and other parties involvedin the crash.

For emergency towing, seeRoadside Assistance Program onpage 13‑4.

Gather the following information:. Driver name, address, and

telephone number.. Driver license number.. Owner name, address, and

telephone number.. Vehicle license plate number.. Vehicle make, model, and

model year.. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN).. Insurance company and policy

number.. General description of the

damage to the other vehicle.



Choose a reputable repair facilitythat uses quality replacement parts.See “Collision Parts” earlier in thissection.

If the airbag has inflated, see WhatWill You See after an AirbagInflates? on page 3‑36.

Managing the Vehicle DamageRepair Process

In the event that the vehicle requiresdamage repairs, Saab recommendsthat you take an active role in itsrepair. If you have a pre-determinedrepair facility of choice, take thevehicle there, or have it towed there.Specify to the facility that anyrequired replacement collisionparts be original equipment parts,either new Genuine Saab partsor recycled original Saab parts.Remember, recycled parts will notbe covered by the Saab vehiclewarranty.

Insurance pays the bill for the repair,but you must live with the repair.Depending on your policy limits,your insurance company mayinitially value the repair usingaftermarket parts. Discuss this withthe repair professional, and insiston Genuine Saab parts. Remember,if the vehicle is leased, you maybe obligated to have the vehiclerepaired with Genuine Saab parts,even if your insurance coveragedoes not pay the full cost.

If another party's insurancecompany is paying for the repairs,you are not obligated to accept arepair valuation based on thatinsurance company's collisionpolicy repair limits, as you have nocontractual limits with that company.In such cases, you can have controlof the repair and parts choices aslong as the cost stays withinreasonable limits.

Reporting SafetyDefects

Reporting Safety Defectsto the United StatesGovernmentIf you believe that your vehiclehas a defect which could causea crash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediatelyinform the National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA) in addition tonotifying Saab.

If NHTSA receives similarcomplaints, it may open aninvestigation, and if it finds thata safety defect exists in a groupof vehicles, it may order arecall and remedy campaign.However, NHTSA cannotbecome involved in individualproblems between you, yourdealer, or Saab.



To contact NHTSA, you maycall the Vehicle Safety Hotlinetoll-free at 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go tohttp://www.safercar.gov; orwrite to:

Administrator, NHTSA1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.Washington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtain otherinformation about motorvehicle safety fromhttp://www.safercar.gov.

Reporting Safety Defectsto the CanadianGovernmentIf you live in Canada, and youbelieve that the vehicle has a safetydefect, notify Transport Canadaimmediately, and notify IFS VehicleDistributors ULC. Call TransportCanada at 1-800-333-0510 orwrite to:

Transport CanadaRoad Safety Branch80 rue NoelGatineau, QC J8Z 0A1

Reporting Safety Defectsto SaabIn addition to notifying NHTSA(or Transport Canada) in asituation like this, notify Saab.

Call 1-800-955-9007, or write:

Saab Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33166Detroit, MI 48232-5166

In Canada, call 1-877-919-SAAB,or write:

IFS Vehicle Distributors ULC2400 South Service Road WestOakville, Ontario L6L 5M9



Vehicle DataRecording andPrivacyThis Saab vehicle has a number ofsophisticated computers that recordinformation about the vehicle’sperformance and how it is driven.For example, the vehicle usescomputer modules to monitor andcontrol engine and transmissionperformance, to monitor theconditions for airbag deploymentand deploy airbags in a crash, and,if so equipped, to provide antilockbraking to help the driver control thevehicle. These modules may storedata to help your dealer technicianservice the vehicle. Some modulesmay also store data about how youoperate the vehicle, such as rate offuel consumption or average speed.These modules may also retain theowner’s personal preferences, suchas radio pre-sets, seat positions,and temperature settings.

Event Data RecordersThis vehicle has an Event DataRecorder (EDR). The main purposeof an EDR is to record, in certaincrash or near crash-like situations,such as an airbag deployment orhitting a road obstacle, data that willassist in understanding how avehicle's systems performed. TheEDR is designed to record datarelated to vehicle dynamics andsafety systems for a short period oftime, typically 30 seconds or less.The EDR in this vehicle is designedto record such data as:. How various systems in the

vehicle were operating.. Whether or not the driver and

passenger safety belts werebuckled/fastened.

. How far, if at all, the driver waspressing the accelerator and/orbrake pedal.

. How fast the vehicle wastraveling.

This data can help provide a betterunderstanding of the circumstancesin which crashes and injuries occur.

Important: EDR data is recordedby the vehicle only if a non-trivialcrash situation occurs; no data isrecorded by the EDR under normaldriving conditions and no personaldata (e.g., name, gender, age, andcrash location) is recorded.However, other parties, such as lawenforcement, could combine theEDR data with the type ofpersonally identifying data routinelyacquired during a crashinvestigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR,special equipment is required, andaccess to the vehicle or the EDR isneeded. In addition to the vehiclemanufacturer, other parties, such aslaw enforcement, that have thespecial equipment, can read theinformation if they have access tothe vehicle or the EDR.



Saab will not access this data orshare it with others except: with theconsent of the vehicle owner or,if the vehicle is leased, with theconsent of the lessee; in responseto an official request by police orsimilar government office; as part ofSaab's defense of litigation throughthe discovery process; or, asrequired by law. Data that Saabcollects or receives may also beused for Saab research needs ormay be made available to others forresearch purposes, where a need isshown and the data is not tied to aspecific vehicle or vehicle owner.

OnStar®

If the vehicle is equipped with anactive OnStar system, that systemmay also record data in crash ornear crash‐like situations. TheOnStar Terms and Conditionsprovides information on datacollection and use and is availablein the OnStar glove box kit, atwww.onstar.com (U.S.) or

www.onstar.ca (Canada), or bypressing theQ button andspeaking to an advisor.

Navigation SystemIf the vehicle has a navigationsystem, use of the system mayresult in the storage of destinations,addresses, telephone numbers, andother trip information. Refer to thenavigation system operating manualfor information on stored data andfor deletion instructions.

Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID)RFID technology is used in somevehicles for functions such as tirepressure monitoring and ignitionsystem security, as well as inconnection with conveniencessuch as key fobs for remote doorlocking/unlocking and starting, andin-vehicle transmitters for garagedoor openers. RFID technology inSaab vehicles does not use or

record personal information or linkwith any other Saab systemcontaining personal information.

Radio FrequencyStatementThis vehicle has systems thatoperate on a radio frequency thatcomply with Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and with Industry CanadaStandards RSS‐210/220/310.

Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. The device may not causeinterference.

2. The device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may causeundesired operation of thedevice.

Changes or modifications to any ofthese systems by other than anauthorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.


INDEX i-1

AAccessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22Adaptive ForwardLighting (AFL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Adaptive Forward Lighting(AFL) Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28

Add-On ElectricalEquipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-61

Adjustable Throttle andBrake Pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18

AdjustmentsLumbar, Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7Thigh Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . 10-16Air Filter, PassengerCompartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7

Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6AirbagAdding Equipment to theVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-43

Airbag SystemCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-44How Does an AirbagRestrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-35

Passenger SensingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-38

What Makes an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-35

What Will You See Afteran Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . .3-36

When Should an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-33

Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . .3-32AirbagsPassenger StatusIndicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17

Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16Servicing Airbag-EquippedVehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-42

System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29Alarm SystemAnti-Theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16

All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . 10-30, 9-30Anti-TheftAlarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16Alarm System Messages . . . . .5-40

Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23

Appearance CareExterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-101Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-105

Armrest Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Assistance Program,Roadside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4

AutomaticDimming Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20Headlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . 9-26Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-28

BBattery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-92Load Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8Voltage and ChargingMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34

Blade Replacement,Wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32


i-2 INDEX

BrakePedal and AdjustableThrottle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-18

Brake System WarningLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-30Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-33Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-31System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34

Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 9-17Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43Back-Up Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . 10-42Taillamps and TurnSignal Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40

Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69

CCalibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6CaliforniaFuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . .9-48Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3

Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3Camera, Rear Vision . . . . . . . . . . 9-43Canadian Vehicle Owners . . . . . . . . iiiCapacities andSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Carbon MonoxideEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-24Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9

CargoCover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3Management System . . . . . . . . . . 4-5Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

Cargo Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7Cargo Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9Cautions, Danger, andWarnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii

Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . 4-2Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-75

Charging System Light . . . . . . . . 5-18CheckEngine Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18

Child RestraintsInfants and YoungChildren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-47

Lower Anchors andTethers for Children . . . . . . . . .3-53

Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-45Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-62, 3-64Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-50

Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44CleaningExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-101Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-105

Climate Control SystemsDual Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Cluster, Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10Collision Damage Repair . . . . . . 13-7Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . 10-92Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35

Compressor Kit, TireSealant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-77


INDEX i-3

Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18CoolantEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20Engine TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19Engine Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36

Courtesy Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7Courtesy TransportationProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7

CoverCargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10

Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35

Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . 13-4Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-3Text Telephone (TTY)Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-4

Customer SatisfactionProcedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

DDamage Repair, Collision . . . . . . 13-7Danger, Warnings, andCautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii

Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . 13-11Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7DoorAjar Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Rear Seat Pass-Through . . . . .3-13

Drive Belt Routing, Engine . . . . . 12-4Drive SystemsAll-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . 10-30, 9-30

Driver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29

DrivingCharacteristics andTowing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-52

Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2

Driving (cont.)Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2For Better Fuel Economy . . . . .1-22Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . 9-8If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . . 9-11Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . .9-12Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9

Dual Automatic ClimateControl System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

EECO Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29Economy ModeFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-29

Electric Parking BrakeLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

Electrical Equipment,Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-61


i-4 INDEX

Electrical SystemEngine CompartmentFuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45


Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47

Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44Rear Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49

Electronic StabilityProgram (ESP) . . . . . . . . . 1-20, 9-36

Electronic Stability Program(ESP) Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24

Electronic Stability Program(ESP)/Traction ControlSystem Indicator Light . . . . . . . 5-25

EngineAir Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16Check and Service EngineSoon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18

Compartment Overview . . . . . . .10-6Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20

Engine (cont.)Coolant TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19Cooling SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36

Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . .12-4Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-24Gasoline Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-20Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26Running While Parked . . . . . . . .9-25

Engine OilLife System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37

Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7Equipment, Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-59Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . 13-11Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . 3-28Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . 6-1

FFeaturesMemory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8

Filter,Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . 10-16

First Aid Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . 6-5Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-75Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-85

Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-108FluidAutomatic Transmission . . . . 10-16Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26

Fog LampsFront . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19Front Fog LampLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28

Front SeatsAdjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Heated and Ventilated . . . . . . . .3-10

Front Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2


INDEX i-5

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-49Economy Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-51

Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-50Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . .9-49Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . .9-48Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . .5-27Recommended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-48Requirements, California . . . . .9-48System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38

Fuel EconomyDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-22

Fuel Economy Gauge . . . . . . . . . 5-13Fuel Economy Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29FusesEngine CompartmentFuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45


Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47

Rear Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49

GGarage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . 5-48Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-48

GasolineSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-48

Gasoline Engine, Starting . . . . . . 9-20GaugeTurbo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14

GaugesEngine CoolantTemperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12Warning Lights andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

General InformationService and Maintenance . . . . . 11-1Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-52Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3

Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

HHalogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . 6-5Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38Adaptive ForwardLighting (AFL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-38Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . .5-28High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . .5-29Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

HeatedRear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13

Heated and VentilatedFront Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10

Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20HeaterEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22


i-6 INDEX

High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28High-Speed Operation . . . . . . . . 10-61Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . 9-8Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . 9-34Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18

IIgnition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17Indicator LightElectronic StabilityProgram (ESP)/TractionControl System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25

Infants and Young Children,Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47

Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii

JJump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-92

KKey and Lock Messages . . . . . . . 5-38Keyless EntryRemote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . 2-3

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

LLabeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . 10-53Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38LampsCargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7Daytime Running (DRL) . . . . . . . 6-3Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Front Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . .5-18On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7Taillamps and TurnSignal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23

LATCH SystemReplacing Parts After aCrash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-61

LATCH, Lower Anchors andTethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . 3-53

LiftgateCarbon Monoxide . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12

LightAdaptive Forward Lighting(AFL) Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28

Electronic StabilityProgram (ESP) Off . . . . . . . . . .5-24

LightingAdaptive Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

LightsAirbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23

Brake System Warning . . . . . . .5-22Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29


INDEX i-7

Lights (cont.)Electric Parking Brake . . . . . . . .5-22Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .5-26Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Front Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2Low Fuel Warning . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . .5-15Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25Traction Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24

Limited-Slip Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . 9-37LocksDoor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12

Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . . 5-27Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCHSystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53

Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

MMaintenanceRecords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7

Maintenance ScheduleRecommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4

Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . 11-3Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . 5-18Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8MessagesAirbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40Anti-Theft Alarm System . . . . . .5-40Battery Voltage andCharging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34

Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35Engine Cooling System . . . . . . .5-36Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37Engine Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38Key and Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38

Messages (cont.)Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38Object Detection System . . . . .5-39Ride Control System . . . . . . . . . .5-39Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40Service Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40Starting the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . .5-40Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34Vehicle Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-42Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-42

MirrorsAutomatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . .2-20Automatic DimmingRearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21

Convex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20Manual Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21Park Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19

Monitor System,Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61


i-8 INDEX

NNavigationVehicle Data Recordingand Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12

NetCargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9

Net, Convenience . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . 9-17

OObject Detection SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39

Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12Off-RoadRecovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6

OilEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-14Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26

Older Children, Restraints . . . . . 3-45OnStar® System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23OutletsPower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . 10-24

PParkShifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-24

Park Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20ParkingAssist, Ultrasonic . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-41Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-31Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-32

Over Things That Burn . . . . . . .9-24Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17

Passenger CompartmentAir Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7

Passenger Sensing System . . . 3-38Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements, California . . . . . 10-3

PersonalizationVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-42

PowerDoor Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Retained Accessory (RAP) . . .9-22

Power (cont.)Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22

Pregnancy,Using Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27

PrivacyRadio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-12

ProgramCourtesy Transportation . . . . . .13-7

Proposition 65 Warning,California . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

RRadio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . . 13-12Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12

Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7Rear AxleLimited-Slip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-37

Rear Climate ControlSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

Rear SeatPass-Through Door . . . . . . . . . . 3-13


INDEX i-9

Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13

Rear Vision Camera (RVC) . . . . 9-43Rear Window Washer/Wiper . . . . 5-5Rearview MirrorAutomatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . .2-21

Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8RecommendedFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-48

Recommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4

RecordsMaintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7

Recreational VehicleTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-97

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43Replacement PartsAirbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-44Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6

Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . 3-44

Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . 3-61

Replacing Safety BeltSystem Parts After aCrash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29

Reporting Safety DefectsCanadian Government . . . . . . 13-10U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-9

Reporting Safety Defectsto Saab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10

RestraintsWhere to Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-52

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22

Ride Control SystemsLimited Slip Rear Axle . . . . . . . .9-37Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39Selective . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-37

RoadsDriving, Wet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4

RoofSunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25

Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12

Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . 12-4Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25

SSafety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-18

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15Replacing After a Crash . . . . . .3-29Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . .3-27

Safety DefectsReporting to Saab . . . . . . . . . . 13-10

Safety Defects ReportingCanadian Government . . . . . . 13-10U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-9

Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . 3-28Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . . 11-3


i-10 INDEX

Scheduling Appointments . . . . . . 13-6Sealant Kit, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-77SeatsAdjustment, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Heated and VentilatedFront . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10

Heated, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13Lumbar Adjustment, Front . . . . . 3-7Power Adjustment, Front . . . . . . 3-4Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

Securing ChildRestraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-62, 3-64

SecurityLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16

Selective Ride Control . . . . . . . . . 9-37ServiceAccessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3

Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . .10-4Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18Maintenance Records . . . . . . . . 11-7

Service (cont.)Maintenance, GeneralInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Parts Identification Label . . . . .12-1Scheduling Appointments . . . . .13-6Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40

Servicing the Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42ShiftingInto Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-24

Signals, Turn andLane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Spare TireCompact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-92

Specifications andCapacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12Stability ProgramElectronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-20

Start Assist, Hills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . 10-31Starting the GasolineEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20

Starting the VehicleMesssages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40

Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Fluid, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Storage AreasArmrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Cargo Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3Cargo ManagementSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

Center Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . .4-12

Storing the Tire Sealantand Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . 10-85

Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ivSystemInfotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Roof Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-12


INDEX i-11

TTachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12TaillampsTurn Signal Lamps . . . . . . . . . 10-40

Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . 13-4Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . 2-17Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17

Thigh Support Adjustment . . . . . . 3-7Throttle, Adjustable . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7TiresBuying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-75Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-85Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-92Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-71If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-75Inflation Monitor System . . . . 10-63Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25

Tires (cont.)Pressure MonitorSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61

Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67Sealant andCompressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 10-77

Sealant and CompressorKit, Storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-85

Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53Terminology andDefinitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56

Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72

Wheel Alignment andTire Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-74When It Is Time forNew Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68

TowingDriving Characteristics . . . . . . . .9-52Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-59General Information . . . . . . . . . .9-52Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . 10-97

Towing (cont.)Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-56Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . .9-61Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-97

TractionControl System (TCS) . . . . . . . .9-34Limited-Slip Rear Axle . . . . . . . .9-37Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24Selective Ride Control . . . . . . . .9-37

TrailerSway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . .9-61

Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-56TransmissionAutomatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41

Transportation Program,Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7

Turbo Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5


i-12 INDEX

UUltrasonic Parking Assist . . . . . . 9-41Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72

Universal Remote System . . . . . 5-48Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-51Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-48

Using this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii

VVehicleCanadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iiiControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3IdentificationNumber (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1

Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-42Reminder Messages . . . . . . . . . .5-42Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-97

Vehicle CareStoring the Tire Sealantand Compressor Kit . . . . . . . 10-85

Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59Vehicle IdentificationService Parts IdentificationLabel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1

Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24

WWarningBrake System Light . . . . . . . . . . .5-22

Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iiiCautions and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . . iiiHazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26Washer Fluid Messages . . . . . . . 5-42Washer, Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

WheelsAlignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74

Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-71Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74

When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68

Where to Put the Restraint . . . . 3-52Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22

WindshieldWiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

WinterDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9

Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . 10-32WipersRear Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

2011 Saab 9-4X Owner Manual M · 2019-06-02 · Saab 9-4X Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (3,1) In...

Documents

Transcript of 2011 Saab 9-4X Owner Manual M · 2019-06-02 · Saab 9-4X Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (3,1) In...